Mikrokosmographia a description of the body of man. Together vvith the controuersies thereto belonging. Collected and translated out of all the best authors of anatomy, especially out of Gasper Bauhinus and Andreas Laurentius. By Helkiah Crooke Doctor of Physicke, physitian to His Maiestie, and his Highnesse professor in anatomy and chyrurgerie. Published by the Kings Maiesties especiall direction and warrant according to the first integrity, as it was originally written by the author.

THE EIGHTH BOOKE, Of the Senses and their Instruments, as also of the Uoyce.

The Praeface,

ALthough in the former Booke wee have made mention of the Instruments of the Senses when we described the Coniugations of the Sinnewes of the Brain, yet because there are many other parts in the Head set apart for their vse, wherein the glorious wisedome of our Creator dooth most manifestly shine and in the preseruation whereof wee are deepely interessed, I haue thought good to appropriate this Eight Booke vnto the History of the Senses. Now in euery Sense there is a Matter and a Forme. The Forme is the Fa∣culty which is a thing yssuing from the Soule and differing in Name not in Nature as it informeth this or that Matter which is the Instrument. The first of the Senses is the Eye the most precious part of the body; and they are two, that if one should miscarry the other might supply the necessity of Nature. They are set like Centinels or Scout-watches in the top of the Towre, whence they may discerne the far∣ther off if any thing approach either hurtfull or behoouefull that we may apply ourselues to it or auoyde it.

Galen is of opinion that the Head was placed vppermost in the bodie for the Eyes sake, because the Opticke Nerues stood in neede to bee very short. For their security they are scituated in Caues and fenced about with diuers Muniments. Aboue them hang a round arched brow to beare off and cast ouer what might fall from the Head, and betwixt them runnes the Nose as a strong wal, vnder them the bones of the Cheeke stand out, and at their side the hard bones of the Temples.

They are immediately couered with soft lids that they might not impeach the delicacy of the instrument; the vppermost are mooueable and verie nimble which do shut vp the pupils as well in rest to refresh them, as also when any outward iniury is ready to annoie them; the lowermost are immooueable or at least mooued insensibly. These liddes are againe bearded with haires whereby and wherein small bodies or Motes which happly in their approach are not discerned might be intercepted.

The Eyes themselues haue many Muscles allowed them whereby they are mooued eue∣ry way, vpward and downward, to the right and to the lefte and round: they are also by a Muscle susteined and kept stable or firmed whereby the sense is more certaine. Diuers Coats they haue wherewith they are couered, the first called Adnata, the second Cornea, the third Vuea, the fourth Aranea. There are also three Humours, the first Watery, the se∣cond Glassy and the third Christalline which is the chiefe Organe of the sight, and is assi∣sted by the other parts aboue mentioned. The eye indeede seeth with the Christalline hu∣mor, but it seeth perfectly and more accomplishedlye with the whole Organ or Instru∣mēt.

The obiect of this sense are those colors which are in the superficies of other bodies.

Next followeth the Eare, the Instrument whereby the Soule discerneth of all manner of sounds and voyces. The chiefe part of this Organ is a thin and subtle aire bredde in the ••are and seated within the cauity therof; to which aire the ends of the Nerues of hearing which come from the Braine doe attaine: and as the Opticke Nerue encompasseth the Cristalline humour, so this nerue of Hearing is thought to encompasse the In bred Ayre and spirit, and so the society growes betweene the instrument of the Sense and the inward principle of Sensation. Before this Aire is a Membrane stretched which we cal the Drum supported and established with three Bones, the smallest of the whole body, but none for∣med with more curious Art; the first is called the Hammer, the second the Anuile, the third the Stirrop. Many men haue laboured to assigne to each of these their proper vses and how they conferre to the sense of Hearing, but truth to say, their discourses do rather feed then fill the minds of their Readers.

God hath reserued many secrets in mans body to himselfe, whereof wee iustlie thinke this is one; yet we know that they sustaine the Membrane of the Tympane agaynst which the representation of the sound or voice is beaten and communicated to the inbred Aire. These sounds are admitted to the Instrumēt by the hole of hearing, a hard & dry entrance full of embowed Meanders and Convolutions, lest the outward aer falling or rushing sud∣denly vpon the Drum should endanger the breaking therof. Without the Eare there stan∣deth a gristly substance which partly defendeth the hole of Hearing that nothing fall into it, partly catcheth and staieth the sound that it passe not by.

The third Sense is that of Smelling, whose Instrument doth not yssue out of the Scull in those creatures which do respire, but is conteined within the substance of the brain: whēce it followeth that these 5. are called outward senses, not so much because they appear out∣wardly, but rather because their proper organs doe receiue the species or representations of outward things. The instrument therefore of smelling is a paire of productions issuing out of the forward Ventricles of the Braine, in which the faculty of smelling residing doeth comprehend the odors of things which together with the aer are drawne in thorough the passages of the nose, which is raysed higher in the face of a man then of other creatures, as well for beauty, as because the Braine of a man being large and therfore yeelding, abun∣dance of excrements might ther-through be better clensed. This nose is diuided in the middest by a gristly substance, aswell to breake and diuide the outward aire which in a great part is drawn in this way to be conueyed into the sharp arteries & so to the lungs; as also to disperse the parts of the obiect of this sense, that being so diuided it might e∣qually insinuate it selfe through the small holes of the spongy bone to both the produ∣ctions which determine on either side.

The fourth Sense is the Tast, the Forme whereof is seated in those Nerues which at∣taine vnto the tongue and pallat assisted by the spongy flesh of the tongue it selfe. For when any sauoury quality or affection imparted to a humor or iuice is applyed vnto the tongue; it stirreth vp the taste, and presently the image or species of that sauour is by the spirit residing in the Nerues conueied to the principall Sensator; and if it happen that the sauour be represented to the Instrument in a hard or congealed body as salt, pepper or such like, it cannot mooue the sense before it be melted by the heate, or at least haue communicated his affection vnto the moisture of the mouth, and therfore it is that no∣thing can affect the taste which cannot be dissolued, neither is he whose tongue is torri∣fied or parched with extraordinary heate a competentiudge of sauors or Tasts.

As for the Touch which is the fift and last sense; it is not conteined within any proper organ or instrument but equally diffused through the whole body, because the necessi∣ty of Nature did euery where require the presence thereof for the security of the life of the creature; and yet notwithstanding it dooth not (as other senses) receiue the im∣pression of all his owne proper obiects. For sensation is a passion: if therefore the Ob∣iect bee of the same temper with the Instrument, the sense is not affected therewith, because it doth not suffer by that which is like vnto it; but all the other senses do appre∣hend all those qualities which do fall vnder them; for being all vnlike to the instruments they must needs be affected by them. But because this sense hath no particular instru∣ment in the head, we shall only intreate of it by the way in this place; somwhat we haue spoken of it before in our discourse of the skin, and more we shal haue occasion to say in the booke of the Ioynts and the Vessels. Wherefore we descend vnto our History.

CHAP. I. Of the other part of the head which is called the Face, together with the vessels and muscles thereof.

HAuing gone through that part of the Head which is couered with a hairy scalfe and therefore by Aristotle in the 7 chapter of his 1. book de historia Animalium called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉; it remaineth that we proceed vn∣to the other part which is without hayre called in man 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉; which name it seemeth to haue receiued from the thing itselfe, saith the Philosopher in the first chapter of his third book de partibus Animali∣um, because a man 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, looketh forward; for of all creatures onely man goeth vpright and looketh directly forward. The Latines call it Facies, in the comely conformation and Beauty whereof the elegancy of the humane nature doth most appeare. It is also called Vultus a voluntatis iudicio, because it bewraieth the disposition of the will, and is especially changed according to the variety thereof. We cal it the Face or the countenance.

The parts therefore of the Face are two: the vpper is properly called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Fro••s •• ferendo, because it beareth in it the Passions of the minde, wee call it the Forehead whose lowest parts are the eye browes. The second and lower part of the Face beginneth at the eye-browes and reacheth to the bottome of the Chinne, in which there are many parts. Both these parts of the face haue also some parts conteining & some conteined. The containing parts are common or proper: common as the cuticle or scarfe-skin & the skin itselfe; which in this face, in the fingers ends, in the Yarde and the Cod is most thin. This skin in the Cheekes for the most part looketh red because of the affluence of blood from the vtter branch of the externall Iugular veine; which is disseminated betwixt it and the fleshy membrane. This skin is furnished with hayres; about the eyes for their security; a∣bout the mouth in men as an argument of their virility and a peculiar beauty of that sex; for in a woman those hayres are an especiall deformity. Hence also (saith Galen in the 14 chap. of his 11 book de vsu partium) a man becommeth more venerable, especially if whē he be grown to a ripe age the haires also do plentifully compasse his mouth on euery side, for which cause also nature hath left the Cheekes and the Nose bare and without haire.

This skin of the face is diuersly perforated for the eyes, the eares, the nosthrils and the mouth; partly that the sensible obiects might haue the freer accesse; partly to intromit ayre and nourishment and to auoide excrements. And these perforations if their actions bee alwayes required are alwayes open. As the nostrhils for respiration; the eares for hearing because these two were alwaies necessary. As for those whose functions were not so in∣desinent, especially in the time of sleepe and for the auoyding iminent dangers, those perforations I say, for more security may be shut as the eyes and the mouth.

The fat of the face is very little and that that is, is about the Cheekes.

The fleshy membrane which in the rest of the body is almost wholy neruous, in the forehead is fleshy and musculous; so close ioyned to the skin that it can hardly be separa∣ted there-from. And it is red because of the muscles of the face which grow vnto it. Be∣twixt this fleshy membrane and the skin the veines before spoken of do runne, where also are many glandules dispersed, as vnder the rootes of the eares in which the disease is bred that we call Parotis, as also betwixt the lower Iaw & the inferior part of the Cheeks where those Tumors arise which we cal Scropuhlae or the Kings euill.

The proper containing parts are muscles, bones and gristles which make the frame of the face itselfe. The muscles are, of the forehead, of the eye-browes, of the eye-lids, of the nosthrils, sometimes also of the eares, of the lips, of the lower Iaw, and of the Cheekes. The bones are, the forehead-bone, the sixe bones of the eyes, three of the Nose, sixe of the mouth, that is to say, two of the vpper Iaw, and two of the nether Iaw, and as many of the Palate. The Gristles are, of the eares & the nose which are diuersly ioyned with the bones.

The parts contained in the face are the seates of the foure sences; whose organs either it containeth as it doth those which haue no place within the skull, or else it prepareth a way for them that lye hid within the Scull.

These Organes of the senses are the Eyes, the Eares, the Nose and the Mouth, where∣in are contained the Tongue and the Throttle which are the instruments of the taste & the voyce. And indeede because the Organs of the senses are placed in the face, it is truely called the Image of the minde, for as Laurentius faith truely, in the eye-browes dwels

pride, in the Cheekes shamefastnesse, in the Chinne maiesty, in the Forehead wisedome, finally, in the whole countenance beauty and honesty. But to speake more like a Physitian, in the Face doe appeare the manifest signes of life and death, and therefore Hippocrates in his Prognostiques commands the Physitian first of all to take viewe of the sickmans face, whither his countenance bee like that it was in his health, or whether it be much changed in colour, figure and magnitude.

But before we come to the particulat handling of the Organes of the Senses, it shall not be amisse to giue you in this place a light view of the Vessels of the Face and of the Mus∣cles which mooue the skin of the Head. The Vessels therefore which are deriued through the face are Veines and Arteries. The Veynes are called Iugulars, whereof one is internall, [Tab. 6. lib. 6. SS] of whose distribution we haue spoken in the eight chapter of the prece∣dent Booke. Another externall [Tab. 6. lib. 6. ^TT] which ariseth out of the vpper part of the Subclauian branch, and ascendeth on the sides of the neck vnder the chin yeelding surcles to all the outward parts of the Necke, the Head and the Face on his owne side. But for the most part vnder the roote of the eare, [Tab. 6. lib. 6. V] it is diuided into an vtter braunch [^y] and an inner. [^x] The inner branch reacheth vnto the muscles of the mouth, the chops, and the bone Hyois as before is saide. The vtter creeping along the skin and the Muscles and skin of the head, beeing vnder the eare supported with Glandules, is parted into two branches, whereof one bending vnto the foreside of the face [Tab. 6. lib. 6. Z] attaineth vn∣to the Nose and the Cheekes, and in the middle of the forehead is ioyned with a braunch of the other side, and maketh the fore-heade Veine which in some cases wee vse to open. [Tab. 6. lib. 6. a] The other braunch passeth by the side and sprinkleth his branches partlie

[illustration]

Table 6. sheweth the trunke and branches of the hol∣low veine as they are disseminated through all the three Regions of the body.

[illustration]

TABVLA VI. Lib. VI.

• Q. The double Scapularie, or the veynes of the shoulder-blade.
• RR. The Lower Chest-veine.
• SS. The internall Iugular Veine.
• TT. The externall Iugular Veynes.
• V. The externall Iugular Veine diui∣ded into two vnder the roote of the eare.
• X. The inner branch thereof.
• Y. The outer branch thereof.
• Z. A branch proceeding from the vt∣ter Veyne nexte aboue named, to the Face.
• a. The forehead Veine.
• ae. A branch creeping vppe the Tem∣ples.
• * A surcle reaching to the Nowle or backeside of the head.

[illustration]

Table 13. Fig. 1. sheweth the trunke of the great Artery, to∣gether with his branches as they are disseminated through the three bellies or Regions of the body.

[illustration]

The second Figure sheweth a portion of the Arterie as it is on the backside, from whence it sendeth branches to the distan∣ces betwixt the lower ribbes.

[illustration]

The third Figure sheweth a portion of the great artery; where it yssueth out of the heart it is here shewed open: & by that meanes we may better perceiue his Coates and Fibres.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XIII.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

II

III

• TT. The Artery called Humeraria.
• V V. the remainder of the Axillarie Arte∣ry reaching to the armes.
• X Y. the right and left Carotis or the slee∣py Arteries.
• e e. The coniunction of the Māmary with the Epigastricke Arteries.
• f f. The diuision of the sleepy Arteries at the chops.
• g. The externall branch.
• h. The internall branch which is deriued to the throttle, the chops and the tongue.
• i. This at the Basis of the Skull is distribu∣ted into two branches.
• l. the distribution of the branch g vnto the Cheeks and the Muscles of the face.
• m. The distribution of the braunch g vnder the roote of the eare.
• n. The same branch creeping vp the Tem∣ples.
• o And the backside of the eare.

vnto the Temples [Table 6. Lib. 6. a] partly vnto the occiput or Nowle of the head. Fur∣thermore the branches of this exterior veine both in the face and in the crowne of the head are diuersly mingled, from which certaine small threddy stringes are distributed into the seames of the Skull and the manifold perforations thereof. And so much for the veines of the face.

The arteries called Carotides or the sleepy arteries [Table 13. Lib. 6. ^XY] being on each side one, ascendeth vp on the sides of the necke, togither with the Iugular veines, directly vnto the head, and when they come vnto the chops or Fauces they are deuided [table 13. lib. 6. ^{f f}] into an exterior branch [^g] and an interior [^h].

Of the distribution of the interior we haue spoken in the eight Chapter of the former Booke. Now concerning the exterior. The exterior which is lesse then the interior and is seated without the Fauces reacheth his surcles vnto the cheeks [Table 13. Lib. 6. ^l] and the muscles of the face; afterward when it commeth to the roote of the eares [^m] it is parted in

twaine. One of them creepeth to the backside of the eare at [^o] from which two arteries do vnder the eare passe into the lower iaw, and according to the length thereof are dispersed vnto the rootes of all the lower teeth: but another part yssueth at the hole which is in the chinne, and so creepeth along the neather lip. The other artery of the by-partition at [^p] creepeth vp the temples and the forehead and is consumed in the muscles of the Fcae. And so much of the vessels.

The Skin of the head is in many men mouable, but of the forehead in all men; not one∣ly by the benefite of the fleshy membrane, which degenerateth into a musculous substance hauing right fibres, but also by the help of two muscles; assured so to be, both by the course of their fibres as also by their motions which appeare in these after the manner of other muscles and not like the motion of the fleshy membrane. These are scituated in the fore∣head [Table 6. figure 1. ^A] and doe arise aboue where the hayre determines; sometimes as high as the crowny seame neare the Temporall muscles; the right at the right and the left at the left Temple, (where the fleshy membrane cleaueth so close to the Perteranium or skul∣skinne and the Skull it selfe, that it is altogether immouable: So that the forehead and the Eye-browes are mooued when the membrane is at rest) and toward the common seame which distinguisheth the bones of the head from those of the vpper iaw are implanted with right fibres aboue the eyes and the nose into the skinne at the browes as at the parts which are to be moued.

I sayed these fibres were right and not oblique as some haue thought: and here Chy∣rurgions must obserue that in opening Apostemations in that place they make not their incitions ouerthwart as the wrinckles of the skinne doe goe, but according to the right fibres.

These two muscles are a little disioyned in the middest, and that is the reason why the top of the forehead is not moued. Vpon this coniunction some haue thought them to be but one muscle. Against whome wee shall further dispute in the proper place where wee create of these in our book of muscles. There are also other muscles which draw the skinne of the head backward, but those belong not to this place.

Now we proceed vnto the Organs of the Sences.

CHAP. II. Of the Eye and parts thereof.

WEe sayd before that the habitations or residences of foure of the Sences were contayned in the face.

The fift externall Sence, which is the Sence of Touching is dispersed through the whole body & hath no proper seat in the face, all the rest haue. For the head being the seat of the Animall faculties and the habitacle of the reasonable Soule; it was also necessary that the Sences, which as Hippocrates in his Booke de morbo sacro or of the Falling sicknesse, sayth, are the messengers and interpreters of the Soule, should also haue their residence in the head.

These outward Sences are fiue as there are fiue simple bodies, the Heauen and the foure Elements. VVherefore according to the Platonists, the Sight answereth in propor∣tion to the Element of Starres whose obiect is shining. The obiect of the Smel is fiery, and therefore it is sayd that fragrantia are flagrantia. The obiect of the Hearing is ayrie: the ob∣iect of the Taste is watery, and of the Touch earthy. But amongest these the Sight is the principall, which with hearing makes a mannes life much more happy, albeit without the Tast no man can be so well nourished. For those who either by Nature or by Accident are blinde do account themselues therein miserable; for as the Sunne (saith Galen in the tenth Chapter of his third Booke de vsu partium) in the great world, so is the Eye in the body of a creature; and therefore Hesichius calleth them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Solis portae, The dores of the Sun; and therefore we will first intreat of the Eyes, as also because amongest all the nerues the Opticke nerues haue the first place.

The Grecians call the Eye 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 quasi 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because it is the couch or bed out of which the Sight shineth. And therefore the Eyes are called by others 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because from them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 that is the light proceedeth. The Latins as Varro and Lactantius call them oculi, ab¦••culendo vel occultando from hiding, because they are couered and hidden within their Liddes.

These Eyes are the Organs of the faculty of Seeing, which we vse (sayth Galen in the fift Chapter of his 8. Book de vsu partium) as spies, not only to auoyd those things which wold

offend vs, and to leade vs vnto that which is profitable, which vse is common to vs with bruite beasts, but especially that by those things which are visible we may take considerati∣on of the omnipotency of the inuisible God. Hence it is that Plato said wel, that if we wan∣ted our Eyes wee should bee ignorant of that excellent order which Nature hath establi∣shed in the frame of the world and of our own bodies. Aristotle addeth that the Science or exquisite knowledge of all things is exceeding much furthered by the eyes. And therfore Galen calleth them diuine members: Seeing therefore their necessity is so great it is no wonder that God the Creator made them after so excellent a manner as it were a curious modell to manifest his Maiesty and wisedome.

They are scituated in the head as in the highest and best defensed place of the body, im∣mediately vnder the forehead as Scoutwatches: for as watchmen are placed in high stan∣dings and turrets that they may further of discerne whether any enemies be approching or lye in ambush, so the eyes are set aloft to foresee and giue warning of any danger that may be toward vs. Galen and Auicen haue conceiued that the head was especially made for the vse of the eyes, their reason is, because the optick nerues being very soft, could not safe∣ly be placed farre from them. They are seated in the forepart of the head, whereof Galen in the first chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium rendreth a reason, because saith hee the Instruments of this sense do require soft nerues which could not bee produced from the Cerebellum or After-braine as being much harder then the braine it selfe.

Moreouer being placed before, they are directly opposed to their obiects, and we moue forward, neyther can we discerne eyther on the side, or behind vs, vnlesse wee turne our heads about. They are seated within bony cauities which Pollux calleth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or Orbes, & that for security; haply also because the spirits might be lesse dissipated.

They are in number two, (as also are the other instruments of the senses) mooued together and at once with the same motion, that the sight might be more perfect; for if one of them had beene lifted vppe and the other depressed, then euery obiect howsoeuer would haue appeared double: for it was necessary that the axes or diameters that is, the imaginary lines of the pointed obiects should determine in one and the same place: and this ioynt action of the eyes is assisted by the coniūction of the motiue sinewes in their ori∣ginall as we haue already declared. Obserue further with Aristotle in the 17 Probleme of the 10 Section. That amongst all Creatures a mans eies stand neerest together for his proportion. Their figure in a man is round and sphericall [table 2, fig. 3, and 4] but in o∣ther creatures they are not perfectly round, but eyther oblique or depressed, [tab. 2••fig. 5.] and no maruell seeing the whole figure and fashion of a mans body differs so much from other creatures. But if you consider them together with their muscles which grow to their back-sides, then is their figure turbinated like a sugar-loafe. [tab. 1, fig. 4, and 9] The reason why they were made round, was partly that they might be more capatious because they were to containe many parts of great vse. Againe, that figure is the strongest and lesse subiect to offence by outward iniuries. Finally, their roundnes makes their motion more nimble, to which end also they are smooth & slippery that we might command our sight euery way at our pleasure and vpon the suddaine. Wherefore the Maisters of the Opticks say that because of the orbicular or round figure of the eye, the beames from which side soeuer they come are broken at the Perpendicular, that is to say, they arriue directly in the center of the eye. Their magnitude is proportionable to the magnitude of the body and their owne vse. And heere we are to consider two kindes of parts; the one of those which are disposed about the eyes for their defence: the other, whereof the eye is com∣pounded. For defence Nature hath compassed them with bones which frame their Orbe, and beside these they are walled, aboue with eye browes, before which lids and in eyther place fenced with hayres and the skin. For first of all the brim of the eye-lids stand as a wall of defence with their hayres shot out that no smal motes or other annoyances might fall into the eyes when they are open. Then the lids themselues, that closing together they might shut vp the eye if any greater body or more violent offence should be offered ther∣unto. Furthermore, to defend them from violence, aboue they are secured by the eye∣browes, below by the Cheekes, at the great angle with the Nose, at the lesser by the pro∣duction of the yoke bone, and so if any greater body do rush against the eye, it is receiued by one of these, the eye which is in the middest remaineth vnoffended The motion also of the skin as wel that of the forehead as also that of the cheeks is a great security vnto the eie, for the skin being contract the eye is as it were drawn inward, & the same again extēded o∣peneth thē wide. The orbe of the eye is round, [ta. 2, li. 7 fi. 6, at^Q ta. 12, fi. 8, betwixt^X and^•]

that therein the eye might be better rowled: long, because of the muscles whereby the eye is mooued, and compassed with a Periostium or thin membrane. It is formed of the bones of the head and of the vpper iaw. But Aquapendens addeth also the spongy bone which we call Ethmoides. The bones of the head which make the orbe of the Eye, are the foreheade bone and the wedge-bone, whence it is that in these dennes of the Eyes there be many su∣tures and holes to be found. The forehead bone whose outward seat or table is smooth, maketh the vpper Arch of this roofe: and where the tables are ioyned againe, there in the place of the Eye-browes it buncheth outward [Table 3. lib. 7. figure 8.^ARX] and so defendeth the Eye. The wedge-bone is in the backe part of the hollownesse or cauity of the orbe, where it is perforated with foure holes. [table 3. lib. 7. figure 8. neare^DG] The bones of the vpper iaw which help to make the orbe of the Eye are; the first which maketh his outward eminence below. [table 3. lib. 7. figure 8. Γ] The second and the third [table 3. lib. 7. figure 8. δθ] are in the inside, very thin bones, because the protuberation or swelling of the nose is also a defence in that place. The fourth bone of the vpper iaw lendeth a part to the fra∣ming of this orbe where the cheekes rise vp into a swelling prominence [table 3. lib. 7. fig. 8. neareⁱ.]

The sutures or seames in the bones of the iaw are three; one at each angle or corner, the third in the lower side of the orbe: the sutures of the spongie bone are two, both at the great angle. Finally, there are other sutures betwixt the wedge-bone and the forehead∣bone. And vpon these sutures are the Pericranium, the lower oblique muscle and the pully suspended.

The holes in the orbe are three and those very large; one in the hindmost part which is round, made for the transmission of the opticke nerue: the second is in the lower part of the cauity of the orbe, and is a long rift through which the nerue which mooueth the eye together with some veines and arteries are deriued vnto the Eyes and their muscles. The third is at the inward angle & perforated into the bones of the nose, through which holes sometimes a part of the teares do yssue.

In these orbs of the Eye doe arise on either side two sinus or circles, which Aristotle in his first Booke de Historia Animalium, calleth common parts of the vpper and neather Eye∣lid, because they are made of both the Liddes extended out in length. These circles the Grecians call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, from a Sence of Itching, because in them often∣times by reason of the teares or of some other humour we finde a notable itching.

The Latines call them anguli oculorum, we the corners of the Eyes, wherein the teares & whatsoeuer yssueth from the Eyes is gathered together. The outward angle or corner toward the Temples is called Canthus minor or externus. The other inward to the nose Canthus maior & internus. [Table 1. figure 1. and 6. ^e sheweth the greater corner and^d the lesse] Pollux calleth the greater angle 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the waterer, and Hesychius 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or the fountain, because from thence the teares doe yssue.

But these names I take to be fitter for the orbe it selfe then for the corner of the Eye, for in each angle in the very extremities or ends of the ridge of the eye-lid both aboue and below there are two holes [Table 1. fig. 4. 7. 8. ^mn] which in the lesser corner can hardly be perceiued when a man is aliue, but after death they are not at all conspicuous; but in the inward and greater angle these holes are larger and easie to be perceiued if we marke them well especially in women; whence haply it is that they haue teares at command. But in the eye of an Oxe euen after he is dead they may easily be demonstrated [tab. 1. fig. 4. ^mn fig. 7. and 8. they are only expressed in the greater corner atⁿ.]

These holes are called by Fallopius in his obseruations Puncta Lachrymalia, as also by Platerus, because thorough them the teares doe distill, especially by the greater, which Na∣ture vseth rather and oftner then the lesse, because the scite thereof is more declining. Al∣though there is a more open way for them through the nose, the bones of the vpper Iaw being notably perforated in the top of the nose, which holes haue certaine passages, which vnder the caruncle are vnited into a common bosome ending in the cauity of the nose, and this cauity is properly called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 that is, the fountaine.

But this Bone because it is of it selfe thinne and hollowed, beside by the passage or ca¦nale before spoken of is sometime exulcerated by the Acrimony either of other humours or of the teares; which sayeth the Philosopher in the 35. Probleme of the fift Section, are soft and like vnto sweate: and this kinde of Vlcer is called Fistula Lachrymalis, wherein if you presse the inner corner of the eie, you shal find a Sanious or mattery substance to issue.

This matter is also oftentimes thinner, of which Hippocrates speaketh in his Booke De Prisca Medicina where he saith, that oftentimes there is a Flux of humors euen to the eie whose acrimony exulcerateth the eye-lids, and the partes vnder them it gnaweth assun∣der, yea sometimes it eateth thorough the coate that compasseth the Aple of the eye. That therefore this exulceration might be preuented, Nature hath set at the inner angle a Caruncle or glandulous flesh which the Grecians call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, although Aegineta giueth it that name onely when it is growne aboue the due proportion. Galen in the eleuenth chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium, calleth it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Corpus Carneum, The Fleshy body. [Tab. 1. fig. 7. 8 ^r] This Caruncle was made to defend the bone from the sharpenesse of the humors. Moreouer, it serueth for a couering whereby the perforations which we saide before were made through the bone, are as it were stopped with a sponge, through which the excrements of the eye may soke into the nose, but cā∣not returne againe to offend the face, or to make vs alwaies weepe. Wherefore, those whom we call Oculists, that is, such as professe and intend the cure of the eies; must take heed that they do not vse such sharp Medicines as may coliquate or dissolue this Carun∣cle. For we haue often seen that Medicines applied to the eyes haue through these holes past into the nose, and so haue beene cast out either by emunction or by the mouth. But because we are come to make mention of the teares, it shall not be amisse a litle to stand vpon the nature and manner of the auoyding of them.

Plato, Aristotle, and Theophrastus do thinke the teares are a kinde of sweate, or at least much like thereto. Aquapendens his conceite how agreeable it is to reason let others iudge, sure it is very quaint and witty, his words are these. The Tears are an excrement of the third concoction in the eye, proceeding from the nourishment of the Glassye and Cristaline humors; which excrement is engendred of blood as of his proper matter, yet is that blood diuersly altred by the temper of the eye. For from these humors of the eies there is a double excrement separated; one thicke, another thin. The thicke excrement is that blacke slime which cleaueth to the Coats called Vuea and Choroides. Another thin which are the tears to which a whayie or serous humidity may be added. Thus far Aqua∣pendens.

But Bauhine is of opinion that these teares are the excrements of the Braine, whome happly it will be more safe to follow. Now whereas in euery concoction there is a dou∣ble excrement separated, one thin another thicke. In this concoction which is celebra∣ted in the Braine, the thicker excrement which is viscid and crasse Flegme is spit out of the mouth from the pallate or else descendeth by the nose. The thinner excrement is partly euaporated insensibly, partly it commeth away verie manifestly, and sometimes mixed also with a more crasse excrement: now it moysteneth the tongue & the mouth to make the speech freeer, and to helpe mastication or chawing of the meate. Some∣times it is transported to the whole face, but especially to the cheekes, to the temples and the eares; which may bee prooued by wounds inflicted vpon those places, which though they seeme to be healed, do yet notwithstanding for two or three moneths to∣gether euery day yeeld a great quantity of pure and waterish humour, issuing by the hole that is left in the woūd, which no art is able to consolidate or make vp, which obser∣uation we confesse we haue from that notable Anatomist & Chirurgion Aquapendens.

That moisture which is transmitted to the muskles is the matter of the teares, to wit, that whay which together with the blood is transported vnto the braine to bee 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. The vehicle of the nourishment, that by the helpe thereof the blood might bee able to passe through the smal vessels which are dispersed through the substance of the brain, which whay beeing not fit for nourishment, in the nourishing of the braine is percola∣ted through his thin substance, as the whay is separated from the milke. This moisture is gathered together in the bony orbe of the eye, which is indeede of so great capacity that the fourth part thereof is not filled by the muskles and nerues of the eye. It remai∣neth therefore after the manner of other excrements a conuenient time in that cauitie, and is sucked or drunk vp partly by the fat, partly by the Glandules which are of a rare and spongy substance. The reason why Nature detained these excrements in the orb of the eie was to moisten the Muscles, which because of their continuall motion were not onely in danger to be ouer-heated, but also to be exiccated and dried vppe; vnlesse they had beene moistened and refrigerated by this matter of the teares which swimmeth in a manner about the fat and Muscles of the eye. And this vse hath the moisture if it bee

[illustration]

Table 1. Fig. 1. Sheweth the whole eye, not at all dissected, his bones, together with the eye-lids and the hayres thereof.

[illustration]

Fig. 2. sheweth the eye-lid hauing the skin taken away.

[illustration]

Fig. 3, & 4. Exhibiteth the muscles of the eye-lids.

[illustration]

Fig. 5. Sheweth the eye-lids separated and inuerted.

[illustration]

Fig. 6, 7. Sheweth the figure of the whole eye with his muscles drawne out of the Scull and freed from the eye-lids.

[illustration]

Fig. 8. The foreside of the globe of the eye.

[illustration]

TABVLA. I.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

FIG. IV.

[illustration]

FIG. V.

[illustration]

FIG. VI.

[illustration]

FIG. VII

[illustration]

FIG. IIX.

• A 1, The forehead bone.
• B 2, The bone of the vpper Iaw.
• C 1, The yoke bone.
• D 1, The Nose.
• E 1, 3, the vpper eye-lid.
• F 1, 3, the lower eye-lid.
• a a 1, the Tarsus or little gristle wherein the haires grow.
• b b 1, the haires of the eye-lid.
• c 1, 6, the greater Canthus or corner of the eye.
• d 1, 6, the lesser Canthus or corner of the eye.
• e 1, 5, 6, 7, 8. the membrane called Adnats which in the 6, 7, and 8, fig. is intertexed or wouen with veines.
• f 7, 8, The Rainebow called Iris.
• g 1, 2, The hollownes of the vpper eye-lid and in the 7 and 8 the apple of the eye.
• h 1, 2, the vnder cauity in the lower eye-lid.
• m n 4. 7, 8, Two holes in the greater angle or corner of the eye.
• o 7. the opticke nerue.
• p q 7, the Pia meninx at p and the thicke at q which do inuest the optick nerue.
• r 7, 8, A Caruncle or little flesh in the inte∣rior corner.
• G, The Cartilages or gristles of the eie-lids called Tarsi.
• H H 2, The orbicular or round muscle of the eye-lid without the skin.
• I 2, the hornie coate containing the Raine∣bow and the apple of the eye.
• K 3, 4, the orbicular muscle of the eye-lid set alone, but in the 4. it is described cō∣passing the whole eye-lidde which Ve∣salius diuided into two.
• L 4, In this place Vesalius set the second.
• M 3, 4, the right muscle of the eye-lid set a∣lone
• N 5, The outward part of the eye-lid.
• O O O 5, the concauous and interior face of the eye-lid.
• P 6, the interior portion of the wedge∣bone where-through the opticke nerue doth passe. Q Q, 6, A part of the thicke membrane or Meninx. R 6, the concurse or meeting of the op∣ticke nerues. S 6, The mouing nerue of the eye. T 6, the sat betweene the muscles, V 6, 7, 8, A part of the coate called Adnata stretched vnder the eye-lids. X 6, Membranes going from the Scull-skin to the Tarsus or gristle of the eye-lids, Y 7, the muscles of the eye on the one side.

moderate, for if it be immoderate and detained in the eye, it hindereth the motion of the muscles: wherefore Nature being heerein very prouident and wise hath framed and pre∣pared two wayes for the expurgation thereof. One by the corners of the eyes, another by perforations into the bones of the Nose as we saide euen now. For if the teares should perpetually drop out at the eyes they would haue deformed the face, as wee perceiue by those who are troubled with the disease before named caled Fistula lachrymalis or the drop∣ping Fistule,

Nature therefore studdying to preserue the beauty and comelinesse of the face as al∣so the cleerenesse of the sight hath prouided meanes to moue them by expression or by di∣latation and attraction. By expression the teares are mooued eyther when we rub our eyes, or by the coldnesse of the ayre, or by the winde, or by some griefe of minde and weeping fit; at which times they drop out like plentifull sweate, or rather like a bubling streame through those holes which we saide before were formed in the terminations of the brims of the eye-lids: for at such times the muscles of the face and of the adiacent parts doe con∣tract

themselues sometimes with wayling and mourning sometimes without; sometimes the Respiration being cut off in the middest with a sobbing stay and the voyce broken a∣bout the top of the Larynx, yea sometimes quite intercepted: and thus is this matter of the teares moued by Expression.

By dilatation it is drawne out sometimes by heat, often by laughter, sometimes by the Sunne, for sayeth Hippocrates in his Booke de videndi acie, the Eye being not able to resist a bright obiect, calleth out the matter of the teares to succour it, which also in the conflict is heated. Anger also and a sharpe Ague doe by dilatation prouoke and cal out the matter of the teares.

And in such an Ague sayth Hippocrates in his first Book Epidemiωn, if other signes be not mortall, teares so appearing doe foreshew a Fluxe of bloud by the nose. That these are the very causes of the profusion of Teares, we may gather out of Aristotle in the 13. Pro∣bleme of the fift Section. Aquapendens is of opinion that Nature purgeth the teares by an expulsiue faculty giuen to the Eyes to auoyde offences; for sayeth he, by this meanes, not onely Nature is vnburdned but also the eyes are moystned and so defended from the con∣taction of cold and heate.

But not to contend about this matter, it may further be obiected that we oftentimes see at once so great a quantity of teares as cannot possibly be imagined could be contayned in the orbe of the eye.

I answere, that this serous humour followes by consequution, euen as phlegme doeth fall out of the braine. And thus much shall be sufficient to haue beene spoken of Teares and the manner of their euacution.

At either angle of the Eies, as also Galen hath obserued in the 11. Chapter of his tenth Booke de vsu partium, are placed certaine glandules or kernels, sometimes two sometimes more: that with their rare and laxe substance they might sucke vp that serous excrement of the braine, by which the outward superficies of the Eye is moystned, and which as wee sayed is the matter of the teares. And this moysture thus gathered in the glandules is at conuenient times euacuated by the corners of the Eye and by the terminations of the brimmes of the lids.

Fallopius in his obseruations sayth, that there is but one Glandule in each corner, which is found in the vpper part of the Eye neare the vtter angle, the inuention of which he also attributeth to himselfe. Moreouer these glandules do serue as soft pillowes that the Eye might not be offended in his motion at the hardnesse of the bone. And in men this is on this manner: But in bruite beastes it is otherwise; which it shall not be amisse to signifie in the fauour of young beginners and Practitioners in Anatomy, who doe often dissect the eyes of Oxen and Sheepe to make them more perfect when they doe come to the eyes of Men.

In an Oxe Eye therefore is found another glandule in the inner corner, callous and har∣der then that in a man, which should seeme to be there scituated because of the membrāe with which they wincke, which membrane is most like to that we call the Naile of the eye, very thinne and like the horny coate, or something of the Nature of a gristle. This Nayle or membrane of which Aristotle speaketh in the 12. Chapter of his second Booke de Histo∣ria Animalium, is moued with voluntary motion to the outward angle and couereth the eie euen when the lids are open. For about the roote of this callous glandule there cleaueth a strong membrane, whose vse haply is, that while the Skin is drawne to the opposite angle that glandulous body should be streatched or bent like the horne of a bow, and when the skinne is remitted, returne backe and draw it into his proper angle. And truely this mem∣brane is drawne to the opposite angle by a double cord, the one is aboue, the other below lurking vnder the coate of the eye which we call Adnata, and arising from a certaine muscle scituated in the vtter angle, which muscle Fallopius accounteth to bee a part of that muscle which draweth the whole eye outward. And thus much concerning the parts of the orbe of the Eye.

CHAP. III. Of the Eye-browes and Eye-lids.

THe Eye-browes with Aristotle in the ninth Chapter of his first Booke de Hi∣storia Animalium we referre vnto the Eyes. They are called in Latine Super∣cilia because they be super cilium, that is, aboue the haires of the Eye-lids. Hip∣pocrates in his Book de locis in homine, as also the rest of the Grecians after him call them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. They are, sayth Rufus, hayrie extremities of the forehead, or

haires that grow aboue the eies which are distinguished vnder the forehead on either side. These eie-browes are compounded of skinne, fleshy fibres produced from the muscles of the forehead, fat and haires. The skin is thick and hard, thick the better to defend the eyes, hard, that the haires might neither be too many, nor grow into too great a length, for euen as saith Galen in a marrish and weeping ground no grasse is brought forth neither yet in a squallid and hot soile, so when the skinne is either too dry or too moyste the haire cannot grow.

These haires are called by the Physitians as Pollux witnesseth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, & are bred with vs whē we first come into the world, as also are the haires of the eie-lids, whence it was that the E∣gyptian Priests who vsed to shaue all their haire did notwithstanding suffer these to grow. And although these haires are of an equall length, number and thicknes, yet are they not right but grow crooked and oblique, bowing after the roundnes of the eie, that they might the better auert and turne aside whatsoeuer shall fall toward it. If they had bin too short, too few, or too thinne, they would not so well haue defended the eies. Againe, if they had been too long or too bristly they would haue bin an impediment to the sight. In some men saith Aristotle when they grow old they encrease vnto such length that they stand in neede to be cut, the reason whereof he rendreth in the 15. Chapter of his 2. Booke de part. ani∣malium; because they are placed in the coniuncton of the bones which in old age are loo∣sed, and so a greater quantity of vapour yssueth from their disiunction. But howe the dis∣position of the minde may be obserued from these hayres according to Aristotle in the 9. Chapter of his first booke de Historia animalium, and how the antients (as Cicero reporteth in his oration for Roscius, and in the first booke of his Offices) placed a part of the Soule in the eie-browes Bauhine hath well declared in his booke de partibus externis, to whome we refer him that desireth further satisfaction.

The middle place betwixt the eye-browes which for the most part is without hayres is called by Ruffus and Pollux 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, in which place Straton the Philosopher as Plutarch re∣porteth placed the seat or principall residence of the Soule.

These Eye-browes although they be drawne vp by the muscles of the forehead; yet in some men (sayth Iulius Placentinus out of whome we haue taken their figure) there are two muscles sound in the occipitium or nowle of the head [Table 4. fig. 1. C the other in the se∣cond figure at^aa is retracted aboue the nose like the pannicle inuerted] which leading the skinne of the head backward doe also draw the eye-browes with it, as we shall shew in the fourth Table figu. 2. c, where also wee will exhibit the orbicular muscle which draweth the eye-browes downward.

Concerning the vse of the Eie-browes, the Philosopher in the 15. Chapter of his se∣cond Booke de partibus Animal. sayeth; that as well these as the haires of the eye-lids were created for defēce. The eie-browes are as a penthouse to cast of the humors that fall from aboue: yea saith Galen in the 14. chap. of his 11. booke de vsu part: they are like a wall of defence which receiueth the first brunt of the irruption of any thing that would offend the eies: which vse also Cicero maketh mention of in his 2. booke de Natura Deorum.

It was not sufficient that the eyes should be walled about with bones, and as it were in∣duded or shut vp in bony dens, and defended by the eye-browes from those things which should fall from the forehead, because their forepart was exposed vnto many dangers. For being by nature made soft and tender for the more facile and easie reception of the species or formes of things outwardly directed vnto them, they must needes by diuers wayes be in danger of offence. Wherefore Nature very prouidently hath fenced them with ligaments and lids, wherewith as with leafe-dores not only the eies themselues but their whole orbes are shut vp, and thence it is that those creatures the outward skin or coate of whose eyes is notably hard, as Galen well obserued in his booke de instrumento olfactus, haue no eye-lids at all, because their eies were not so subiect to danger.

These leafe-gates of the cies are called by the Grecians 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 quasi 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, The Coates of the Sight. Thence also they are not vnfitly called by a Poet 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, The leaues of the Eye. Cicero calleth them Palpebrae, either because in their sudden and frequent motions, they doe Palpitare that is tremble, or else because they are often subiect to a trembling weaknes, Pliny cals them Genae; Festus Cilia.

The eie-lids are two in each eie, for it is cut through the middest and diuided into an vpper & a lower, for in both the corners they are manifestly cōtinuated, the vpper [ta. 1 fi. 1. & 3. ^•]

in a man is much more moouable then the lower, which by some is thought to bee im∣moouable of it selfe and onely mooued by the motion of the cheeks as Archangelus con∣ceiueth. So Galen seemeth to say in the ninth chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium, but more plainely in the tenth Chapter and in his fourth Booke De Locis Affectis, vvith whom also Vesalius consenteth & Lawrentius yeeldeth a reason, for, saith he, what neede was there that the lower eye-lid should bee mooueable seeing by the motion of the vp∣per downward the eye is closed to his bottome, and by the motion thereof vpward the eie againe is sufficiently opened? But Platerus thinketh that the lower eye-lid is mooued something vpward when we shut our eyes. And with him Bauhine is of opinion that the lower lid is mooued by a Muscle, although his motion be farre more weak and lesse con∣spicuous then that of the vpper. For if both the eye-lids were made for the vse of the eies then was it necessarie that either the vpper should mooue downward, or the lower vp∣ward, or the one meete the other. Now wee finde by Dissection that in the lower lidde there is a semicircular Muscle as well as in the vpper, and in a creature aliue if we marke the eie well, we shall perceiue the lower lid to mooue though not so manifestlie as the vpper; but in Birds (as Aristotle obserued in the 13. chapter of his 2. booke De Partibus Animalium) the lower eie-lid is onely mooued.

Neither could so sodaine and quick motions come from the vpper lid alone, because the motion downward would haue needed a longer time then was fit for so quicke dis∣patch, and therefore they sooner meete if they ioyne to assist one another. But the vp∣per lid in a man and in those creatures in whome the lower is not so swiftly mooued is larger, because it was to bee let downe much further then the lower was to be raised vp. On the contrary in birds the lower lid is larger then the vpper.

The lower lid [Tab. 1. fig. 1, 3. ^F] is much lesse then the vpper, and if it had not beene so little falling vpon it selfe it would haue beene corrugated, wrinckled or relaxed and haue falne from the eye. And which is more, the eye would haue become bleared, wa∣terish and ill affected. Beside many things might haue gathered therein which woulde haue hardly bene gotten out. Wherefore it was much fitter that this lower lid should be but little and sit close to the eye, that so whatsoeuer getteth within it might bee better pressed out. We therefore resolue according to our sense, that both lids are moued, the vpper downward and the lower vpwarde that they might meete one with another. But because the lower is by much the lesse, therfore is his motion weaker and more obscure, as the motion of the vpper is more euident because it is the larger.

These eye-lids are compounded of skinne, the fleshie Membrane, a coat, Muscles, their brim, and the haire. Wherefore their substance is partly soft, partly harde. Soft as it is Membranous and Musculous, hard as it is gristly: for if (saith Galen in the sixte chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium) it had beene onelie fleshie and soft, because they are first exposed to danger, they would haue beene sooner offended then the hornie coate of the eie, yea they would easily haue falne, become rugous and would not so equallie haue beene stretched ouer all the parts of the eie.

On the contrary, if they had beene hard and bonie, they would not so easilye haue beene mooued, neither could the hornie Membrane or coate haue touched them with∣out danger of offence.

It was therefore fit that the eie-lid should bee made of such a substance as should both easilie bee mooued and yet not offend the eie by contaction.

The skinne of the eie-lid is the thinnest almost of the whole bodie altogether with∣out fat, least thereby their motion should be hindred. Their fleshie Membrane is so thinne that together with their Muscles it is scarse so thicke as the Membrane alone which is vnder the skinne in other parts, so that the orbicular Muscles seeme to bee no∣thing else then the fleshie Membrane distinguished with small Fleshie Fibres, as Galen saith of it in the ninth chapter of his tenth booke De vsu partium. And by reason of this tenuitie or thinnesse of the Membrane and skinne of the eie-lids. Aristotle saith, that their skinne is without Flesh, and therefore if it bee wounded will not ioyne together againe as it happeneth in the Prepuce or fore-skinne of the yard.

The inner Membrane [Table 1. figure 5. ^cc] which is produced from the Pericranium is exceeding thinne and light. Thinner and lighter then the Pericranium it selfe, pollished also that it should not hurt the sight of the eye which moueth immediatly against it. This mem∣brane

being produced into a length answerable to the length of the eye-liddes as also into their skin, doth make in the vpper & lower part a round angle, and becommeth duplicated or doubled, to which duplication is ānexed a certaine gristly substance harder then a mem∣brane, which they cal 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, we called it before the brim of the eie-lid, & this substance shut teth vp & comprehendeth the duplication before spoken off. The vpper part of this mem∣brane compasseth and as it were subdiuideth the inner superficies of both the lids. The o∣ther couereth the exterior roundnesse of the eye aboue the tendons of the muscles as farre∣as to the Iris, and produceth that coate of the eye which is called Adnata (for to it it is con∣tinued) [table 1. fig. 7. vv] which louingly ioyneth the lid vnto the eye.

Now the thinnesse and the lightnesse of the membranes was necessary to further the swiftnesse and suddennesse of the motion of the eye-liddes; for if they had beene heauy they could neither haue been moued suddenly nor often, which two things were very ne∣cessary: the frequency of the motion to meet with whatsoeuer might affect the eye, the ce∣lerity to take away all impediments of the sight. It is no wonder therefore if Nature made the body of the eye-lids very thin, smooth and soft, that so they might be more nimble and prompt to moue at our pleasure.

The motions of both the eye-lids are vpward and downward, there is also another moti∣on made by them both together which is circular, wherein both the eye-lids are gathered together. For it was necessary that the eyes should bee opened and shut, for if they had beene alwayes couered with the lid, they could neuer haue receiued the images of their ob∣iects, and if they had alwayes remayned open, neither had they been free from outward in∣iuries, and beside they would soone haue grown weake by reason of the perpetuall dissipa∣tion of their inward light; wherefore it was of necessity they should bee opened and shut. And therefore Aristotle in the 13. Chapter of his 2. Booke de partibus Animalium, writeth that this motion is by an instinct of Nature not after the guidance of our will, and that the Eyes by that instinct doe winke at any thing that falleth toward them; but this conceit Ga∣len reprehendeth in the ninth chapter of his tenth Booke de vsu partium, where hee sayeth, There are some Sophisters when they could not finde out either the muscles which moue the Eye-lids or the reason of their motion, they became so impudent as to deny that their motion depended vppon our will: but affirmed that it was Naturall like the motion of the arteries and of the heart, esteeming it better to teach a lye then to confesse their owne ig∣norance

But this motion although it be voluntary yet it is partly free partly constrayned: the free motion is for the couering and custody of the eyes, if haply any thing should bee trou∣blesome vnto them, as too strong a light, smoake, dust, a blow or whatsoeuer might happen vnto them from without. That motion we call Constrayned which is stirred vp by a cor∣poriall affection or serueth thereunto, and this motion is exceeding suddain and swift, and therefore for the most part we do not marke it; whence it was that Aristotle rather thought it Naturall then voluntary; for example; when wee haue long time held our eyes open al∣though there be nothing to offend them, yet we are constrained to close them vp or at lest to wincke, and that oftner and more suddainly in winter then in Summer, when the winde blowes then when the ayre is quiet. It may bee because the eye is not able to endure the touch of the externall ayre, because of the tendons of his muscles, which are of exquisite Sense and exposed almost naked to the aire, hauing nothing vpon them but the thin mem∣brane called adnata; beside it hath beene often obserued that the Chrystaline humour it selfe hath bin condensed or thickned with cold to the great detriment of the sight. Wher∣fore that the eye might not be hindered at all from seeing, nor from preseruation of it selfe when neede doth require: the eye-lids were necessarily made with a sudden and swift mo∣tion to shut them and open them againe.

Now these motions are performed by two muscles commonly called the muscles of the Eie-lids: but Archangelus calleth them musculi ocularii. Neither do others agree in the number of these muscles, for Galen and the ancients as also Vesalius and Siluius doe make two, diuiding the orbicular muscle of which wee shall speake anon into two, whereof one, say they, lifteth the eie-lid vp the other depresseth it or moueth it downward. But the truth is, there is onely one muscle which shutteth the vpper lid according to Columbus, Fallopius and Archangelus. Platerus, Bauhine and Aquapenaens affirme that that muscle contracteth both the lids. Laurentius indeede maketh this muscle double, and yet hee saith that both of them shutte the vpper lid. Hence it followeth that Galen, Vesalius and Siluius were igno∣rant

of the muscle that openeth the eye, which Fallopius, Platerus, Bauhine, Laurentius & Aquapendens will haue to be but one, but Columbus and Archangelus say there are two, the one of them we acknowledge, but that which they call the second wee say mooueth the eye round.

The motions therefore of the eye-lids are performed by two muscles, the one right [tab. 1, ^M tab. 2, ^β] of which Galen, Vesalius and Siluius were ignorant; and Fallopius as∣cribeth the inuention thereof to himselfe. This right muscle which lifteth vp the vpper lid is scituated within the cauity of the bones; in the vpper part of the Orbe, aboue but neare the muscle that lifteth vp the eye it selfe, to which also it is in figure very like and fleshy, but lesse and hath his originall from the same beginning with the other muscles that moue the eye: to witt backward at the hole of the opticke nerue. This muscle is ex∣tended directly to the vpper eye-lid, and is inserted with a broad tendon to the extremity of the lid, which we said was gristly and called Tarsus, and contracting his fibres inward draweth the lid vpward; the lower lid of his owne accord falleth downward into his owne place, and so the eye is opened.

The second muscle which is semicircular [tab. 6, fig. 1, ^{C •} tab. 1, ^H] or orbicular is called by Columbus, Falopius, Platerus and Archangelus the first muscle of the eye lid, but Vesalius and Siluius following Galen haue diuided it into an vpper and a lower part. The vpper part, say they, li••teth the lid vpward, the lower mooueth it downeward. Fallopius in his obseruations confesseth that he was a long time of the same opinion with Galen and Vesa∣lius; but in the yeare 1553, took knowledge of his own error being admonished partly by Oribasius in his booke de dissectione musculorum in what place he epitomiseth the 29 chap. of Galens booke; partly by dissecting the eye of a fish, called Pheca, which we call a Seale, which fish moueth both his eye-lids. Laurentius diuideth it into two, and calleth them the two muscles which shut the lids, whereof one, saith he, ariseth from the inward angle and compasseth the whole course of the hayres. The other ariseth from the same angle and the roote of the Nose, and is inserted into the Tarsus or brimme of the lid. But in the description hereof we will rather follow Bauhine who saith, That this orbicular muscle is seated betwixt the fleshye membrane and that which is produced from the Pericranium or Scull-skin. It is membranous and very thin or slender, yet a little increased by certaine circular and fleshy fibres which it borroweth from the fleshy membrane, and so standeth halfe round in eyther lid. It ariseth with a sharpe beginning at the roote of the Nose in the great and inward angle of the lower lid, where the common suture is betwixt the head & the vpper law, from thence it proceedeth all along the latitude or bredth of the lower lid and is instantly inlarged and returned to the outward angle toward the vpper part of the Orbe, and passing on by the vpper lid is inserted with a sharpe determination into the vp∣per side of the inner angle, and so maketh an exact circle compassing the outward circum∣ference of both the lids; yet Falopius in his institutions excepteth the inner part at the great angle, from which it is prohibited that it might not be altogether circular.

The vse of this orbicular muscle is that being drawne toward his originall, it might at one and the same time mooue the vpper eye-lid downeward, and the lower vpward, & so ioyne them and binde them both together. And that this is so it appeareth as well by the continuity of the fibres in the circumference and in the angle, as also by the motion of the same angle especially if it bee a little more constrayned, so as wee must needes winke some thing withall, for then it is perceiued manifestly both by the sight and by the touch. For nothing can be strictly drawne together and made to touch one another vnlesse some parts be drawne vpward and some downeward.

This muscle in respect of his fibres which are continuall, is most truely saide to bee one, but in respect of the two lids may be called two semicircular muscles, for being sepa∣rated they make each of them a halfe circle, but being ioyned they make the circle per∣fect.

This muscle Galen knew, and in the 9 chapter of his 10 booke de vsu partium wri∣teth that all the motions of the eye-lids are accomplished thereby. Hee diuideth it also into two, whereof one seated at the great angle draweth toward the nose, the other (saith he) is seated at the lesse angle and draweth toward the temples.

Moreouer in the traction of the first the lid is depressed; in the traction of the latter it is lifted vp, but because the fibres of this muscle are continuall through the whole lid it can∣not be diuided.

Now in the lower lid although it also be moued vpward and downeward, yet is there no Muscle which hath right motion, but onely this forenamed orbicular muscle which draweth it indeed vpward, but rather toward the inner angle or corner, as it wer to his be∣ginning; as any man may perceiue by touching that part in himselfe, and yet I know that some thinke this motion proceedeth from the motion of the cheekes.

We determine therefore and conclude, that the motion of the eye-lids is accomplish∣ed by two muscles, one right, which being in the vpper lid eleuateth it, the other orbicular or round and is in both lids, which when it is stretched doth at the same time draw the lower lid vpwards and the vpper lid downward, and when there is need of a stronger con∣traction or closer shutting together, then also the orbicular muscle of the eye-browes (of which we made mention before) is drawne in to be assistant, like as when we would open the eye more staringly the muscles of the forehead doe much helpe vs.

He that would demonstrate these nice and curious Muscles must haue a very keene and small knife, wherewith he must separate the skin, in the meane time taking care that he doe not cut the Fibres of the Muscle, especially in the angles; then shall he separate the Muscle below at the Tarsus or brimme of the lidde, and aboue in the bottome of the eye-brow.

Columbus & Archangelus add a third Muscle which proceedeth say they out of the same place with the muscle lifting vp the eyelid, which third muscle is assistant vnto the former, because there is required more helpe to lift a heauie thing vpward then to draw it downe∣ward. But we say that this third muscle of Columbus & Archangelus is indeed the sixt mus∣cle of the eye.

We saide moreouer, that the substance of the eye-lids was cartilaginious or Gristlye, hauing respect vnto their extremities or brimmes into which certaine semi-circular car∣tilages [Tab. 1. αα] like the hornes of a halfe-moone, round, small and softe are inserted betwixt the skinne and the small Membrane which compassed the lid. These the Greci∣ans call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, but Plinie and the interpreter of Galen cal them Cilia. Hippocrates in his book DeVidendicaie calleth this Cartilage 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

Their Vse beside that which wee haue remembred before, is to helpe the motion of the eye-lids; for because they strengthen and firme the thin. Membranes and holde them di∣stended that they are not corrugated or wrinkled in their motion, it becommeth that the shutting and opening of the eye is equall.

Galen in the ninth chapter of his tenth Booke De vsu partium remembreth another vse of them which is also approoued by Vesalius and Falopius, to wit, that the muscle which is in the vpper lid might haue a more firme and strong insertion. The same vse also it hath in respect of the haires of the eye-lids, which being established in so firme a substance doe remaine right and immooueable which otherwise would haue falne vpon the eyes. And therefore Galen in the seauenth chapter of his tenth booke De vsu partium maketh this the second vse of the Tarsus, wher he also affirmeth that it is perforated with many smal holes which notwithstanding Platerus denieth.

The haires of the eye-lids [Table. 1. fig. 1 ^bb] are called by Hippocrates in Coacis 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as also by Aristotle. Pliny calleth them Palpebrae a frequenti palpitatione, because they are often rubbed. The later Anatomists call them Cilia quod oculos celent, beecause they hide the eyes. They are borne with vs into the world, as are also the haires of the eye-browes and disposed in an elegant order, keeping an equall magnitude and number, I say an equal magnitude: for sayeth Galen in the 14. chapter of his eleauenth Booke de vsu partium, if you add any thing to them, or take any thing from them you corrupt or vitiate their Vse, for if they bee fewer or slenderer there may some-thing fall thorough them to offend the Eye.

Againe, if they bee thicker or grosser, they are no more a wall or defence to the eye, but a prison wherein the apple of the eye is hid and obscured, which of all the Instruments of our senses ha leastth neede of such an obstacle, and therefore saith Galen in the place be∣fore quoted, our wise Creator hath laide vpon them a lawe of necessity to keepe conti∣nually an equall magnitude, because hee sawe it was most fit so to bee for the vse of that member for which they were ordained.

But wheras (and this is Galens obseruation in the 7. chapter of his 10. book de vsu partium) it was most conuenient that the haires of the eye-browes should couch or fal one vppon another, because they were made to receyue that which fell from the Head before it could

come vnto the eye: these haires of the eye-liddes hauing another vse were made to stand straight, because they should better hinder dust, flies, or any such like things from falling in to the eyes.

Againe, they stand not streight vpward to the browes nor directly downward to the cheekes, neyther do they bend inward to the eye; for if they had stoode streight vpwarde their vse had beene forfeyted for which they were created, and if they had stoode directly downward or beene bent inwarde they would haue beene a great hinderance to the sight by breaking the continuity of the visible obiects. Notwithstanding as the haires of the vp∣per lid are bent a little vpward, so are those of the neather lid curued downward, for if they had stood straight out they would haue cast a shaddow vpon the eyes and hindered out looking vpward.

In like manner there is a conuenient and as it were measured distance betwixt haire and haire: for if they had bin set one far from another many things might haue falne betweene them which now are intercepted, and if they had touched one another they would haue cast too dull a shadow before the sight. All which the wisedome and prouidence of our great Creator hath by this excellent order and position auoyded. These haires doe neuer grow too long, neither do they euer fall, vnlesse it be in extreame diseases of that part, al∣though Aristotle in the 11. chapter of his thirde Booke De Historia Animal. hath a con∣ceite that the vse of Venus, especiallie if it bee to frequent will make them fall.

Neither do these haires serue onely for ornament as some haue conceyued, but also to direct the visible spirites and the beames which shoote foorth from the inner parts of the eye, for if they be falne away or retorted, a man can neyther see so directly forward, nor so farre off.

Againe, their often twinckling recreates the sight, and breaketh also somewhat the brightnesse of the obiect, as wel as they intercept those things which otherwise would fal into the eye, being placed as a Net to catch any thing that would rush into them.

These eye-lids also haue veines from the Iugular veines; and Arteries from the sopo∣rary or sleepy Arteies, Nerues also from the second coniugation, all which vessels do lead vnto them nourishment, heate and motion.

That which hangeth ouer the vpper eye-lid [Tab. 1. Fig. 1. 2. ^g.] Ruffus the Ephe∣sian calleth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, the hollow: and that which answereth thereto vnder the lower lid is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or vnder the hollow. Tab. 1. fig. 1, 2. ^h.] And this vseth to swell in the Dropsie, the greene sickenesse, a long fluxe of the Haemorrhodes and of the courses, som∣time also when the eyes begin to be bleared.

It remaineth now that we add a word or two concerning the vse of the eye-lids Although Aristole in the thirteenth Chapter of his second Booke de partibus Animalium acknowledgeth no other vse of these eye-lids, but onely to couer the eyes, and intercept those things which would fall into them: and therefore saith that fishes haue no eye lids, because they are alwayes in the water: nor shelly creatures because the Mēbrane of their eye is very hard, and beside they stand deepe in their sockets, yet we haue learned many other vses of them which we will acquaint you with.

The first and chiefe vse of the eye-lids therefore is, as Varolius well obserueth, to clenfe the hornie Mēbrane from drosse, for the sight requireth an exact puritie in medio diaph•••• that is in his tralucent meane, otherwise we cannot see, especially so distinctly, as appeareth in troubled water and smokie aire: wherefore because the hornie coate by reason of the moisture which sweateth out of the glandule, as also by reason of the contaction of the outward aire is easily obtenebrated or darkned: the eye-lid was made compassed, that at once it might touch the whole eye, and therefore in opening the eye when the lid is lift vp, it sweepeth and as it were polisheth the whole horny coate or Membrane; and this is the reason why when we desire to view a thing curiously we often winke with our eye-lids.

The second vse of the lids is, that the visible vertue might sometimes be turned from the light, especially in sleepe that a man might take the better rest; and hence it is that in those creatures which want eye-lids, as Locusts, Lobsters, Crabs, & such like insectiles na∣ture hath prouided certaine cauities, whereinto in the time of their repose as into certaine chambers they receiue their whole eies and shoote them out againe when they looke a∣broade, for shoe hath an especiall care of this, that euery sense should be kept fit to per∣forme his owne action.

And hence we may imagine the vnnaturall and cruell punishment which the Carthage∣nians inflicted vpon M. Atikus kegulus, whom in the first Punicke warre they had at vn∣awares surprized, who being by them sent to Rome (after he had before taken his Oath to returne) did in the Senate-house disswade them from making exchange of captiues, wherefore when he returned they cut off his eye-lids and set him in the sunne vntill the brightnesse of the obiect ouer-came not onely the spirites of his Eyes, but also of his life.

A third vse of the eye-lids is to recreate the sight, least at one time too great a number of spirits should be exhausted; for if the eyes should be so long open as wee are awake, they would be wearied, and many things falling vpon their coates would offend them. Againe, if they be not quite shut vp they direct our sight, if we desire to take a true ayme at any thing which is somewhat farre off.

Finally, they serue to defend the soft eyes from the incursion of outward iniuries, because it is much better sometimes not to see at all, then by offering to see, suffer our eies to be offended. And thus much concerning the circumstances of the Eies. Now we proceede vnto the Eye it selfe.

CHAP. IIII. Of the Fat & Muscles of the Eyes.

THE parts wherof the Eye consisteth, are fiue Fat, Muscles, Vessels, Coats and Humors. The Fat which Anatomists do some of them call Adeps, som of them Pinguedo, is verie plentifull about the eyes [Tab. 1. Fig. 6. T] espe∣cially it is found in those spaces which are betwixt the Muscles and the Nerues. It is also more plentifull at the vpper Muscle, because that is greater and ordained for more frequent & strong motions. In like manner toward the lower side of the Orbe there is plentie of fat, which like a pillowe is laide vnder the Eyes, that with their weight they should not presse themselues vpon the bones. Againe, be∣twixt the Muscles and the globe of the eie there is aboūdant fat, that when the Muscles worke the eie should not suffer compression. Finally, there is also fat found neere the Veines and Arteries, whereby the vessels are smeared ouer and their distention preuen∣ted in the motion of the eies.

The vse of the fat, in as much as it is warme, is to heate the eye which by nature is wa∣terish and cold, and beside to defend it from the coldnesse of the outward aire. And that is the reason why we neuer feele any manifest coldnesse or stiffenesse in our eyes. Againe, the humidity of the sat doth moysten the Muscles, that they becōe not exiccated or dried vp in their often motions. The softnesse of the fat keepeth the eyes from being offended by the bones about them. The vnctuosity or oyly fatnesse maketh their motion swift and facile, and beside, when the Muscles are somewhat dried, because of their motion and as it were consumed, it affoordoth Aliment vnto them.

The Muscles of the Eyes, although they belong to another place, namely to the Booke of the Muscles, yet because wee are desirous to absolue the History of the Senses in this present Booke wee will take liberty to varry something from our scope and set downe as perfect a description of them heere as we can. And that was the reason why before we were so large in describing the Muscles of the eye browes and eye-liddes, concerning all which we will spare our labour and yours when wee come to the History of the Muscles. Because therefore our eyes were giuen vs as spies and scout-watches that wee might pur∣sue things profitable and eschew that that is hurtfull, Nature made not the eyes immoua∣ble, for then they shoulde haue discerned onely that which is opposite vnto them, for so saith Aristotle in his second booke Departibus Animalium and the tenth chapter Gerimnus per directum, that is, we see by a straight line; not in euery position saith Galen in the eight Chapter of his tenth booke de vsupartium, because oblique, side, backward, higher and lower Obiects do not fall in with the ball of the Eye. Nature therefore hath so disposed the Eyes that they may moue & turn themselues on euery side at their pleasure. But Galen addoth in the place before quoted, that not only the eyes are moued but also the neck and the head are made mooueable for the behoof of the eyes, because there are six positions of place vnto all which the eye ought to mooue; that is to say, vpward downeward, for∣ward backward, on the right hand and on the left.

It was therfore of necessity that the eyes shuld haue other helps beside their own motion, for the eyes are not mooued forward and backward, partly because there was no absolute

necessity, and partly because it was impossible; it was not necessary they should moue for∣ward sayth Aquapendens, because the eye doth not attaine vnto the light but the light vnto the eie, which in a moment enlightneth an infinite space euen vnto the eie, yea insinuateth it selfe thereinto.

But the wise Creator hath made amends for the defect of this motion of the eyes by the help of the motion of the head, which out of hād conuerteth it selfe to see those things which the eie could not by his proper motions perceiue. Moreouer, that wee might see whatsoeuer is behind our backe (which could not be done onely by the circumuolutions of the head) Nature hath so prouided that the thighes can carry the body round. In like man∣ner the motion of the eye vpward is assisted by the backeward motion of the head and of the whols spine, which they haue experience of that striue to take view of the pinnacle of a high Steeple: so also the motion of the eye downeward is furthered by that motion of the head and of the necke which is forward.

Seeing therefore it was necessary that the eyes should bee moued with voluntary mo∣tion; and all voluntary motion is made by muscles, therefore our wise Creator hath giuen vnto them diuers muscles whereby their motions are very sudden and expedite. Hence it is that Aristotle in the 8. Probleme of the 7. Section calleth the Eye The most noble part of the body: yet sayth he, the left eie is more nimble then the right. Now whereas the moti∣ons of a mans eye are sixe according to Galen in the third Chapter of his first Booke de mo∣tu musculorum, it followeth necessarily that the eie must haue sixe muscles; but Galen, Ve∣salius and the rest of the Anatomists as Columbus sayth being accustomed only to describe the eies of beastes haue added a seauenth muscle, and those sixe also which they haue de∣scribed they haue misplaced. But we are to describe the muscles of the eye of a man, that seauenth which belongeth to beastes is deuided into two, into three, and sometimes into foure.

In men therefore as we haue said there are sixe muscles according vnto the sixe moti∣ons of a mans eie; foure of which motions are Right, that is to say vpward, downeward, to the right hand and to the left; the two motions remayning are oblique, to which belong two oblique muscles whose vse is to rowle the eie about. Notwithstanding one of these is exactly oblique, the other partly right partly oblique. All these muscles are seated on the backeside of the Eye within the cauity of the Scull, whether they accompany the opticke nerue and so remayning in their position, the eie and they together doe make a Pyramidal or turbinated figure. [Table 1. figu. 6. 7.] Among these muscles the thicker and more cor∣polent are the Right which haue all the same structure, originall and insertion, and do passe straight al along the length of the eie; the oblique muscles are lesse fleshy yet very like one another.

All these muscles of the eie are small that they might be sooner mooued; but that which helpeth most the volubility of their motion is the round figure, which is the nimblest of all others, as we may perceiue by the roundnes of the heauens.

The eie therefore being round as are also the muscles thereof, is euen in a moment con∣ueyed ouer the whole heauen, and the head itselfe is therefore mooued very suddanly and swiftly, because it toucheth vpon the bone whereon it resteth with a narrow point.

The foure Right muscles meeting and touching one another toward the roote of the nerue optick, doe arise with a sharp beginning frō the lower part of the bony orbe which is made by the wedge bone, hard by the passage through which the nerue of sight or the op∣ticke nerue doth yssue. I know well that Vesalius is of opinion that they arise out of diuers parts and into diuers parts are inserted. Againe for their matter, he conceiueth they arise from a commixture of the Dura mater which compasseth the opticke nerue and a nerue of the second coniugation. Platerus thinkes that they arise from the membrane which com∣passeth the orbe of the eye, and that membrane which inuesteth the opticke nerue. Aqua∣pendens imagineth they proceed from the Pericranium or Scull-skinne. Laurentius dispu∣teth about their originall on this manner; They erre, saith he, which thinke the muscles of the eie doe arise from the inner thicke membrane which compasseth the opticke nerue, for this is altogether against sence; they could not sayth hee arise from a membrane nor they ought not. They ought not, because a membrane of an exquisite sence compasseth the nerue, which nerue the muscles in their motions would compresse, and so the sight would be offended. They could not because they are not established vppon a firme foundation. It remayneth therefore, saith Laurentius, that they must arise from the inmost depth of the

[illustration]

Table 2. Figure 1. sheweth many muscles of the Eye in their owne seate.

[illustration]

Figure 2. sheweth the Eye rowled vpward whereby their mus∣cles may be perceiued.

[illustration]

Figure 3. and 4. sheweth the muscles of the Eye, separated be∣fore and behind with their nerues.

[illustration]

Figure 5. Is the Eye of an Oxe, with his muscles seuered as Ve∣salius doth shew it.

[illustration]

TABVLA. II.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

FIG. IV.

[illustration]

FIG. V.

• A, The eie lid. B, The Tarsus or gristle where the haires grow.
• C, the muscle lifting vp the eye lid.
• D, 1, 3, 4, the right vpper muscle of the eie in 3, and 4, with the nerue.
• E, 2, 3, 4, the right lower muscle of the eye, in 3 and 4 with the nerue,
• F, 1, 2, 3, 4, the right externall muscle of the eye.
• G 1, 2, 3, 4, the right internall muscle of the eye.
• H, 1, 2, 3, 4, the oblique superior muscle or the pulley, whose tendon is marked with a and the pulley with b.
• I 2, 3, 4, The oblique inferior muscle of the eye.
• K 1, 3, the opticke nerue.
• a 1, 2, The tendon of the oblique superior muscle.
• b 1, 2, the sayd pulley, a small gristle where through the tendon doth passe, & in the 3 and 4 pulled from the bone.
• cccccc 3, 4, the mouing nerues of the eies.
• αβ, 5, the second muscle of the eye-lid lying in the cauity of the eye, whose broad ten¦don β is inserted into the eie-lid.
• γ 5, the haires of the eie-browes.
• ♌ •• 5, two right muscle leading the eie vp∣ward and downward.
• ζ n 5, Two right muscles moouing vnto the right and left side.
• B 1, 5, two oblique muscles lightly turning the eye.
• •• 5, the seauenth muscle which may bee de∣uided into more.
• Λ 5, The Opticke nerue.

orbe or cauity. But we rest vpon Bauhines opinion for their originall.

Their whole bodies throughout their whole course are fleshy, and their bellies beare out round as they come forward. But they determine a little aboue the middle of the eye into a broad thinne and membranous tendon wherewith they compasse the whole eye be∣fore, and grow very strongly to the horny Tunicle neare vnto the Iris or Raine-bow in the greater circle: and these tendons ioyned together doe make that nameles coate of Colum∣bus and the white of the eie.

For we conceiue that this whitenesse is caused rather by the tendons of these muscles then that it properly belongeth to the coate which we call Adnata. And so much shal be sufficient to haue spoken in generall of the muscles of the Eie. Now we come to a more particular discription of them one by one.

The first [Table 2. figure 1, 3, 4. ^D fig. 5. ♌] which is the third according to Vessalius, and Galen also in the 8. Chapter of his 10. Booke de vsu partium, is seated aboue; fleshy it is & round, thicker also then the rest, greater and stronger then the second, because it lifteth the eie vpward toward the brow. For there is greater strength required to lift a thing vp, then to pull it downe. The names of this muscle commonly giuen by Authours are, Attollens and Superbus, the Lifter and the Proud muscle.

The second which according to Galen and Vesalius is the fourth [Table 2. figure 2, 3, 4. E. figure 5. ••] is opposite vnto the former and placed in the Lower part; it draweth the eye downeward to the Cheeks, and therfore needed not be so great as the former, be∣cause the eye declineth easily with his owne waight. It is called Deprimens and Humilis; the Depressor and Humble Muscle.

The third [Ta. 2. fig. 1, 2, 3, 4^G. fig. 5, ζ] according to Galen and Vesalius the first, is sea∣ted in the great angle and leadeth the eye inward toward the nose, and is called Addu∣cens and Bibitorius we may call it the Gleeing Muscle.

The fourth [Tab. 2. fig. 1, 2, 3, 4^F. fig. 5, n] which according to Galen and Vesalius is the second, is opposite to the third, seated on the outside of the eye which it draweth to the lesser angle or to the temples, and is called Abducens and Indignatorius, we may cal it the Scu-muscle or the Muscle of Disdaine.

If all these foure worke together the eye is drawne inwarde, fixed, established and conteined, which kind of motion Physitians call Motus Tonicus, wee in our Language cal it a Set or wist-looke. Archangelus is more distinct in the assignation of the motions of these Muscles, for (saith he) whē as at diuers times they are moued with any pause be∣twixt their motion, then the eye is mooued toward the originall of that Muscle which worketh. But when they are mooued at diuers times without any pause, that is, with im∣mediate successiue motions, then they mooue the eye round: but when they all mooue in the same moment then do they set fixe and establish the Eye immooueable, wherein they are holpen by the fift Muscle, whether all foure doe mooue a part or do worke to∣gether.

The fifth [tab. 2. fig. 2, 3. 4. ^I fig. 5. ^•] which is also according to Galen and Vessalius the fifth, but the sixth according to Fallopius, Platerus, and Laurentius; is seated in the out∣side at the depth of the cauity and ariseth betweene the eye and the Tendons of the se∣cond and fourth Muscles; which is the reason why some haue thought that it taketh his originall from the Eie and is againe inserted into the same. But the very place of his originall is at that cleft which appeareth like a suture or seame of that bone of the lower part of the Orbe which ioyneth the first bone of the iaw with the fourth. Sometimes it ariseth with a fleshy beginning from a bony scarfe. It is slender, round, short and exact∣ly oblique, and passeth obliquely toward the outwarde angle as it were to embrace the eie, and is implanted with a short and round Tendon, degenerating into a thinne and Neruous termination neere vnto the Iris or Rain-bow but obliquely, hard by the inserti∣on of the sixt Muscle, so that sometimes the Tendons of them both, serue one and the same.

To recite heere the contentions and challenges of Anatomistes about this Muscle would rather entangle our Readers minde then giue him any great satisfaction, especi∣ally seeing those learned men to whom so nice disquisitions will not seem tedious, may repaire to those fountaines from whence we haue drawne our by-streame, and therefore we passe on to the vse which is by the contraction of his Fibres to rowle the eie oblique ly downward to the outward angle.

The sixt [Tab. 2. fig. 1, 2, 3, 4. ^H fig. 5 ••] which is the sixt also according to Galen & Ve∣salius, but the fift according to Falopius, Platerus and Laurentius, is seated on the inside and the vpper part, yet vnder the right Muscles, and is partly right and partly oblique. It ariseth from the same place with that Muscle which draweth the eye directly vnto the inner angle at the side of the Opticke Nerues passage, which is in the verie depth of the Orbe.

It endeth as well in man as in bruite beastes into a round, small and long Tendone, [Tab. 2. fig. 1, 2. ^•] almost at the vtmost brimme or edge of the inward angle. This Ten∣don is reflected through a small gristle hollowed like a Caue and scituated in the grea∣ter angle, which Fallopius first of all men called Trochlea or the Pully, & thence procee∣ding obliquely to the right angle [Ta. 2, fig. 2, ^b but in the thirde and fourth figure it is sliuen from the bone] toward the vpper part of the eye, it is inserted betweene the first and the fifth Muscles with an oblique line, all which time the foresaid Tendon is com∣passed about with a certaine Ligament as it were with a sheath.

This Muscle being drawne inward toward his originall with his Tendon he turneth the eye in a circular motion to the inward Angle. These two turning Muscles the one vpwarde the other lower are called Circulares & Amatorij, the rowling or glauncing

Muscles, some also call the sixt Musculum Trochleae, or the Muscle of the pully.

The seauenth Muscle which is for the most part found in brute beastes, excepting the Ape and Fishes, is placed [Tab. 2. fig. 5. x] vnder the former sixe, and hath of it selfe that figure which the former sixe do together make. It is short and compasseth round about the Opticke nerue, [Tab. 2. fig. 5. ^Λ] yet is their some fat betweene them. Proceeding forward it is dilated and embraceth the whole globe of the eye euen to the roote. It ma∣keth also a circle like as the foure first did at the Rainbow make a circle with their chords or Tendons: at his insertion, which is into the hard tunickle of the eye, it becometh fleshy and may be diuided into three or foure; so as Galen in the fourth chapter of his fift booke de dissectione Musculorum maketh a doubt whether it be one Muscle, or double or treble.

The vse of this Muscle is to tie vppe and strengthen the eyes of brute beasts hanging alwayes downeward, that they should not fall with their own weight. It also incompas∣seth the nerue Opticke therby making his passage, not only straight but also warranteth it frō distention & frō leaning against the bone in violent concussions or suddain motions. Galen addeth in the booke before named, that in that motion which we called Tonicall or the fixing of the eye; it establisheth the same when we would accurately discerne any small body; for he supposed this Muscle also to be in men.

But Nature or the God of Nature rather, did not see it needfull for mankinde, be∣cause his countenance is erected vp to heauen, and if at any time hee bee constrained to looke downward, he hath all the foure right Muscles with their ioynt strength to sustaine his eye, because their Fibres grow to the Membrane which compasseth the Orbe.

Falopius addeth an eight Muscle found in Oxen which draweth that gristly Membrane which Aristotle in the twelft chapter of his second booke de historia Animalum calleth the skin of the angle, with which Membrane brute beasts do blinke when they feare lest any thing should fall into their eyes: vnlesse any man shall thinke this is a part of that Muscle which draweth the eye to the outward angle.

To finde out these Muscles of the eye, when the Braine is taken away you must cut the Orbe at each corner euen to the Opticke nerue with a saw, hauing a great care lest the Trochlea or pully which is in the inner angle be offended.

Next you must separate the Pericranium from the bone, and bend the vpper part of the Orbe backeward, then take away the fat and so shall you perceiue the Muscles of the eye lids, and of the eyes themselues together with their vessels; and if you would obserue the proper and peculiar motion of euery Muscle, you must preserue them in their proper positions and tie to euery one of them a thred not farre from the Tendons, then draw the thred and the draught thereof will describe vnto you the vse of the Muscle to which it is tied.

You may also take the eye whole out of his Orbe together with the Trochlea, which is in the inner angle and so demonstrate what you please. And thus much shall bee suffi∣cient to haue spoken of the Muscles of the eyes. Now we proceede vnto their vessels.

CHAP. V. Of the vessels of the Eyes.

FOr the same reason for which we intreated precisely of the Muscles of the eye in their Historie, we will also handle their vessels more districtly in this place, and passe them ouer more lightly in the booke of Vessels.

The vessels therefore which are sent vnto the eye are veines and Arteries, to which are added Nerues, as being cōmon Organs no lesse then the other. The Veines which are sent vnto the eye proceed out of the iugular Veines & leade blood for their nourishment.

The Arteries arise from the Carotides or sleepy Arteries, and are dispersed through the muscles to moderate the inward heate, and to sustaine their life; through which Mus∣cles as also through the fat they are accompanyed with Nerues, and distributed through their Membranes, which is shewed in the third Table the second and third figures at^h.

The Nerues are of two sorts, Optici and Motorij, that is, seeing and moouing; they proceed out of the marrow of the braine yet remaining within the scull and making the spinall marrow.

The Opticke Nerue [tab. 2. fig. 1 and 3. ^x. fig. 5. Λ. tab. 3. fig. 2. 4. 8. α.] which is called Visorius or the Nerue of sight, is on each side one, and these are amongst all the nerues of sense the largest, the thickest, the softest, and Galen also saith the longest in the third chap∣ter

of the sixteenth book de vsu partium. They are of a rare texture cōpassed with both the Meninges. [tab. 3. fig. 2. ^{a b c}.] They are the greatest and thickest of all the Synewes, that so aboundant faculty might be transported to the eye, that it might sooner haue sense of the light, and be manifold wayes affected.

They are very soft saith Galen in the fifth chapter of his seuenth book de placitis, that they might be sooner affected because they are nerues of sense and of a sense so very ne∣cessary, for all sense is perfected by receiuing and suffering. They are softer then any o∣ther, because they are affected by the light alone, which they receiue also very much bro∣ken. They are the longest of all the rest, because the way is long from their originall to the Orbe of the eye. Their texture is rare and thin, and therefore Herophilus beleeued that they were perforated: and Galen thereupon called the 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and meatus visorios. For in the third chapter of his sixeteenth booke de vsu partium, hee noteth out of Herophilus, that they are in their inside perforated all along their passage, and that perforation was the reason why they were made so large.

By these Galen thinketh not onely that the faculty of sense is transported, but also the Animall spirits in which the faculty is established, that so their sense might be more aboundant and strong: whereas through other Nerues he conceiueth that the vertue or faculty onely is carryed as we may perceiue in the 12. chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium, and in the fifth chapter of his seuenth booke de placitis. These Opticke nerues in their end and in their originall are distinct, but at the middle of their progresse aboue the saddle or seat of the wedge bone, before they fal out of the scul becoming a litle broa∣der, the right is vnited with the left [tab. 21. lib. 7. fig. 1. ^oo.] so that they make the forme of the Greekeχ, not by cleauing the one to the other, or by intercussation, or that one rideth ouer the other, but by perfect and absolute vnion and confusion of their marrowes they are so ioyned that one cannot be separated from the other, [tab. 21. lib. 7. fig. 1. ^H] for it is a very rare thing in Anatomie to find them separated.

The vse of this coniunction is, partly that the Pupilla or sight of the eye might look vp∣pon the same plaine least otherwise the visible obiects should appeare double because the eyes are double: partly that the Idea or formes of visible things might be vnited and so the faculty of sight be common to both sides, because the visible spirit may passe from one eye to another in a moment for the more certainty of the sight: And this is prooued if we presse or inforce one eye vpward or downward, for then all things appeare double: wher∣fore as it was conuenient that the eyes should be pararels; so also the nerues, which be∣cause of the motion of the eyes might decline from the right line, especially seeing the muscles do compasse them and cleaue vnto them: for when one muscle onely whether is be the vpper or the lower is moued, the eye also is rowled to one side. And therefore Nature hath worthily ioyned the Opticke nerues together, that euen in such motions the faculty might be wholly conuaied to either side. And this appeareth to be true because if you put your hand betwixt your eyes along the length of your Nose, so that you cannot see the obiect you intend with both eyes, you shall perceiue that you see more obscurely on either side, then if you lookt vpon the obiect with one eye shut vp, for then the faculty which was before dispersed vnto both, is vnited into one. Adde also this third profit of the coniunction, that the soft nerues hauing a long way to go, might thus be made strong ande stablished, because Nature could not sustaine them with any ties or knots of Mem∣branes. After their coniunction they are instantly disioyned, and each nerue issueth through the proper hole which is framed in the depth of Orbe out of the scull [Tab. 21. lib. 7. fig. 1. aboue^H.] and so the right attaineth to the right, and the left vnto the left eye, and there are implanted.

In a man they are inserted on the backeside into the center of horny coate [see the third table fig. 2. 3. 4. 8.] because onely man can look directly forward. In brute beasts as in oxen and horses, whose eyes are much farther a sunder, they attain by a line notably oblique vn∣to the compasse of the eye and do not determine in the Center. Hence it is that the eyes of brute beasts doe see the earth on either sides to direct their gate and to finde out their nourishment. These Opticke nerus when they are come vnto the eies are dilated saith Ga∣len in the 1. chap. of his 10. book de vsu partium and like a membrane each of them in cō∣passe the glassie humor Galen also addeth in the same place that they are inserted into the Cristalline humour.

The vse of these Opticke nerues is to leade the visible faculty from the braine which in

the eies is gathered vnto the visible formes, where the Nerue is dilated into the Mem∣brans of the eie. For if this Nerue be obstructed as it is in that disease which the Arabians call Gutta serena the cleare drop, the action of seeing is altogether taken away or inter∣cepted. And so much concerning the Optick Nerues.

The Nerues of Motion are on either side one, which sendeth a small surcle to eache Muscle by which it is mooued [Tab. 2. fig. 3. 4. sheweth this] (as he may perceiue who di∣ligently shall separate the beginning of the Muscles from the Nerue) which also is spred abroad into the Membranes. These moouing Muscles in their originall are continuall, that is, the right is ioyned with the left, whence it commeth to passe that when one eye is mooued the other also followeth the same motion: for they proceede ioyntly out of one point as it were in the fore-part of the spinall Marrow, so that the same obiect and the same light, after the same manner and at the same time insinuateth it selfe into either eye, that the sense and discerning might be one and the same; and this maketh much to the perfection of the sense that one and the same thing might not appear double, which doubtlesse would happen if one eye might be mooued vpward and the other downward at the same time. That this is true you may easily learne if with your finger you either depresse or lift vp one of your eyes, for then all obiects will appeare double, one higher another lower. But if you mooue your eye toward the side, because the pupilla or Sightes are in the same line, the obiects will not seeme double. Wherefore Galen in the thir∣teenth chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium writeth, that the Diameters of the visi∣ble Cones must be placed in one and the same plaine, least that which is one do appeare double.

Hence it is, that in the palsye and convulsion of the Muscles of the eye the patient often seeth double Obiects, because the eyes do depart from the same plaine. So also when the Opticke Nerues are either conuelled or relaxed the pupilla or Sight not beeing in the same line, all thinges appeare double, which also for the same cause happeneth of∣tentimes to men when they are drunke.

From these Instrumentes Veynes, Arteries and Nerues are deriued vnto the eye; a∣boundance of Spirits Natural, Vitall and Animall, which are properly called visible spi∣rits: wherfore acording to the plenty of the Spirits conteyned in the eyes, their magni∣tude as also their splendor or brightnes is greater or lesse. And hence it is that whē men are nere their death their eyes becom litle, languid & obscure, as also those that do too much follow venerial combats haue their eyes smal and extenuated, so also wee see that in liuing men the eyes are full and turgid, but when they are deade they become lesse as also laxe and rugous, for the presence and absence of the spirits maketh a difference be∣twixt a liuing and a dead eie.

Againe, according to the diuers disposition of the spirites and of the eyes from them, we are able by our sight to distinguish and iudge oftentimes of the affections of the mind, which is a cleare argument and euen liable to our sense, that the body of a man is ful of spi∣rits, which thing Galen also in the tenth booke de vsu partium prooueth by an elegant and demonstratiue argument. For (saith he) if vpon the closing of one eye you do attentiuelie marke the pupilla or sight of the other, you shall perceyue it in a verie moment to be dila∣ted, because a greater quantity of spirits do fall into the Grapie coate which we call Vuea, through that coate which is called Reticularis or the Nette, where they dilate the hole of the Vuea, which hole is properly called Pupilla or the sight and Apple of the eye. Finallie, that the eyes are full of spirites is hence conuinced, because they are sometimes obscure, dull and languid or weake, sometimes bright or shining, quicke and apprehensiue. But least these spirites which are of an admirable finenesse and subtiltye might exhale or eua∣porate they are kept in and retained by a thick, thight and strong Membrane which is cal∣led the Horny coate.

CHAP. VI. Of the Membranes of the Eyes.

HAuing declared the Muscles & the vessels of the eies & now remoued them away, the eye it selfe round like a bowl appeareth [Ta. 2. fig. 3 & 4. Ta. 1. fi. 2 & 3] which may be compared to the world & an egge, both for the figure & construction. To an Egge which consisteth of Membranes, the shel which is an indurated Membrane & a thin Membrane vnder it, & humors, the white & the yolke: So the globe of the eye hath membranes & hu∣mors. Membranes that being of a watery nature it might better be conteined in his positiō and the humors by them encompassed, which membranes had need to haue a more solid

substance; beside they are a great furtherance to the sight: Humours onely for the sight.

Concerning the number of the Membranes the authors are at great difference. Hip∣pocrates in his Booke De Locis in Homine acknowledgeth but three, the vppermost thick, the middlemost thinner, and the third thinnest of all which conteineth the humors; but in his booke De Carn. he saith they are manie. The later Grecians reckon four, Siluius fiue Vesalius sixe, Galen in the seuenth chapter of his tenth book De vsu part. seuen; vnto whō Fuchsius & Aquapendens do consent. We wil diuide them into two kinds, some are com∣mon to the whole eie, some are proper to the humors; the common Membranes are the Cornea and the Vuea the horny and the grapie coates. The proper Membranes are the Cristaline and the glassye. But whereas there are commonly reckoned seauen, Adnata, Cornea, Dura, Vuea, Choroides, Aranea, and Retina, whereto some haue added those which are called Vitrea and Innominata, we wil runne thorough them al after our Anato∣mical order.

The first is called Adnata which is the seauenth according to Galen in the second chap∣ter of his tenth booke De vsu partium, so called as it were Nata circa oculum, bred about the eye. Galen cals it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because it cleaueth on the outside of the other mēbranes of the eye, whereupon it is also called Adherens or the cleauing Membrane. This is the vtmost. Aquapendens supposeth that it ariseth from the Periostium & tendons or chords of the Muscles. It first offereth itselfe before Dissection together with the transparant part of the horny Membrane lying vpon the white thereof.

The Periostium is alwayes next vnto the bone, vnlesse it be wher it produceth the cyclid, for hauing therto attained it maketh an angle & so is doubled, one part of which dupli∣cation compasseth the lid of the eye, the other part [Ta. 1. fig. 6, 7, 8, V] maketh this Ad∣nata or adhering Membrane, which becomming thinner in the fore-part only where the white of the eye appeareth, couereth the same and determineth or endeth in the greater circle of the Iris or Rain-bow, where it is continued with the hornie Membrane. [Tab. 1. fig. 7, 8. V. and Tab. 3. fig. 1 ^d]

It is said to be white from the colour, although saith Aquapendens it be not indeed white but onely appeareth so, because the Tendons of the Muscles lying vnder it do re∣present a kind of whitenesse. But Hippocrates in Coacis calleth it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the white of the eye. It is a smooth Membrane, and by the interposition thereof the eye is fastned to the orb and to the inner bones, and it serueth instead of a Ligament to all the bones about the eye. Hence it is called commonly Coniunctiua a Coniungendo, because it ioyneth toge∣ther all the Membranes of the eye, thereby making it firmer and stronger, or rather be∣cause at the Iris or Raynbow it is ioyned to the rest of the Membranes.

In like manner it tieth the eie to eie-liddes and to the head, and in a worde it de∣fendeth the eie from the hardnesse of the bones. it ioyneth it with the bones, the liddes, and the rest of the coats, whereby it is so established that in violent motions it doth not fall out of his orbe, but is freely mooued; and besides it couereth the Muscles which mooue the eie and keepeth them in their proper seates but because it hath rather the vse of a Ligament then of a Membrane, we thinke it approacheth nearer to the nature of a Ligament.

This coate or Membrane or Ligament whither you list to cal it, is sprinkled with ma∣nie smal Veines [Tab. 1. fig. 6. 7. 8. V] and Arteries, which commonly when the eie is in perfect health do not appeare. Sometimes they grow verie red and being ful of bloode they strut therewith and so become more conspicuous as in the inflammation of the eie. For as Hippocrates hath it, sometime this white groweth red or blackish, or is ful of black Veines; this Membrane or coat it is which communicateth to the eie the sense of Tou∣ching, because neyther without nor within it hath any sense at al, and therefore the pain which proceedeth from the eye-liddes molesteth the Eye onely by reason of this Mem∣brane.

The second Coate of the Eye is called Innominata by some, as if it had bene but new∣ly found out, whereas Galen knew it wel enough, and in the second chapter of his Tenth booke De vsu partium reckons it for the sixte Membrane. It ariseth from the Neruous Tendons or Chords of the Muscles and determineth neere the Iris vnder the Adnata or Coniunctiue Membrane: and these Tendons do encrease the whitenesse of the eye, be∣cause they haue a bright Candor or whitenesse. But being nothing lesse then the Chords

[illustration]

Table 3. Figure 1. sheweth the Membranes and humors of the eye by lines drawne after the manner of a true eye.

[illustration]

Figure 2. Sheweth the horny coate with a portion of the Optick Nerue.

[illustration]

Figure 3. sheweth the same diuided by a transuerse section.

[illustration]

Figure 4. sheweth the Vuea or Grapy coate with a portion of the Opticke Nerue.

[illustration]

Figure 5. The Grapie coate of a man.

[illustration]

Figure 6. The Horny, Grapie, and the Choroides.

[illustration]

Figure 7. The interior superficies of the Grapie coate.

[illustration]

Figure 8. The Posterior part of the horny coate together with the saide Net separated from the Eye.

[illustration]

Fig. 9. The coat of the vitreous or glassy humor cald Hyaloides.

[illustration]

Figure 10. Three humors ioyned together.

[illustration]

Figure 11. The forward part of the Cristalline.

[illustration]

Figure 12. The Cristalline humor couered yet with his Coate.

[illustration]

Figure 13. The Cristalline bared on the sides.

[illustration]

Figure 14. The Cristalline of a man.

[illustration]

Figure 15. His Coate.

[illustration]

Fig. 16. The watery, disposed vpon the Cristaline round about.

[illustration]

Fig. 17. The hairy processes beaminglie sprinkled through the foreside of the coate of the glassy humor.

[illustration]

Figure 18. The foreside of the glassy humour.

[illustration]

Figure 19. The place of the watery humour.

[illustration]

Figu. 20. The glassy humour conteining or comprehending the Cristalline.

[illustration]

TABVLA. III.

[illustration]

FIG. 1.

[illustration]

II.

[illustration]

III.

[illustration]

IV.

[illustration]

V.

[illustration]

VI.

[illustration]

VII.

[illustration]

VIII.

[illustration]

IX.

[illustration]

X.

[illustration]

XI.

[illustration]

XII.

[illustration]

XIII.

[illustration]

XIV.

[illustration]

XVII.

[illustration]

XIIX.

[illustration]

XIX.

[illustration]

XX.

• ...The explication of the first Figure by it selfe.
• a. The Cristalline humour.
• b. The Glassy humour.
• c. The watery humour.
• d. The vtmost coate called Adnata.
• e. the dark part of the horny Tunicle which is not transparant.
• f, the Grapy coate called Vuea.
• g, the Net-like coate called Retiformis.
• h. the coat of the glassy humor cald Hyaloi∣des.
• i, the coate of the Cristalline.
• kk, the hairy processes cald Processus-ciliares
• l, the impression of the Grapy coate where it departeth from the thick coate.
• m, the horny coate, a part of the thick coate
• nn, the fat betwixt the Muscles,
• o, the Optick Nerue,
• p, the Dura Meninx.
• q, the Pia Mater or thin Meninx.
• rr, The Muscles, The explication of the other 19. figures togither
• a, 2, 4, 8. The Optick Nerue,
• b, 2, 4. The thin Meninx clothing the nerue
• c, 2, 3. the thick meninx clothing the Nerue.
• d 8, the posterior part of the horny Coate.
• e 8, the coate called Ret na gathered toge∣ther on an heapt.
• f, 2, 3, the Raynbow of the eye.
• g, 2, 3, the lesser circle of the eie or the pupilla
• h, 2, 3. Vessels dispersed through the Dura Meninx.
• i, 3, 6. the Grapy coat, but i in the 3. Figure sheweth how the vessels doe ioyne the hard membrane with the Grapie coate.
• k, 6. the horny or hard membran turnd ouer
• ll, 3, 4. Certaine fibres & strings of vessels, wherby the grapy coat is tied to the horny.
• mm, 4, 5. the impression of the Grapie coate where it recedeth or departeth from the horny coate.
• nn, 4, 5, 6, 7, the pupilla or Apple of the eye.
• oo, 7, The Ciliar or hairy processes.
• p, 7. The beginning of the grapy coat made of a thin membrane dilated, but p in the 17. figure sheweth the Ciliar processes sprinckled through the fore-part of the glassy humour.
• r 9, the bosom or depression of the glassye humor receiuing the Cristaline.
• s, 12, 15, the bredth of the coat of the crista∣line
• t, 12. 13, 14, 16, the posterior part of the cri∣staline humor which is spherical or round.
• u, 11, 14, 20, the fore-part of the same Cri∣stalline depressed.
• x, 10, 20, the amplitude of the glassy humor
• y, 10, 16. 19, the amplit. of the watry humor
• z, 10, the place where the glassy humour is distinguished from the watry by the in∣terposition of the Hyaloides or coate of the glassy humor.
• α, 10, 16, the place where the gropie Coate swimmeth in the watrie humour.
• β, 18, The Cauity or depression of the glas∣sy humor which remaineth in the Cristal∣line is exempted or taken from it.
• ♌, 19. The cauity or depressiō of the watry humor made by the same meanes.

of the muscles, it cannot bee properly called a membrane but a part of the muscles, which together with them must needs be demonstrated, notwithstanding if any man list to stand vpon it and call it a membrane we will not gainsay him.

The vse of it is, that by the interposition thereof the muscles might bee more fitly inser∣ted into the horny membrane [tab. 2. fig. 5. sheweth the same.

The third coate of the eie is called Cornea, which is the first according to Hippocrates, and may well be called the thicke and hard coate both in respect of his substance and of his ori∣ginall, because it is produced from the hard Meninxe or the Dura mater which inuesteth the opticke nerue. And here we may take knowledge of the admirable wisedome of our Creator, who (as Galen hath excellently obserued in the 2. Chapter of his tenth Booke de vsu partium) whereas in no other place hee hath separated the Meninges from any Nerue which are produced with them, but hath led them along with the nerue that they might be nourished & couered; only in this place after the nerue is inserted into the eie, hath separa∣ted both the thicke and the thinne from the nerue it selfe; yea made them thicker and har∣der then they were when they encompassed the braine. For when this membrane is im∣planted into the backpart of the eye [Table 3. figure 3. c] it is dilated and maketh an orbi∣cular or round membrane [Table 3. figu. 2 and 3. exhibite it] which compasseth the whole eie, although it bee not in euery place alike, neither haue one and the same name; for the forepart is translucid but the backepart is not so; wherfore some immitating the Arabians of this membrane how made two. For because the sight did stand in need of transparen∣cie, this membrane, when it hath attayned vnto the middle of the forepart of the eie iusta∣gainst the Cristaline humor, it is so condensed that it degenerateth into a horny substance, which forepart [Table 3. fig. 1. ^cm] is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Cornicularis that is Horny, because in the middle as farre as the extent of the Rainebowe it is like a thinne and pollished home of a Lanthorn, not only in transparencie by which meanes it receiueth the light, but also in his substance, because it may be sliuen or deuided into diuers flawes. And that was the rea∣son why Fallopius in his obseruations could not perswade himselfe that it was a part of the hard membrane because, saith he, it differeth from the Dura meninx of the braine, not one∣ly in substance but also in thicknes and in figure. For by it selfe alone it maketh another spherical cauity arising beyond the superficies of the hard membrane, and both within and without is free from any connexion.

This horny membrane is round, circular, hard, fast, thin, streatched, transparant, bright, pollished and smooth. Round and circular in a man (for in Oxen it is of an ouall figure) bunching or bearing out in the middle of the eye: not onely that it might bee freer from being offended: but especially that the eie might discerne things greater then it selfe; that is, that it might receiue the Ideas or formes of great obiects and those whole & vnbroken, as also that the light which entreth in might be better vnited and contracted, and so attaine through the Pupilla or Apple vnto the Chrystaline humour. That this benefit commeth by the roundnesse and prominence of this membrane may be demonstrated by a Looking glasse, for if we desire to see our faces in a long fragment of a Looking glasse we cannot see them whole, because the figure is playne, and in a plain figure the perpendicular beames of the light are not vnited: whereas in a round figure they concutre and meete together into a poynt: for Galen sayth in the twelfth Chapter of his 10. Booke de vsu partium, that Visi∣on or Sight is made by a Pyramis, and therefore let the glasse bee neuer so small, yet if it bee round wee may see our whole face therein: hence it appeareth that if this part had any fi∣gure sauing a circular, the images or formes of great obiects could not bee admitted into the eie at all.

It is hard and in some Fishes sayth Aquapendens exactly carrieth the hardnesse and rigi∣dity of a horne it selfe. This hardnes secureth not only the membrane but also the Chri∣staline humour from outward iniuries: beside that, it resisteth any light occurrent vio∣lence.

Fast and thight it is, not onely for resistance, but also for the better conseruation of the watery and glassie humours that they sweat not out, and that the thinne spirites might not penetrate through it and so exhale. VVherefore in a liuing creature because of the aboun∣dance of spirites, it is notably streatched and shineth very cleare especially in the forepart. But when the creature is dead and the spirits extinguished, it falleth presently and growes loose and corrugated.

Hence it followeth that sight cannot be by an emission or eiaculation of spirites out of

the eies, because the tention or streatching of a liuing eie proceedeth from no other cause but from the aboundance of spirits concluded and contayned within this membrane. And although it be the first and next part of the eie which is exposed to all iniuries of cold, heat and whatsoeuer else might fall vppon or bruise the eye; yet by the wisedome of Nature it is defended by the lids, by the haires, by the bones and by the skinne. Moreouer it is not a simple or single membrane but made as it were of many shels or scales, vpon which sayth Ruffus in the first Chapter of his first book, there is a cuticle or curtaine spread which is far thinner then the rest of the scales, that if haply one of them should be gnawne asunder, the rest might suffice to contayne and defend the Chrystaline humour. Auicen maketh it four∣sould.

It is very thinne, for, sayth Galen in the third Chapter of his tenth book de vsu partium, if it had been thicke it might indeede haue beene a defence vnto the eie, but it would haue cast a perpetuall darke shadow vpon it, and would haue hindered the passage of the light; whereas now being thinne it transmitteth any light or brightnes freely and without delay so that the chrystaline humour may discern the true purtraitures and representations of all visible obiects; wherefore also it is transparant, cleare and bright because it should be more fit for the transmission of illumination, for so we see that the thinner a horne is the better doth the light extend it selfe through it.

It is also streatched, for if it had beene corrugated or wrinkled and so vnequall, it must needes haue lost his roundnes, smoothnes and transparancie; and so the sight would haue beene much hindered. An experience whereof wee haue in old men in whome this mem∣brane is sometimes so rugous and loose, that either they can see nothing at al or very con∣fusedly, for, sayth Aquapendens, when one plight or fold falleth vpon another and the coat thereupon is duplicated, the membrane becomes thicker & the Apple contracteth it selfe because it is not distended by a sufficent afluence of spirits.

It is transparant that it might giue way to all visible formes and representations, and also admit the light which beateth vpon it. But we must consider that this transparancie or lucidity of the membrane differeth much from the lucidity of the aire, that so there might insue a refraction or breaking of the light. But howe the light passeth vnto the eye and how it is refracted, because it belongeth rather to the opticke Art then to Anatomy; him that listeth to be further satisfied therein, we wil send vnto the writers of the Opticks, such as are Vitellius and Alharen. Aquapendens also the Anatomist hath elegantly written of these things of the eie: but we proceed.

This membrane is pollished and smooth that in it the formes of thinges might better shine and more fitly be receiued, and images represented to the chrystaline humour most like to the outward obiectes. For if it had beene rough and full of eminencies and caui∣ties, the light would not haue equally attained vnto it; for where cauities are there doe the representations passe through more easily and brighter; where there is any eminencie ther doe they passe through with more difficulty, and beside are very obscure. Moreouer such an asperity or roughnesse would haue beene troublesome to the eie-lid, as wee see it hap∣neth when any small substance falleth betwixt the eye and the lid. But being fast, hard & thinne, it could not receiue any veines into it, neither yet arteries nor nerues: neither if it could had it beene behoofefull, for they would haue hindred the sight, & although it might haue defended the chrystaline humour from outward offences, yet it would haue been of∣sensiue to the sight with his hardnesse: and finally it would haue abated the visible faculty communicated vnto the eies from aboue, and haue dimmed or dulled their brightnes. For that the eyes are offended with a bright and vehement light, euery man hath sufficient ex∣perience in himselfe. Beside, we read in histories that Zenophons souldiours were almost blinded by trauelling through the snow. And Dionisius that Tyrant of Cicilia aboue his pri∣son built a very lightsome and bright chamber which he whitened ouer with lime, & when he had a long time detained his prisoners in a darke dungeon, hee suddenly brought them into this light and bright place, where they instantly became blinde because their eies were not able to beare so sudden a change.

In like manner those that doe labour of the ophthalmia or inflamation of the eye are offended with the light: but duskish or greene colours they are able to behold without of∣fence.

Hence it is that if in a bright light a man would looke on any thing that is a far off, he will hould his handes or some other thing ouer his browes to shadow his eies that they

be not dazled. So also it hath bene obserued, that those that haue fixed their eyes vpon the Sunne to behold the Eclipses of the same, haue vtterly lost their sight. And this commeth to passe, euen as we see a torch or candle lighted and set in a bright Sun is instantly extin∣guished: In like maner if you light a candle and set it by a great flame, the candle will pre∣sently go out, because the lesse light is ouercome and dissipated by the greater.

After the same manner in the eye, not onely the spendor of the Cristalline humour, but with it also the brightnesse of the glassie humour is dissipated: wherefore the wise and prouident Creator, saith Galen in the third chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium, hath interposed the coat called Choroides, which in many parts is black and duskish, and in oxen green; which coate nourisheth the horny coate that is next vnto it where they touch one another, and hindereth it also from falling vpon the Cristalline humour, although that inconuenience is in part preuented by the roundnesse and prominence of the saide horny coate.

Moreouer, the blacke colour of the Choroides in men, and the green colour in Oxen, is a medicinable curtaine or shadow for the ill affected eye; and this is the reason that e∣uery man by a naturall instinct, when he is offended with the brightnesse of the light, will suddenly close his eye-lids, making haste thereby vnto the remedy which Nature hath pre∣pared, euen within the eye. And this may be further exemplified by the custome of Pain∣ters, who when they paint vpon white tables would soone haue their eyes offended if they did not prepare against it, wherefore they place at their elbowes greene and duskish co∣lours, vpon which euer and anon they turne their sight, whereby their eyes are recreated and refreshed.

The posteror or backeward part of this coate which couereth the back part of the eye and the forepart also vnto the circle, [Tab. 1. fig. 7. 8. ^f] is hard, thicke, darke, or ob∣scure; differing as much from the colour or clearenesse of the horny membrane, as the white of an Egge when it is boyled differeth from the same white when it is raw. It is hard and thicke by reason of his originall, although it neither imitate the exterior coate of the nerue in thinnesse, nor the dura meninx or thicke membrane of the braine from which that ariseth in thickenesse; as being fourefold thicker then it, for when it formeth the coate of the eye it is thickened and hardned, for it was requisite it should be very hard and very thicke for more strength, because it maketh the whole globe and cauity of the eye where∣in the humours are contained; for this membrane it is which fashioneth the figure of the eye into a globous roundnesse, and in that figure conserueth it: it is also made whole, for this coate aboue compasseth the whole eye so that nothing can issue therout.

Add hereto that it receiueth the insertions of all the muscles & sustaineth their weight, as also the weight of the fat and is a Basis or foundation of the veines and arteries [Tab. 3 fig. 3. ^{h h}.] which neare the nerue behinde the glassie humour attaine vnto this membrane and afterward run forward till they be distributed through the coate called Choroides. By the mediation of these vessels, as also by smalties, as it were by ligaments this membrane cleaueth so fast to the Choroides, that they hang one vpon another. [Tab. 3. fig. 3. h i.] The profit of which connexion is, lest this coate alone should be mooued when the other parts of the eye are at rest, as we see a cloth wrapped about a smooth bowle will easily slippe, though the bowle be not moued.

This membrane is also thicke and darke or obscure, that the species or formes of things which are receiued might shine more brightly, as we see in a looking glasse if it be leaded on the backe side we my easily see our faces therein, but not so if the lead be remo∣ued. This part is white, and neither in nature nor in colour like vnto the forepart, and therefore some of the late writers as Fuchsius and Aquapendens haue distinguished it from the forpart, and say, that the limits and edges therof are continuated with the horny mem∣brane. It is scituated vnder the Coniunctiue and Tendons of the muscles, and is generated out of the dura meninx which compasseth the Optick nerue, for with it it is continuall, as may be perceiued if you separate the coate of the nerue with a sharpe knife through his length whilest you come vnto this membrane. It is called by some 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 & 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the hard membrane, Ruffus calleth it candida or the white membrane, although common∣ly that name be giuen to the Adnata or Coniunctiue coate.

By the helpe of this membrane is the eye established, as also the next mem∣brane vnto it defended, which is sufficient indeed to defend that which is vnder it, but not to defend it selfe: this also is it which containeth the humors according to their due dispo∣sition;

and whereby the Cristalline humour it selfe is preserued from the cold and heate of the Ambient aire.

CHAP. VII. Of the Grapie Membrane, the Apple, Rainebow and the Ciliar Ligament.

THe fourth coate or Membrane of the eye is called by the Greekes 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉; in Latin Vuea or the Grapie Membrane, because the colour of it is like the peele of a Grape stone or kernell, or it is like the kernell it selfe which is on the outside smooth, but within sharpe and rough; in like manner this Membrane on the out side which is next the horny Membrane is smoth but on the inside which is next the Cristalline it is rough or rather vnequal because of the scurles of veins and arteries which reach out of the hornie Membrane into it. [Tab. 3. fig. 3 and 4. ^ll.] Again it resembleth the Grape kernell in the colour which is blacke, or rather be∣cause it containeth a whitish humour such as issueth from the grape when the stalke is pul∣led off.

This Membrane is scituated betwixt the Cornea and Retina vppon which it lieth onely on the backeside, but forward it is betwixt the Cornea and Aranea and containeth the wa∣terie humour of the eye. [Tab. 3. fig. 1. ^c.] It is tyed backeward to the Opticke nerue, and the coate called Retina: to the hornie membrane it adhereth by certaine surcles of veines and arteries [Tab. 3. fig. 3.] and to the ranibow by Fibrous ties which are not very strong. Before it is euery way free and loose, that it might be contracted and dilated.

The figure of it is not exactly Globous as the former, because it doth not compasse the whole eye, but in the forepart [Tab. 3. fig. 4. ^{m n}. fig. 7. at ⁿ.] it is a litle pressed inward, where also it is perforated with a round hole.

The originall of this coate Galen saith in the second chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium is frō the Pia mater; [Tab. 3. fig. 1. ^f. fig. 4. and 5.] for when the Pia mater or thin Membrane hath inuested the Opticke nerue, [Tab. 3. fig. 2. b.] it is presently dilated vnder the Cornea to make this Membrane: wherefore it creepeth forward and compasseth the whole eye, excepting the forepart where at the greater circle or rainebow of the eye, it is continued with the Cornea, & being reflected backeward is duplicated and in the mid per∣forated, which perforation is called Foramen vueae. the hole of the grapy membrane and by a proper name Pupilla which we may interpret the Apple of the eie. Notwithstanding it is farre thicker then the Pia mater, especially in the forepart where it is double as thicke as it is behind. Againe, it differeth from the Pia mater in colour, for the coate of the Nerue which it receiueth from the Pia mater is white, but this is blacke on both sides.

Moreouer, because it proceedeth from the Pia mater or thin membrane, it is called also 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 especially, because through it there are many vessels disseminated, & because like the Chorion of the wombe it gathereth those many vessels and tieth them together; and this in oxen is easie to be discerned, for in them the vessels do run through the length of the eye in a conuenient distance one from another, from which vessels certaine threddy filaments or small strings do as it were weaue together this membrane like as it is in the Pia mater of the braine. From this membrane also the foresaid strings and threedy ves∣sels are produced into that coate which wee call Retina as may easily bee perceiued when this Grapy membrane is separated therefrom.

This Grapy coate therefore is full of veines, soft, black, and perforated.

Full of Veines, that it might nourish the horny membrane: soft that it might not hurt the Crystaline humor, and beside might readily moue when the Pupilla or Apple moueth, which it would not so readily haue done if it had beene rigid or stiffe.

It is blacke or rather duskish, the better to gather the brightnes of the Idea together, and to transmit it through the perforation.

Finally, it is perforated iust against the Crystaline humour, that so the Images of visible things passing through the horny membrane and waterish humour might at length ariue at the christaline. And although it be moyst and soft and neare neighbour to the chrysta∣line, yet is it not offensiue thereto; albeit on the outside it be something thicke or rather fast wrought: for as it was fit that this membrane should not offend the chrystaline humor, so likewise was it as fit that it selfe should not be offended by the horny membrane; betwixt the transparant part whereof and the chrystaline humour it is seated, and yet it toucheth neither of them.

Furthermore, that the chrystaline humour might not bee offended or touched by the horny coate insinuating it selfe through this hole or perforation, by which the externall brightnes attayneth vnto, and is mingled with the internall; Nature hath set that part of the horny membrane outward, and beside hath disposed about the Chrystaline a thin and cleare humor like the white of an egge; and lastly hath filled the whole perforation with an ayery and bright spirit. And that this place hath such a thinne moysture and is ful of spl∣rits is hence manifest, because in liuing creatures the cye is streatched & fulfilled on euery side, no part of the horny membrane remayning loose or corrugated.

But if you looke into the eye of a dead man before you come to dissect it, you shal find it rugous, and when you haue cut the horny membrane presently a thinne humour wil of∣fer it selfe (which also in compunctions of the eye doth vsually yssue from the wound) and so the whole eye will become rugous, contracted and loose. Againe, if you distend and streatch the coates when they are separated from the chrystaline humour, it will appeare that there is a great distance betwixt them emptie, which while the creature was aliue was vndoubtedly filled vp with spirits or humour or both

The like also may be demonstrated in a liuing eye, for if one eye be shut the Pupilla or Apple of the other will bee dilated, inlarged and distended as a bladder that is blowne vp; what then should distend or inlarge this Pupilla or perforation, sayth Galen, but onely a spirit? And this indeed is his argument whereby he proueth that there is an Animall spirit. For, sayth he, this amplification or inlargement hapneth because al the spirits doe assemble themselues vnto the eye which is open, whereas when they are both open the spirits are e∣qually diuided betwixt them. Galen also prooueth the same thing by dissection; for if you blow vp the grapy membrane on the backside you shall perceiue that the Pupilla or perfo∣ration will bee inlarged. VVherefore it followeth necessarily that all that space which is before the christaline humour is filled with spirits and a thinne humour. The thinne hu∣mour sheddeth it selfe in all the other parts but in the very Pupilla or perforation the spirits are gathered together.

This Pupilla, is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by Hippocrates in his Booke de Carnibus; by Galen in the fourth Chapter of his tenth Booke de vsu partium 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 [Table 3. figure 4. 5. 6. 7.ⁿ] In Latin Pupilla, oculi fenestra, the window of the eye, nigrū oculi & foramen oculi, we vse to call it in our lan∣guage the Apple of the eye.

It is a hole or perforation of the grapy membrane and is otherwise called the lesse circle of the eye (as the greater circle is called the Rainebow) [Tab 3. figure 2. 3.^g] because it ap∣peareth in the center of the eye like a blacke poynt. Blacke (I say) as well because of the deepe scituation, as also because the coates which compasse it about are of a darke colour. This hole or perforation is not onely lesse then the compasse of the horne, but also there is some distance betwixt them, least otherwise the ingresse of visible images through the horne might be interrupted; wherefore when the grapy membrane commeth to the trans∣lucent part of the horny membrane, it is no more round but reflected backeward and incli∣neth toward the christaline humour, leauing a hole in the middest which is called Pupilla, as Varolius hath elegantly deliuered.

This Pupilla or Apple of the eye is in man and some other creatures as Dogges very round: in many bruite beastes, as Oxen, Sheepe and Goates it is longer then round, of an Ouall figure or like a circle compressed in the middest, which compression is dilated or contracted according to the motion, either proceeding from the Animall spirite, or from the light: so that the figure thereof is sometimes round, sometimes long, sometimes wide, sometimes very narrow, as in a Cat whose Pupilla is like a narrow and long cleft; Aquapen∣dens sayeth, that in a Pike it is of the figure of a cone.

The dilatation and contraction of this Pupilla or Apple of the eye, Galen ascribeth to the Animall spirits, but Aquapendens thinks that the hole of the vuea or grapy membrane, (which is al one with the Pupilla) is dilated or constringed acording to the strēgth or weak∣nesse of the light that beateth vpon it. For in a stronger light it is contracted the better to defend the chrystaline humour, which is oftentimes offended by a strong light. In a les∣ser or weaker light it is dilated to helpe the sight to discerne of many visible thinges, which otherwise would not appeare; (And therefore those that complaine of the weaknes of the eyes and sight must haue them viewed rather in an obscure and darke, then in a Lucide or bright place) and so it commeth to passe that a strong light doth not offend the eyes, be∣cause it is admitted to the chrystaline humour in a lesse quantity; nor a weake proue insuffi∣cient

because it is receyued in a greater quantitie.

That the motion of the Pupilla is not from the Animall spirite as from the efficient cause he prooueth, because a strong light attenuateth the spirits, diffuseth them, and so should consequently enlarge the Pupilla. On the contrary, a weake light doth dull & di∣minish the spirits and so the pupilla should be straitened, whereas, common experience teacheth vs the quite contrary: wherefore saith Aquapendens I conceiue that the dilata∣tion and contraction of the Apple of the eye proceedeth from a proper faculty of the the Grapy coat, which Faculty notwithstanding is stirred vp by the external light which entreth into the eye, and yet we see that in Suffusions and Catarracts the pupilla is dila∣ted and constringed when a strong light cannot offend such eyes because it hath no free passage, the Catarract or clowd being interposed betwixt the light and the sight: how∣beit euen in such Suffusions if one eye bee shut the pupilla of the other is dilated, which can be from no other cause but onely from the spirits.

The vse of this perforation or pupilla is to transmit the visible images to the Crista∣line humour: for (saith Galen in the fourth chapter of his tenth booke De vsupartium,) vnlesse the Grapy coate had heere bene perforated all the parts of the eye had bin crea∣ted in vaine, because the Cristalline humor hath no communion with his objects but onely by this perforation of the grapy Membrane, and therefore according as this apple of the eye is dilated or contracted, so do we see better or worse. And hence it was that Galen in the second Chapter of his first booke de symptomatum Causis hath well obserued that the dilatation of this Apple of the eye, whether it be an original fault in Nature or happen after by accident, is alwayes a great weakner of the sight. On the contrarie, the coarctation or straightning of the pupills if it be naturall is the cause of the quickenesse and vigour of this sense, for when it is notably dilated the animall spirit which floweth into the eye cannot fill the whole space which is before the Cristalline humor; whereas on the contrary when the pupilla is contracted or gathered together the space is sooner fulfilled.

Add heereto that for the perfection of sight it is very necessary that the visible spe∣cies or Formes should flow vnto the eye by a right line and so passe vnto the Center of the Cristaline with a pointed angle; for so they make the better impression, and therefore the perforation or the pupilla is very narrow that the lines produced from the Circum∣ference thereof as from a basis might touch the center of the Cristalline in an acute an∣gle; for if the pupilla be so dilated that the lines produced from the circumference there∣of do make a right or obtuse angle in the center of the Cristalline then is the sight not onely offended but abolished.

Hence it appeareth that the naturall latitude or straightnesse of the pupilla maketh much for the strength or weakenesse of the sight, especially if the distance betwixte the visible obiect and the organ of the sense be proportionable. But to return vnto the gra∣pie Membrane, of which this apple of the eye is but a perforation.

This Membrance according to the difference of the parts thereof hath diuerse co∣lours, for on the outside where it toucheth the horny Coate it is blacke; on the inside where it respecteth the watery and Cristalline humours it is black or duskisn. But where it maketh the greater circle which we call the Rain-bow (according to the diuers temper of the Braine and the eyes saith Laurentius) it is sometimes greenish, sometimes sky co∣loured, sometimes blacke. Finally, the backward part of this Membrane where it first a∣riseth from the Pia mater is whitish, presently it groweth greenish, then nearer vnto a blewe, all which colours may be best discerned in the eye of an oxe. This black colour (as Galen in the third chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium, where hee speaketh of a sky colour because he described the eie of an Oxe) is very worthy of admiration, because there is no such colour found else-where in the whole body. And although in some eies it is lesse or more blacke then in others, yet in all it is eyther blacke or browne, that the cristalline humour being therewith couered might better collect and gather his bright∣nesse together. For as a small light in an obscure and darke place is better perceiued & shines brighter then in an open and light place, and maketh those thinges which are a∣bout it better to be perceyued; so the brightnes that is encluded within the eye becoms more bright, and the visible species do better appeare in the cristalline humour, because the inner circumference of the whole eye is inuested with this obscute and darke Mem∣brane, by whose shadow the cristalline is compassed; so that his brightnesse returning

backe from the blacknesse and obscurity of the membrane is vnited better into himselfe. And so (as Aquapendens hath well obserued) that light which is but weake, or but mode∣rately strong doth better appeare in the Christalline then that which is much stronger, as whereby the inbred light of the humour it selfe is ouercome.

Againe, we say that the darkenesse of the colour of this membrane maketh much to the collection and refection of the spirits. For when the Cristalline is too much affe∣cted by a vehement light, then we close our eyes and the spirits turning themselues vpon those darke colours are refreshed, as before hath bene shewed in our Historie of the hor∣ny membrane. Wherefore also about the pupilla it is thicker, because it should cast a greater shadow vpon the Cristalline in that place where the light hath his accesse, for on the backeside it is compassed with the thicke and fast horny coate. And for this cause be∣twixt the horny membrane and the Cristalline humour this coate is blacke. But this blackenesse on the inside of the coate where it respecteth the humours, seemeth to bee bred with the coate it selfe, but on the outside where it respecteth the horny membrane, I conceiue it is but accidentary because it wold colour a mans finger that toucheth it, and may easily be washed of so that the membrane will remaine white; but the colour on the inside will not die or taint the finger, for if it were so those bright bodies which it respe∣cteth and compasseth would be foyled by that blackenesse, and so loose their purity.

Some are of opinion that this blacknesse is the thick excrement which is separated in the nourishment of the Cristalline humour, as also that the watery humor is the thin ex∣crement of the same. Now as this blackenesse is perpetuall in all creatures on the outside of this coate; so on the inside, especially where it respecteth the glassie humour, the mem∣brane is sometime browne, sometime purple or skie coloured (whence it was that Galen in the fourth chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium, called it a skie coloured coate) and sometimes greene as in oxen; but where it is perforated on the foreside and respecteth the shining or transparent part of the horny Membrane it is not in man of one and the same colour; yet so that it is alwayes of that colour which we see in the Rain∣bow of the eye, according wherto we say a man hath blacke or browne, or skie coloured, or a Goates eye, which saith the Phylosopher is an argument of a good disposition: so that the same Aristotle in the fifth booke de genaratione Animalium and the first chapter hath well obserued that among all creatures onely man hath eyes of diuers colours, for other creatures all of the same kind haue eyes alike, excepting horses, who somtimes haue wayle eyes.

The Rainebow called in Greeke and Latine Iris, hath his name from the similitude of the Rainebow which appeareth in the clouds, because this greater circle of the eye ] Tab. 1. fig. 7. 8. ^f. Tab. 3. fig. 2. 3. ^f.] is distinguished with diuers colours which shine through the horny Membrane. Galen in the second chapter of his tenth booke de vsu par∣tium, saith, that in this Rainebow there are seuen circles one within another, all differing in thickenesse and colour, which proceed from the Membranes. But how nice a peece of businesses it were in dissection to offer to shew all these circles distinctly without con∣fusion, surely so hard a matter it were to accomplish as vaine whenit were performed. Some haue called this Iris 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 a Crowne.

There are many opinions of the causes of so great variety of colours in this circle of the eye, and if you will giue me leaue I will acquaint you with what other men haue concei∣ued, and then deliuer that opinion which I follow my selfe.

First of all therefore Aristotle in the first chapter of his fifth booke de generatione ani∣malium maketh mention of Empedocles his conceit, who compoundeth the eye of fire and water. The skie coloured eye saith he, is when the fire beareth the sway, and the blacke eye when the water exceedeth the fire.

Aristotle in the place before quoted refers the variety of the colours to the plenty or scarsity of humours, and maketh demonstration of his opinion by the example of aire and water: for, saith he, if you looke vpon a deepe water, or a thicke aire they will seeme black and obscure. But if there be but a little of either, then will their colour appeare blewish & bright, This conceit of Aristotles, Columbus reprehendeth, but gratis; for he addeth no rea∣son against him.

Thirdly, Galen in Arte medicinali is of opinion that the plenty of splendor and scituation the chrystaline and watery humors is the cause of this variety of colours. The eye saith he

becommeth skye-coloured, either because of the plentie or splendour of the Chrystaline humour or by reason of his prominent scituation, whereto hee addeth the paucity and pu∣rity of the watery humour. The eye is blacke when the Chrystaline is little or scituated somewhat too deepe, or because it is not exquisitely bright, or because the watery humour is somewhat more plentifull and yet not pure. Vesalius reprehendeth Aristotle and Galen in these words, which indeed are but bare words. This colour, sayeth he, ariseth not from the plenty, defect or tenuity of the humours of the eye, neither yet from the collection or dilatation of the Apple, and finally not from the depth of the eye or the tenuity thereof.

Fourthly Auicen referres the cause vnto the colour of the grapy coate, which as it is di∣uersly depainted so it bringeth forth in the eye diuers colours: if it be sky-coloured the eye is also sky-coloured, if blacke the eye is blacke. And him doth Vesalius follow.

Fiftly, Auerhoes imagines that the whitenesse of the eye proceeded from cold, and the blacknes from heat.

The sixt opinion is that of Varolius, who sayth, that the cause of the colour is to bee re∣ferred to the vnequall plenty of the spirit and of the watery humor, which as it falleth in di∣uers parts of that place so it representeth diuers colours. The colour sayth he which resul∣teth from the grapy membrane receding or giuing backe from the horny, is wont to be cal∣led the Rayne-bow from a certaine appearing variety: hee calleth it an appearing variety, because in very trueth there is not in that place any true diuersity of colours but only in ap∣parition, because the horny membrane standeth vnequally aboue the grapy, and so an vn∣equall quantity of spirits and humour fall between them.

The seauenth opinion is that of Archangelus, who writeth that the diuers colours in the Raine-bow are caused by the inequality of the veines which are in the grapy coate (which veines are also communicated to the coate called Aranea or the cob-web) contayning in them blood diuersly prepared according to the variety of the partes that are to bee nouri∣shed, which are much vnlike other parts of the body. Hee imagineth also that the grapye membrane is not of one colour in men, that their eies being wearied might bee recreated, especially by greene, of which there is most in the world; and hence it is that we doe often shutte our eyes, that so the spirites that are spent or wearied may bee restored and refre∣shed.

The eight opinion is that of Laurentius, who referreth the cause to the watery and chry∣staline humours, to the variegation or diuers colours of the grapy coate and to the spirits, which opinion also we will follow as seeming most reasonable. For the cause of the sky-co∣loured eye in respect of the chrystaline humour is the plenty thereof, the splendor and the prominent scituation; in respect of the watery humour the splendour and the paucity, for when the watery humour is but little it doth lesse hinder the fulgent brightnes of the chri∣staline.

The blacke eye hath quite contrary causes, to wit the paucity of the Cristalline humor his impurity and deepe scituation, as also the impurity and plentie of the watery humour.

The colours betwixt these depend vpon intermediate causes.

In respect of the grapy Membrane, the colours of the eye do differ, as when it is sim∣ply variegated or diuersly streyked then is the eye also of diuers colours, because in that place the Grapy membrane is diuersly discoulered.

In respect of the spirits the colours of the Rainebow differ, for thinne, pure, bright and plentifull spirits make it skie-coloured, on the contrary crasse, impure, cloudy and few spi∣rits may be the cause of this blacknesse.

The vse of this variety of colour in the Rainebow some referre vnto beauty, or happely by reason of this diuersity of colours the diuers colours of externall things are there bet∣ter expressed and offered to the Cristalline humour. But in those creatures whicht see in the night, the Iris is only a bright place which if it happen in a man, as Suetonius reporteth of Tiberius Caesar, he also wil see in the night.

Finally this grapy membrane some of the new writers, as Fucshius and Aquapendens imitating the Arabians haue deuided into two partes, the forepart they call vuea, and the backpart Choroides.

From the circumference of the grapy coate [Table 3. fig. 17.] doe directly proceed cer∣taine small filaments or strings like black lines, which resemble the haires of the eye-lids. These strings reach vnto the margent or brimme of the chrystaline humour, and although they be placed in the cob-web yet they compasse the chrystaline humour round about. By

the mediation of these hairy threds the grapy Membrane is ioyned to the circumference of the Membrane which immediately inuesteth the Cristalline humor [Tab. 3. fig. 7. OO] and so the cristalline humor it selfe is tyed to the neighbour partes: wherefore because it doth the office not of a Membrane but of a Ligament or Tie; Follopius for the forme cal∣leth it Ligamentum Ciliare or the hairy Ligament, others call it Interstitium Ciliare, bee∣cause it disseuereth the watry humour from the glassy.

CHAP. VIII. Of the Cobweb or Membrane of the Cristalline humor. Of the Membrane which compasseth the glassy humor, and that coat called Retina, or The Net.

THE Membrane which immediately compasseth the Cristalline humour is called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Aranei-formis, that is the Cobweb, most pro∣perly is it called Cristalloides from the humour whose proper coate it is, yea the verie superficies of the same. Some call it the Looking-glasse, beecause it is bright and translucid. Some thinke it hath his originall from the Pia Mater, and of that opinion is Columbus. Others from the coate called Retina or the net as Aquapendens, but Archangelus conceiueth that it is made of the Opticke-Nerue dila∣ted and drawne out into a wonderfull thinnesse. But wee are of opinion saith Bauhine, that it is engendred in the first conformation, together with the Cristaline humor which is framed of the purest and brightest portion of the seed. It is a Membrane most thinne (so saith Hippocrates in his Booke de Locis in homine) very fast, most light, white, bright and shining beyond measure, the better to admit the light and to be changed thereby, (for onely this Membrane dooth indeede receiue and apprehend the affections of the light) and least if it had bene thicke it should haue hindred the sight.

The substance of it is much like the inward skinne of an Onion or rather like a spiders Cobweb, for the finenesse I meane, and not for the density or fastnesse thereof. This Membrane couereth the cristalline humor both on the foreside and the backside imme∣diately compassing and establishing the same. Although I know that Galen in the sixte chapter of his tenth booke De vsu partium writeth, that it inuesteth this humour onelie there where it toucheth the grapie Membrane, with whom Archangelus also agreeth. But that the whole cristalline humor might be more fit for sensation, it was necessary that it should be compassed round with this Membrane, which notwithstanding we acknow∣ledge to bee thicker, faster and stronger on the fore-side. For because wee see be∣fore vs therefore the faculty and power of this sense ought there to bee more vigo∣rous, because in that place the light is more stronglye vnited by the roundnesse of the Cristalline and the refraction of the watery humors. And therefore Ruffus calleth it Visio & Pupilla, the sight or Apple of the eye. And because in this as it were in a glasse the Essi∣gies or Image of the Pupilla doth consist, therfore Galen in the place next before quoated, calleth it the Idoll or Image of the sight. On the contrary the backpart of it is looser, thin∣ner and more rare.

If this Membrane be taken away, the figure of the Cristalline humor is destroyed; for whereas before it was smooth, equall and polished; nowe it falleth assunder and becom∣meth vnequall not being able to stand togither when the bande which conteyned it is re∣mooued. In a word, the cristalline humor receyueth from this Membrane not onelie his sensatiue power, nor the forme and figure of his substance, but also his efficacy and virtue. Veynes it hath none, but seemeth to be nourished by the Ciliar Ligament.

The coate of the glassy humor is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which Columbus & Archangelus haue confounded with the cobweb before described. But the trueth is, that their substaunce is different, for this is thinner then the former and encircleth the glassy humor round about least it should either be diffluent or confounded with the watery humour. Other Anato∣mists haue altogether pretermitted the mention thereof, because they think that both hu∣mors are involued by the Cobweb Membrane. In the middest of this coate doth the Cili∣ar or hairy Ligament appeare.

The last Membrane or coate of the eye is called Retina or Reti-formis, [Tab. 3. fig. 8] in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because it resembleth a little round casting Net. This Membrane ariseth from a part of the Braine descending thorough the Opticke Nerue, or if you vvill, from the marrow of the Nerue it selfe as soone as the Nerue attaineth to the eye, and so hangeth at the very roote of the Nerue, from thence it passeth on to the middle of the eie

eye, and within the cauity of the grapy membrane vpon which it immediatly lieth, but is not tied thereto. It is inlarged and like a net or caule compasseth the glassy humour, but without any connexion at all, Aquapendens saith, it is inserted into the vtmost circle of the Cristalline humour, and that by the meanes hereof the Cristalline swimmeth in the midst of the glassy humour as a peece of wood swimmeth in the water. It is soft, reddish, of a mucous substance, not solid and crasse as is the substance of the braine.

Wherefore, neither in substance nor in colour is it like a Membrane, and therefore Galen in the second chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium saith, it neither deserueth the name of a membrane nor of a coate, for if you separate it from both the humours and lay it vpon a heape by it selfe, [Tab. 3. fig. 8. l.] it will seeme to you to be a part of the brain dilated, and therefore Galen calleth it the net like body; Vessalius saith it can haue no fitter name then the name of a coate, albeit Columbus and Platerus are not of his opinion. Veins and Arteries it hath very many and conspicuous; and indeed more (though they be small) then seeme conuenient for the proportion thereof: for all nerues being inuested with a portion of the Pia mater wherein veines and arteries doe run, this also receiueth a veine & an arterie diuersly branched, wherby Nature hath prouided and prepared aliment not onely for the Nerue, but also for the humours of the eye. In these vessels therefore is blood contained, not thicke not f••culent but thin and fluide, whereby the glassie and Cristalline humours might bee nourished, which because they are pure bodyes do also stand in need of pure blood.

It is also darke and corpulent not translucent, that it might not bee affected or changed by the light.

The first and greatest vse of this Net-like coate is, saith Galen in the second chapter of tenth booke de vsu partium, that when the Cristalline is altered, it might apprehend the Sensation; or rather to leade along the faculty of sensation to the Cristalline humour, be∣cause as we said euen now, it ariseth from the substance of the nerue.

Another vse of it is, that the visiue spirits might bee diffused through the Cristalline humour and the whole eye; to perceiue the alterations of the Cristalline and to transport the images of visible things to the braine as to a iudge.

Finally, whereas it intercedeth betweene the Grapy membrane and the glassy humor it keepeth the pure substance of the glassy humor from being defiled with the blackenesse of the Grapy membrane. And so much concerning the membranes or coates of the eye. Now we proceed vnto the humours.

CHAP. IX. Of the humours of the Eye,

THe humors which are the most noble parts of the eye are contained with∣in their coates, and are three; differing each from other in figure and con∣sistence; yet all bright and perspicuous, distinct in their seates, filling the ca∣uities of the eye, and helping the action of the sight. These three humors are called the Watery, the Cristalline, and the Glassy, amongst which the Cristalline excelleth in dignity and vse and therefore is called the soule, the center and an inner Spectacle of the eye.

The watery humour [Tab 3. fig. 10. and 16. y, and 19.] is called in respect of the o∣ther humor tenuis the thin humour, and by some Aqueus, because it is fluide like water and also transparent. And hence haply it was that Aristotle maintained against Plato that the eye was not fiery but watery. It is also called humor Albugineus, because the colour and substance thereof is much like the white of an egge. This is the vtmost of all the humours filling the whole space which is betwixt the foreside of the cristalline, the grapy membran which is there duplicated, and the horny membrane; sauing that it is accompanied with an aiery and bright spirit.

It is disposed on each side the apple of the eye, stable and not moueable, because it hath in it a kinde of Lentor or sliminesse. It is but litle (wherein Vessalius was deceiued) filling scarse the tenth part of the circumference of the eye. In this humour are those Suffusions made which they commonly call Cataracts.

The vse of it is very notable, as we shall heare afterward, which hath mooued vs to doubt whether it be a part generated of the seede as the other humors of the eye are, or an excrement segregated or separated in the nourishment of the cristalline humour as Galen hath written in his booke de Anatomia viuorum in the chapter of the eyes, and after him

[illustration]

Table 3. Figure 1. sheweth the Membranes and humors of the eye by lines drawne after the manner of a true eye.

[illustration]

Figure 2. Sheweth the horny coate with a portion of the Optick Nerue.

[illustration]

Figure 3. sheweth the same diuided by a transuerse section.

[illustration]

Figure 4. sheweth the Vuea or Grapy coate with a portion of the Opticke Nerue.

[illustration]

Figure 5. The Grapie coate of a man.

[illustration]

Figure 6. The Horny, Grapie, and the Choroides.

[illustration]

Figure 7. The interior superficies of the Grapie coate.

[illustration]

Figure 8. The Posterior part of the horny coate together with the saide Net separated from the Eye.

[illustration]

Fig. 9. The coat of the vitreous or glassy humor cald Hyaloides.

[illustration]

Figure 10. Three humors ioyned together.

[illustration]

Figure 11. The forward part of the Cristalline.

[illustration]

Figure. 12. The Cristalline humor couered yet with his Coate.

[illustration]

Figure 13. The Cristalline bared on the sides.

[illustration]

Figure 14. The Cristalline of a man.

[illustration]

Figure 15. His Coate.

[illustration]

Fig. 16. The watery, disposed vpon the Cristaline round about.

[illustration]

Fig. 17. The hairy processes beaminglie sprinkled through the foreside of the coate of the glassy humor.

[illustration]

Figure 18. The foreside of the glassy humour.

[illustration]

Figure 19. The place of the watery humour.

[illustration]

Figu. 20. The glassy humour conteining or comprehending the Cristalline.

[illustration]

TABVLA. III.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

II.

[illustration]

III.

[illustration]

V.

[illustration]

IV.

[illustration]

VI.

[illustration]

VIII.

[illustration]

VII.

[illustration]

X.

[illustration]

IX.

[illustration]

XIIX.

[illustration]

XVII.

[illustration]

XIX.

[illustration]

XX.

[illustration]

XI.

[illustration]

XII.

[illustration]

XIV.

[illustration]

XIII.

• ...The explication of the first Figure by itselfe.
• a. The Cristalline humour.
• b. The Glassy humour.
• c. The watery humour.
• d. The vtmost coate called Adnata,
• e. the dark part of the horny Tunicle which is not transparant.
• f, the Grapy coate called Vuea.
• g, the Net-like coate called Retiformis.
• h. the coat of the glassy humor cald Hyaloi∣des.
• i, the coate of the Cristalline.
• kk, the hairy processes cald Processus ciliares
• l, the impression of the Grapy coate where it departeth from the thick coate.
• m, the horny coate, a part of the thick coate
• nn, the fat betwixt the Muscles,
• o, the Optick Nerue,
• p, the Dura Meninx.
• q, the Pia Mater or thin Meninx.
• rr, The Muscles,
• The explication of the other 19. figures togither
• a, 2, 4, 8. The Optick Nerue,
• b, 2, 4. The thin Meninx clothing the nerue
• c, 2, 3. the thick meninx clothing the Nerue.
• d 8, the posterior part of the horny Coate.
• e 8, the coate called Retina gathered toge∣ther on an heape.
• f, 2, 3, the Raynbow of the eye.
• g, 2, 3, the lesser circle of the eie or the pupilla
• h, 2, 3. Vessels dispersed through the Dura Meninx.
• i, 3, 6. the Grapy coat, but i in the 3. Figure sheweth how the vessels doe ioyne the hard membrane with the Grapie coate.
• k, 6. the horny or hard membran turnd ouer
• ll, 3, 4. Certaine fibres & strings of vessels, wherby the grapy coat is tied to the horny.
• mm, 4, 5. the impression of the Grapie coate where it recedeth or departeth from the horny coate.
• nn, 4, 5, 6, 7, the pupilla or Apple of the eye.
• oo, 7, The Ciliar or hairy processes.
• p, 7. The beginning of the grapy coat made of a thin membrane dilated, but p in the 17. figure sheweth the Ciliar processes sprinckled through the fore-part of the glassy humour.
• r 9, the bosom or depression of the glassye humor receiuing the Cristaline.
• s, 12, 15, the bredth of the coat of the crista∣line
• t, 12. 13, 14, 16, the posterior part of the cri∣staline humor which is spherical or round.
• u, 11, 14, 20, the fore-part of the same Cri∣stalline depressed,
• x, 10, 20, the amplitude of the glassy humor
• y, 10, 16. 19, the amplit, of the watry humor
• z, 10, the place where the glassy humour is distinguished from the watry by the in∣terposition of the Hyaloides or coate of the glassy humor.
• α, 10, 16, the place where the grapie Coate swimmeth in the watrie humour.
• β, 18, The Cauity or depression of the glas∣sy humor which remaineth in the Cristal∣line is exempted or taken from it.
• ♌, 19. The cauity or depressiō of the watry humor made by the same meanes.

Columbus, Varolius and Aquapendens. Auicen also is of the same minde, sauing that he cals it the excrement of the glassy humour. And this doubt is further increased, because wee learne out of Anatomy that this watery humour is distinguished from the cristalline by the cobweb-like membrane, and therfore should seeme not to bee the excrement thereof but a part by it selfe.

But because no spermaticall part being taken away can be regenerated, whereas wee know that in wounds of the eie this watery humor may be totally lost & yet regenerated again, we are in doubt vppon what we should resolue. Columbus saith, that twise he saw this watery humor lost and recouered againe so as the patient could see with the same eye. And Varolius affirmeth that he hath seene as much. These learned and curious Anato∣mists account it but an excrement, which in many diseases is much wasted as Platerus ad∣monisheth vs. But Laurentius will haue it to bee a liuing and spermaticall part of the eye, not an excrement, because it perpetually keepeth the same figure, purity and quantity. Be∣sides, it is a defence for the Cristalline, and like a spectacle carrieth the images thereto. If it issue out of the eye it can hardly be restored, it extinguisheth the sight, and finally be∣twixt it and the Cristalline nature hath interposed a membrane.

The Cristalline humour [Tab. 3. fig. 11. 13. 14.] lyeth vnder the former; so called be∣cause it is exceeding bright like pure Cristall in splendor and transparancie, but not in consistence and hardnesse: and therefore Hippocrates in his book de carnibus calleth it Dia∣phanum oculi, Aristotle in the 9. chapter of the first booke de historia anim. and in the first chapter of the fifth booke de generatione animalium called it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the Pupilla or Apple of the eye. This humour is a Similar part of the body and made of the most pure and lucide por∣tion of the seede and the sincerest or purest of the mothers blood. That it is a part may be proued as well by the authority of Galen as by reason: Galen in his sixt chapter of the first of his Method and in the first booke de causis Symptom. reckoneth it among the parts.

Beside the definition of a part as well generall as speciall agreeth well thereto, for it is generated in the wombe together with the other parts. It hath a proper circumscription, It liueth. It is nourished and performeth an Act or an office: wherefore Galen accounteth both this and the glassy humour among the Similar parts. This humour in men is scitu∣ated right before, [Tab. 3. fig. 1. ^a.] for the membrane which containeth it cutteth the eye into two vnequall parts, the forepart being foure-fold lesse then the backepart. Fur∣thermore, it approches nearer to the inward angle of the eie then it doth to the outward.

The reason of this position is, because it was necessary that some bodyes should be pla∣ced before it, others behinde it; some of them to be seruiceable vnto it, some of them to defend it, and some of them to lend it their assistance: but in Oxen it is nearer to the lower part of the eye.

It is compassed by the cobweb-like membrane which, as we said, before is fast and po∣lished but behind more laxe and rare: when this Membrane is taken of the substance of, the Cristalline humour offereth it selfe to our sight, which is waterish indeed, but not fluid much like water lightly frozen into a tender yce; and when the membrane wherby it is knit together is remoued, it falleth to the sides and slideth a little downe. This humour on the foreside is compassed with the watery humour, [Tab. 3. fig. 10. & 16.] on the back∣side it sitteth or swimmeth rather in the glassie humour as a bowle swimmeth in the wa∣ter. [Tab. 3. fig. 10. and 12.

It is deuoyde of all colour, for if it had bene red or yeallow all things that are seene would haue appeared red or yellow, as it happeneth with those that are troubled with the Iaundies: wherefore, that it might suddainely receiue all kindes of colours which are cast vpon it, it selfe is of noe colour at all but cleare bright and perspicuous that it might bee altered and changed by the light. For this is the onely cause why euery colour hath power to make alteration therein, yea this humour alone is altered by colours and receiueth the images of visible things. Yet is it not perspicuous or transparant after the same manner that the watery humour is perspicuous and transparant, because in it there is made a new refraction of the light: wherefore it is faster or more dense that the light in his superfi∣cies might bee broken ad perpendiculum or with a right line, for so the light is better v∣nited and strengthened. It is moderately hard that the images might be fastened herein, and thick yet so that it is translucide, that the light may passe through it. It is smo•••••• and notable slippery and yet with the softnesse it hath a Lentor or sliminesse, so that if you presse it it will cleaue like Glue to your fingers. The magnitude of it is much like a

lupine or small pease. The figure somewhat flat like a greater Lentile: whence Aetius cal∣leth it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Lenticularis.

Before it is almost plain, yet a little rising like a Lentile the better to receiue the splendor or brightnesse of the light. Backeward it is sphericall or round that it might more safely reside in the glassy humour. At the sides it is something protuberated: but because it should not fall out of his seat but hang suspended as it weere in the chamber of the eye: it is ioy∣ned to the grapy membrane by the Ciliar or hairy ligament, yet that onely in the greatest circumference of the chrystaline: but before and behinde it is free, that it might not inter∣cept the continuity of the translucid bodies.

The third and last humour of the eie is called vitreus, [Table 3. fig. 1.^b figu. 18. and 20] or the glassy humour, because in consistence and thicknes it is like to melted glasse, in co∣lour and brightnes to glasse when it is cold. It is scituated in the backepart of the eye es∣pecially: somewhat also before, insomuch that it filleth the parts of the cauity of the eie if it were diuided into foure [Table 3. figure 10. and 20.^x] and is foure times as much as is the chrystaline, the better to containe the spirits of the sight that they should not too soone be dissipated.

The substaunce of it hath a kinde of consistence, establishment or firmitude in it; yet is it farre softer and thinner then is the chrystaline that it might better giue way there∣unto, for the chrystaline is seated therein: notwithstanding it is not so fluide as the watery humour. The splendour or brightnes of it is equall to that of the chrystaline; for sayth A∣quapendens they are both of a most exquisite purity, transparancy and brightnes.

The figure as it is in the eye resembleth the better part of a bowle cut in sunder, [tab. 3. figure 9. and 20.] for the backeward surface is round or conuex: the forward is plaine, yet in the middest thereof hath it a bosome [Table 3. figu. 9. r and 18.β] whereinto it receiueth the chrystaline humour. And although it be compassed about by the net-like coate called Amphiblestroides whereby it is nourished from the veines disseminated there through; yet notwithstanding it hath a proper coate of his owne called Vitrea, which if it be broken this humour presently melteth and resolueth into water.

CHAP. X. Of the vse of the Humours of the Eye and of the Sight.

HAuing declared the admirable wisedome, prouidence and goodnes of God our Creator in the conformation of this diuine member which wee call the Eie: although we haue spoken somewhat in the History of euery particular part concerning their vse, yet there remaine many things worthy our obser∣uation touching the humours, which being ioyned to that that hath bin sayd before will better absolue and accomplish this discourse of the vse of the eye and the true manner of sight. Which though I must confesse that they are more Philosophicall then Anatomicall, yet because they pertaine to the same subiect, I presume the Reader will not abhor from them.

That the Eyes are the instruments of the sight by which it perceiueth all visible things as well Proper as Common there is no man ignorant; Proper as all colours, Common as the figure, magnitude, number, motion and scite, which are sensible qualities common to all the Sences; so that it is truely sayed that the Eye seeth not a Man but those thinges which are visible in a Man, as colours together with the scite, figure, magnitude, number and motion of his partes, out of which afterward the Soule collecteth that that thing is a Man.

The Eie is framed of many parts, all which were created for the vse of the sight. But be∣cause in euery organ which is compounded of many parts, there is one similar particle vp∣pon which the action of that organ doth especially depend, it would be knowne what this particle is in the eye: we answere that it is the Chrystaline humour which is the authour of the action, because in it the species or formes of visible thinges are receiued and by it iud∣ged of.

Beside this, there are some particles without which the action cannot be; as the optick nerue which leadeth along the faculty vnto the christaline; some also by whose helpe the action •••• made more perfect, as the membranes and the muscles: and finally, some parti∣cles a•••• ordayned for the conseruation of all these, as the Eye-liddes and the partes about them.

Seeing therefore the faculty is deriued from the braine by the opticke nerues vnto the

eyes, which are set as scout-watches to take knowledge of the ariuall of outward thinges; that they may better apprehend the knowledge of such outward obiectes, it was necessary that whatsoeuer is to be perceiued should touch the nerue: for Aristotle sayeth in his third Booke de Anima, That euery action is made by contaction.

This contaction is here made by a medium or meane; for the Sences doe perceiue their obiects through a meane. Wherefore seeing the nerue is separated from the visible obiect, that there may bee sight it is necessary there should bee a contaction either of the nerue to the obiect or of the obiect to the nerue, or else that either of them should be mo∣ued in a certaine proportion to the other.

The two first wayes it cannot be, as euen Sense it selfe teacheth vs, and therfore it must be done the third way. If vision be made the third way, then either something must pro∣ceed from the nerue to the visible obiects, or on the contrary something must be sent from the obiects to the nerue, or else both must be: that is, Sight must bee made either by an e∣mission of spirites, or a reception of beames, or else by emission and reception both to∣gether.

Now the spirit is not carried from the nerue to the thing that is to bee seene, for then it would follow that the nerue alone by which the faculty yssueth can absolue and perfect the action of sight, and the iudgement should be made without the eye. Againe, neither is there any corporeall thing transported from the body which is sent vnto our eyes; for then the obiects by continuall diffusion would be diminished. Neither is Vision made the third way, so that a spirite or a beame or a light should yssue out of the Eie vnto the ob∣iect and againe something of the obiect should be moued vnto the spirite, that so the contaction might be made in the middle; for then the nerue alone would haue sufficed for the action, and the iudgement should haue beene made without the eie. VVhere∣fore we thinke with the Philosopher that this contaction is made by a medium, so that a certaine quality with some colour affecting and changing the ayre that is cleare and lu∣cid betwixt the eie and the obiect, doeth transferre from the things themselues the visi∣ble species by one right line from the obiect to the eyes, yea to the center of the chrysta∣line humour. So the ayre which is in the middest betwixt the eye and the obiect lea∣deth along that which is perceiued, and first of all the colour; for the ayre is altered by colours which it receiueth by contaction; for euen as the Sun attayning by the bright∣nes of his light vnto the Element of the ayre illustrateth the same; so coulours when they touch the ayre make a kinde of impression therein, for the ayre is alwayes capable of co∣lours when it is cleare, light and illustrated by the brightnes of the Sunne beames. Vi∣sion therefore or sight is made by the Reception of visible forms, when the light affected with those formes entreth into the eies through their translucid bodies; first of al with right beames, afterward diuersly refracted or broken and affecteth the chrystaline with some colour, which chrystaline as the primary instrument of sight doth in an instāt receiue those visible formes whereof refraction is made in the membranes, perfection in the con∣iunction of the Opticke nerues, and finally a perception in the braine. For the light is the proper obiect of the sight whereby it is moued and affected; Light I say stayned with the formes of colours and externall light, for the eie of a man hath not in it any In-bredlight, for then he might see in the darke by sending out a light from his eye. Albeit Suetonius re∣porteth that Tiberius Caesar had such an eye, and that excellent Philosopher and Physitian Cardan, as also Iohn Babtista Porta of Naples do affirme the same thing of themselues. Some creatures there are we know which see worse in the day time then in the night, and there∣fore they seeke their food in the night season.

Nowe because the light thus affected with the images of visible thinges must passe through a refraction of his beames, it is necessary there should bee diuers translucide bo∣dies. First the ayre through which it attayneth to the eye, then water in the eye in which this refraction might be made. plato indeed (who thought that sight was made extramit∣tendo, or by an emission of light out of the eye) thought that the nature of the eie was fiery, yet not such a fire as would burne but onely illustrate; for, sayth he, there is a threefould fire: one shining and not burning, another shining and burning, and the third burning and not shining. But we are taught by Anatomy & by the whole composition of the eye, that the instrument of sight is watery, and therefore Hip. in his book de locis in homine, saith that the sight is nourished, that is increased by a moyst brayne. And hereto also may we adde rea∣son, for it is the property of water to receiue; wherefore seeing the formes and images of

outward obiects must be receiued it is necessary that there should be water in the eie.

But because these visible formes should not onely bee receiued, but also retained in the eie, it was necessary that the body of the eie should bee made not onely translucid but also dense and fastly compacted: wherefore Nature did not only make the eye watery that there might bee a refraction, but also that this refraction might bee manifould shee hath created translucid bodies of diuers consistences; for the watery humour is indeed translucid and admitteth the light yet the Diaphanum or transparancie thereof differs from the trans∣parancie of the horny membrane that there might bee also a different refraction; this re∣fraction is made from a perpendicular and is in the eie foure-foulde. The first is from the ayre into the horny membrane which is a faster Diaphanum. The second from the horny membrane into the watey humour which is a thinner Diaphanum; in this watery humour the light is vnited and made stronger, so that it is able to pierce through the third Diapha∣num which is the christaline humour, wherein as in a faster substance the light is yet more strongly vnited and so passeth on to the last refraction at the glassy humour of which wee shall speake by and by. And as in the eye naturally disposed there are foure refractions, so in the spectacles which make the obiect both larger and brighter there are sixe. For first of all the light entreth into the spectacle which is a thicker Diaphanum from the ayre which is a thinner, from the spectacle before it come to the eye it passeth through the ayre again which is a thinner Diaphanum into the horny membrane which is a thicker; from the horny membrane into the watery humour which is a thinner Diaphanum, from thence into the chrystaline which is a thicker, and finally into the glassy humour so that it proceedeth by course out of a thinner Diaphanum into a thicker.

Another vse of the watery humour is to fill vp the empty space betwixt the christaline and the forward membranes, as also to keepe the horny membrane streatcht or tentered & moyst least if it should grow dry it might be corrugated or wrinkled, and so become thic∣ker and hinder the reception of the visible formes.

Thirdly, the watery humour sayth Galen in the sixt Chapter of his tenth Booke de vsu partium, keepeth the horny membrane, the grapy membrane and the chrystaline from ex∣iccation: because the moysture thereof keepeth thē transparant without which there could be no vision at all, for we see that in compunctions or wounds of the eye; when this wate∣ry humour is let out and dryed vp, the horny membrane which before was turgide and full falleth into it selfe and becommeth darke and rugous.

The fourth vse of the watery humour is to be a defence vnto the chrystaline, least the horny membrane should touch the chrystaline through the Pupilla and offend it with his hardnesse.

The fift vse is to restraine the impetuous or violent occursion or confluence of externall colours vnto the chrystaline.

And finally to eleuate or lift vp the formes of visible things as spectales doe, that they might be more fully and directly perceiued by the sence. For when the images of exter∣nall thinges are ariued at the narrow hole of the Pupilla they are lifted vp and so exhibited in the watery humour, wherein they are made more perspicuous; and this indeede was the chiefe reason why Nature placed so pure and neate a humour before the christaline, which is the prime instrument of the sight.

The vse of the chrystaline humour is to be the first and chiefe instrument of the Sight, as wherein it is perfected, and therefore some haue called it the Idol or image of the sight, and Aristotle calleth it Pupilla, haply because we see especially right before vs. That it is the chiefe instrument of sight may thus bee demonstrated. The Philosophers say, That whatsoeuer is made to receiue any thing must be vtterly free from the Nature of that which it is to receiue, because the same thing can neither worke vpon it selfe, nor suffer from it selfe. VVher∣fore that which is the proper Organ or instrument of Sight must haue in it no colour at al, because it is to receiue all colours. And indeed hereby may wee perceiue a thing to bee without colour, when if it bee placed against any colour it representeth the same, as it is in ayre, water, chrystall and such like: wherefore the instrument of sight must either bee ayrie or watery, or chrystaline.

Ayrie it might not be, because the colours that are receiued in the ayre do flow through it, making to mutation at all therein; but we know that the instrument doth only then per∣ceiue & apprehend the obiect when it so suffereth therefrom that it is made the very same; seeing therefore that the colours doe passe through the ayre and make no mutation there∣in,

it could not be that the instrument of Sight should be airy

In the second place it could not be watery, for though the species and formes of co∣lours make a deeper impression in the Water then they do in the Ayre: yet are not the colours therein so imprinted that a man may behold them in it, but they flow through it also. It remaineth therefore that the instrument of sight must be Cristalline, because that onely can receiue and retaine the visible formes. And this also may bee proued by Autopsie or ocular inspection, for if you take a beade of Cristall and set it opposite against a coloured body, which way soeuer you looke you shall see the colours in the cristall, as if the cristal were of the same colour, & did not receiue the impression thereof from those coloured bodyes. Wherefore in the cristalline humor colours are not onely receiued but also so retayned that the power thereof is changed into the colour which it receineth.

And the reason hereof is, because there is in the cristalline not onely a watery moysture, but also a glutinous or sl••my, which with his lentor and tenacity retaineth the images or formes of the colours.

The chiefe instrument therefore of Sight Nature hath placed within the eye, a round and glutinous humour most like vnto cristall to receiue and retayne the representations of all colours. This cristalline humour if you duely consider when it is taken out of the eye you shall perceiue it hath no colour in it, but will represent any colour layde neere it, as if it were of the same colour.

Moreouer, if you cut this cristalline humour in sunder, you shall finde that it is made of a glutinous and slymy moysture. And because sensation is a kind of reception, there∣fore was the Cristalline made round.

The action also of the Cristalline humour is assisted by the cobweb-like mēbrane which compasseth it about for if you take out the cristalline humour compassed with his Mem∣brane and lay it vpon a written paper, the letters vnder it will appeare much greater then indeed they are, from whence haply came the inuention of Spectacles, and indeed this hu∣mour is a very spectacle to the Opticke nerue, gathering the species which fall vpon it and representing them in a larger forme vnto the nerue.

Sight therefore is perfected and absolued, both by alteration & apprehention or dis∣cerning. The alteration is made in the Cristalline by reason of the transparencie therof; yet is this transparancie of another kind then that of the watery humour, that it might bee both altered and also changed by the light. For that the impression might be more firme, it is thicker then the watery humour, that in the superficies thereof the light might bee bro∣ken ad perpendiculum: for so the light is stronger vnited and corroborated when the beames are obliquely shed abroade and yet meete together againe into one be∣cause of their refraction; wherefore the Cristalline humour is thicker then the other translucide bodies that are in the eye, as the horny membrane, the watery and glassy hu∣mours; because it was made not onely to returne and giue way to light and colours, but also to deteine them, to suffer from them, and to receiue a sensation of visible things: for the thicknesse thereof prohibiteh the transition or vanishing away of the formes which are fixed in the superficies and body therof. For sense is not made without passion or suffring: now it could not suffer vnlesse the action of the Agent had bene receiued vnto it. Not∣withstanding, it is not so thicke or hard that the species or formes could not be imprinted therein, but soft like vnto waxe and viscid that they might cleaue faster thereto. Hence it commeth to passe, that when a strong light, as that of the Sunne; beateth vpon the Cri∣stalline it is pained and offended, because the image of the light maketh a kinde of abode therein. But naturally the image of visible things are no longer retained in the Cristal∣line then is necessary for their perception, but giue way to others: otherwise the sight wold be imperfect: for before the former images be vanished the succeeding cannot bee admit∣ted, because the alteration remaineth in the Cristalline vntill the representation acquir the place when: that is gone the alteration vanisheth together with it, and so there is way made for a new alteration.

The conformation also of the Cristalline helpeth much to make the sight perfect, for example. It is smooth and polished, that the formes therein mightbe most like to the bo∣dyes from which they are diduced. It is round that the light and the perpendicular beames thereof might in it be better vnited, and againe, that the light might be gathered in his su∣perficies where the sensatiue facultie is the strongest, for so the formes euen of the greatest obiects are conuayed whole vnto the Organ. Notwithstanding on the foreside this

roundnesse is somewhat depressed, which depression helpeth much the reception of the formes. On the backeside it is rounder that the light beeing brought vnto the Cristalline might be vnited in it selfe and not disparkled but determine and subsist in the glassy hu∣mour.

The Cristalline humour also before and behind is at liberty or free from connexion, that the light which entereth alway directly, might haue free passage through all the trans∣lucide bodyes of the eyes; for by this meanes whatsoeuer is betwixt the Cristalline humor and the thing seene is continuated by a continuity of transparancy. Yet ought it not to be on euery side loose, because then any extraordinary motion might haue violated the frame of the eye. Nature therefore hath tyed it in his circuite to the neighbour partes, and scituated it in the middest, that it might receiue the seruice & ministery of all the rest.

The glassy humour is seated after the Cristalline, least if the light should haue pas∣sed on to the Net-like and Grapie Membranes which are coloured, it should haue retur∣ned againe to the Cristalline defiled with those colours, and so the sight haue bene for∣stalled by those inward colours which are neerest vnto it. Againe, at this Diaphanum of the glassy humor there is a new refraction made of the light, not such a refraction as is in the Cristalline wherby the light is more vnited, but because the substance of the glas∣sy humor is more rare and thin the light therein is dispersed and weakned, some say al∣so vanisheth, others that it reacheth from thence into the cauity of the Opticke Nerue where the sight is perfected; and surely the finenesse of the net-like Membrane is not a∣ble to returne the light that beateth against it, but rather giueth way thereto.

Another vse of the Glassy humour saith Galen is to nourish the Cristalline, which it doth per Diadosin or transumption; for he thought that the Cristalline humor could not be nourished by blood. But to saue Galens credit, we must heere distinguish, for al parts are nourished by blood; now the Cristalline is a part and therefore it is nourished with blood. We answere, that it is not immediately nourished with bloode but mediately, for because there are no Veines neither in the cristalline nor in the glassy humors (at lest that the sight of man is able to apprehend) blood cannot be conueyed vnto them; ney∣ther indeede ought it, least it should haue infected the Cristalline with a redde colour, which woulde haue bene a great hindrance to the sight; for it behoued aboue al things that the cristalline should be free from all colour, because it was to receiue all. Where∣fore it was necessary that his Aliment should be prepared and not conueyed vnto him before it were fitted for his vse.

The blood therefore conteined in the Veines of the Grapy Membrane in which it is thicke and blackish, is powred foorth into lesser branches running through the Net∣like Membrane, where it receiueth an alteration becomming very thin and of a cleare ruddinesse, which blood is receiued by the glassy humor therein prepared and made a fit Aliment both for itselfe and for the cristalline. Hence it is that Galen saith, The Glassy humor to the Cristalline is like the stomacke to the Liuer.

But because Anatomistes are of diuers opinions concerning the nourishment of the Cristalline humour, it shall not bee amisse to giue you a taste of euery mans appre∣hension in this matter, especially of those that are accounted Maisters in Anatomy.

Galen therefore in the first chapter of his tenth Booke De vsupartium sayth, that the Cristalline humour is nourished by the glassy, and the glassy by that bodye which com∣passeth it about, to wit, the Net-like Membrane, and that per Diadosin or Transumption of matter, because (saith he) the cristalline humor which is white, cleare and resplendent ought not to be nourished by blood, as whose qualities doe differ much one from the other, whereas the aliment should be familiar to that which is nourished thereby. Na∣ture therefore prepared for it a proportionable aliment, to witte, the glassye humour, which glassy humor by how much it is thicker and whiter then blood, by so much doth the cristalline humour exceede it in humidity and whitenesse, for this cristalline is ex∣quisitely white and moderately hard.

Varolius enclineth to Galens opinion, his wordes are these or at least to this pur∣pose. Euery thing is nourished by such a substaunce as determineth nearest vnto that which it should nourish; and therefore the glassy humour is immediately placed behinde the cristaline, and is of a softer and a thinner consistence. Also because so noble a part which needeth such abundance of spirits by reason of their continual expense shold not at any time be defranded of nourishment▪ Nature made so great a quantitie of the

glassy humour, in which nutrition the Chrystaline turneth into his owne nature the thic∣ker parts of the glassy humour because it is farre thicker and faster then it. But the thinner part of the glassy humour she separateth as an vnprofitable excrement from the Chrysta∣line, and thereof maketh the watery humour. Thus far Varolius.

But sayth Archangelus (who thinketh that the Chrystaline is so nourished with the glas∣sie humour as a bone is nourished with the marrow) if the chrystaline and glassy humours be parts of the body then one part shall nourish another? But it may bee answered, that there is a surplussage of the nourishment of the glassye humour which is a conuenient Ali∣ment for the chrystaline. Another question may be asked, sayth he, how Galen sayth that in the glassy humour there is no veine? It is answered that there is no veine conspicuous, but yet there are very many which are so slender that the eye cannot discerne them, and hence it is that the glassy humour is not so white as the chrystaline, because it is sprinkled with many blinde veines. In like manner in the white of the eie which is called Tunica Ad∣nata, there appeare no veins at al, but if the eye be inflamed then many veines which before lay hid doe rise vp and become conspicuous. If the braine of a man bee dissected, there appeare no veines therin, but if it be inflamed then, sayth Archangelus, may an infinite mul∣titude be perceiued to run through his substance.

Laurentius conceiueth that the glassy humour is nourished by bloud, and receiueth small veines from the Ciliar or hayry crown; and that the glassy humour prepares the bloud for the chrystaline, which bloud it changeth least the purity of the chrystaline should be in∣fected, but he doth not thinke that the substance of the glassy humour is conuerted into the chrystaline and assimilated thereto.

Aquapendens his opinion is, that the christaline is nourished by bloud, and that as bones and membranes which are very white and farre remooued from the Nature of bloud by a propriety of their temperament doe change the bloud into their substance: so it com∣meth to passe in the chrystaline humour; and that the bloud is conuayed out of the veines of the grapy into the net-like coate and there depurated that it might better be conuerted into the nitid and pure substance of these bodies. The thicker part is thrust downe into the grapy coate and there collected. The thinner part maketh the watery humour. Nei∣ther doth he thinke it possble the Chrystaline should be nourished by the glassy humour, per Diadosin or Transumption, because the cobweb like membrane commeth betweene the two humours, which Galen was ignorant of, who thought that the forepart only of the Chrystaline was couered, and from that mistaking fell into that errour of nourishment by Transumption. And so much concerning the nourishment of the humours.

Two other vses there remaine of the glassy humour, the one to retaine the spirites for the illustration of the Chrystaline; the other to defend it from the hardnesse of the mem∣branes, and to make it a seat wherein it might securely rest it selfe.

CHAP. XI. Of the outward Eares.

HAuing thus absolued the History of the Eye, it followeth that wee come vnto the organ of Hearing, which Aristotle calleth Sensum disciplinae, because it was created for the vnderstanding of Arts and Sciences: for Speach, because it is au∣dible, becommeth the Cause of that we learne therby as the Philosopher saith in the first Chapter of his Book de Sensu & sensili. This instrument of the Heating is the Eare, framed by Nature with no lesse Art then the former. Yea so full of intricate Mean∣dersis it; that it will be very hard to be disciphered, so many & so smal are the particles ther∣of, and couched so close in narrow distances or nookes betweene the bones. Notwith∣standing we will endeuour our selues for your satisfaction to acquaint you what wee haue learned, as well by dissections as out of the writings of learned men, especially Fallopius, Eustachius, Volcherus, Arantius, Aquapendens and Placentinus. But in the pursuite of this so difficult a taske, we stand in neede and doe implore the helpe of Almighty GOD, that hee would set an edge vpon my wit, saith Bauhine, to find out the myracles of his Creation, the Diuinity of his wisedome, and the infinite goodnesse wherewith he hath compassed vs on euery side. Moreouer, that he would giue me power perspicuously to propound and lay o∣pen to your capacities a thing so diuersly and quayntly folded vp, that the Eie is scarce able to follow the trayne thereof.

These instruments are called in Greek, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, in Latin Aures ab hauriendis vocibus, as sayth Lactantius, in English Eares of hearing.

There are many parts of the Eares which serue as well for the reception of the sound into them, as also for the intension thereof. Some of them are such, as without which there is no reception of sounds, others are necessary for better reception and hearing; Finally, others were created for the conseruation of all the rest. Wee will diuide the Eare according to Hippocrates in Coacis into an outward and an inward Eare, and first we will entreate of the outward.

The Eares saith Aristotle are parts of the head by which we heare, and therefore it may be immagined they are called Aures quasi audes, ab audiendo from hearing. Instru∣ments they are of Hearing indeede, as Galen confesseth in the second chapter of his Booke De Instrumento Odoratus, but not the principal organs, because if the Eares be cut off close by the heade, yet a man will heare notwithstanding, as if the nose bee cut off a man shall smell though imperfectly.

The reason is, because the principal instrument both of Hearing and of Smelling lies hid within the scul. The outward Eares therefore are helping causes, and when they are sound and whol they are of as great vse for the Hearing, as the nosethrils are for the Smelling.

These outward Eares properly called Auriculae are in men & beasts conspicuous, but in Birds and Fishes it is not so, for Birds haue onely holes whereby the sound ente∣reth into their Brains, because their skinne being harder they want matter whereof this Eare should be framed; beside such eares as other creatures are furnished with would haue beene a hinderance vnto them in their flight, as wee see a contrary winde blowing vpon a saile staieth the course of a Ship: as for Fishes no man that I know hath yet found out the instruments of their Hearing. Those holes which are placed before their eyes we doubt whither they serue for Hearing or for Smelling.

The outward Eares are placed in the same paralel or line with the eyes, yet not so much for the better reception of sounds, which saith Cicero in his second booke De Na∣tura Deorum, of their owne nature do ascend vpward because they haue their consistence in the aire; but rather from the commodity of those softe nerues within the scull which were to communicate the animall spirit dispersed through the substaunce of the Braine vnto the principal Organ of Hearing. Otherwise if the eares had their scituation onely for the apprehension of sounds, they might as well haue bene placed in any parte of the creature as where they are; because the sounds are equally communicated to the whole aire that compasseth vs about. But on the foreside they might not be placed, be∣cause that roome was to be taken vp for the eies and the instruments of other senses. For the Eies, because we see by a right line; but we may heare as wel on either side as direct∣ly forward, as Aristotle saith in the tenth chapter of his second booke de Part. Animalium; although I am not ignorant that Galen in the eight chapter of his tenth booke De Vsu partium is not altogether of Aristotles opinion.

Againe for the Mouth, partly for the commoditie of receiuing meates and drinkes directly from the hand, partly also because it was fit we should turne, not our eies onely but our mouth also toward them with whom we discourse.

Thirdly for the Nose, that the sauours of meates and drinks by which we iudge and discerne whither they be good or ill might more directly strike the sense of Smelling. Moreouer, the Eares were not placed in the backepatt of the head because there are no Nerues deriued thereunto; not in the top of the head least the couering of the Heade should hinder the ingresse of the sound. It remaineth therefore that it was most con∣uenient they should be placed in the sides of the head or the face iust against the region of the eies, and also be in man immooueable. In bruite beasts their scituation is some∣what otherwise, to wit, at the toppe of the Face, because their heades, hang alwayes downeward vnto the earth to seeke theyr Foode. In Beastes also the eares are mooue∣able.

The Eares of Apes haue a middle position betwixt those of men and beastes, be∣cause it is a creature of a middle figure betwixt the erected frame of a man & the prone or bending posture of a beast. And as their position so likewise is their motion, not to bee immoouable as in Men, nor so mooueable as in other beasts but betwixt both.

The figure of the outward eare is round or semi-circular [Tab. 4. fig. 1. ^P. Tab. 5. fig. ^bb. Ta. 6. fig. 7, L.] because that which is rounde is best secured from iniuries, as also most capacious. On the outside they are conuexe or gibbous. On the inside excauated like a

[illustration]

Table 4. Fig. 1. Sheweth the skin of the head together with the fat, and the glandules vnder the eares and the muscles of the hinder part of the head and the eares.

[illustration]

Fig. 2. Sheweth the muscles of the eares, of the eye∣browes, and a few of the iawes.

[illustration]

TABVLA. IIII.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

• A A. The skin of the head together with the rootes of the eares.
• B B. The muscle of the eare springing from the pericranium or skull-kin.
• C. The triangular muscle mouing the skin of the nowle of the head.
• D D D. Branches of the externall iugular veine.
• E. The tip of the eare.
• F. The circumference of the eare called Helix in Greeke.
• G. The glandules of the eares, in which is the disease cal∣led Parotis.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

[illustration]

The second Figure.

• A. The semicircular muscle of the ear drawing the outward eare vpward, which was noted with B. in the first figure.
• B C D E F G. The muscle as it were diuided into 3. parts called Tripartitus.
• H. The hinder part of the outward eare, into which the foresaid muskle is fastened.
• I I I I. The circumference of the eare called the wing.
• K. The lap or tip of the eare.
• L. The little gristle on the outside of the hole of the hea∣ring, which in ancient men is bearded, called Tragus because it is like a Goates beard.
• M M M. The skull as yet couered with the Pericranium or skul-kin.
• N N N, The circumference of the temporall muscle.
• O, The muskle yet couered with the Pericranium.
• P, The membrane, couering the said muskle drawne aside
• Q Q Q. The fleshy part of the temporall muskle.
• R R, The iugular or yoke bone.
• S S. A sharpe processe of the lower iaw.
• V. The muskle masseter or grinding muskle, remooued here from the yoke bone whence it hath his originall, that the implantation of the temporall muskle into the processe of the iaw might appeare.
• X, The musklesmaking the Cheeks.
• Y, Fleshy Fibres going vnto the lips.
• Z, A muskles of the lower lip.
• a a, The muskle of the eye-brow.
• b b, The vpper eye-lid hauing a muskle with transuerse Fi∣bers.
• c, The eye brow hauing a circular muskle, wherby the ex∣ternal parts of the eye are exceeding constringed, as Pla∣centinus saith.

den or cornered hole. Yet euen on the inside there are certaine swellings answerable to the cauityes, to breake the violent rushing of the aire or wind or whatsoeuer should vna∣wares be offered against them. For in these breaches of the eare as it were in hollow bo∣dyes, not onely the sound of the ayre that rusheth in is readyly and exactly drawne and ful∣ly receiued: but also it is broken and boundeth or reboundeth as a ball against the sides of the inequalityes till the refraction get into the circular cauity and so the sound becomes more equall and harmoniacall. It attayneth also better vnto the Tympane or drum of the eare without trouble or molestation, and is imprinted vppon or into the inward ayre more strongly and more distinctly; and beside, by this meanes the sound continueth longer as we may haue experience if we apply any hollow shell to our eares, for by that meanes the ayre is better gathered and more directly offered to the auditory nerue. The Scythians that liue in the cold Northernly countryes haue often their eares rotted off with cold, whereby their hearing is much impaired, to amend which default they fasten about the hole some hollow shell; imagine it be of a great Cockle or Scallop wherein the ayre is concluded, gathered and directed vnto the head.

The truth hereof may be diuersly demonstrated, first because all sounds are most exactly receiued in hollow and hard bodyes, as bels and such like. Againe, those men whose eares are cut away do receiue sounds and articulated voices after an obtule, dul or confused ma∣ner like the fall of water or chirping of a Grashopper, in somuch that the other eare which

is not vitiated is notwithstanding impaired, vnlesse that which is wounded be quite stopt vppe.

Finally, such as are halfe deafe that they may heare the better, do set their hands to their eare with the palmes forward to gather in the sound, as we reade that Adrian the Emperor was wont to do. Another vse of this refraction of the aire is, least it should enter into the Eare too cold if it were not broken and beaten against the sides in the passage whereby it receiueth if not heate yet a mitigation of his coldnesse. And finally, if it were not for these breaches many violent sounds would suddenly rush into the eare to the great offence of the Hearing.

These Eares are not alwayes of one magnitude, but in some greater in some lesse, but most-what proportionable to the magnitude of the body, and yet it hath beene obserued that where there is greater store of vitall heate there the eares are some-what the larger. Howsoeuer, they are small in man in respect of other creatures, as well for ornament as be∣cause the head of a man (saith Galen in the twelfth chapter of his eleauenth Booke De vsu partium) was to bee couered eyther with a hat or a head-peece or some other couering; wherefore if mens Eares had bene as bigge as beasts it would haue beene very inconueni∣ent, yet they are large enough to couer the passage.

They are made double, not so much that when one is vitiated wee might haue vse of the other (although this bee a great commoditie) as for the necessity and perfection of the Sense.

The whole Eare which Vesalius not vnfitly compareth to a fanne wherewith they dresse Corne, may fitly be diuided into an vpper and a lower part. The vpper which is hard & as it were stretched Aristotle in the eleuenth chapter of his first Booke De historia Anima∣lium leaueth without a name, but Gaza his interpreter calleth it pinna [Tab. 4. fig. 1. Tab. 5 ^bb] the Finne, as well because of the forme as also in respect of the vse: for the Forme, be∣cause that broad Gristle is not vnlike the Fin of a Fish: for the Vse, because as the fish gui∣deth her selfe in the water with her Finnes, so these gristly partes cleaning to the sides of the head do guide the sound that it passe not away before it is communicated to the In∣ward Aire, and for the same cause it is called by some 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, a wing; broade it is the better to entertaine or catch the sound which afterwarde descendeth by the inwarde compasse vnto the arched cauity that leadeth vnto the passage into the head.

The lower part which is soft and depending [Tab. 4. fig. 1. ^E Fig. 2. ^H Table 5. fig. 1. ^a] is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because we take hold of that when we wold admonish a man, and thence haply it was that the eare is consecrated to Memory. The Latines cal it Pibra. Tully in his second Booke ad Quintum fratrem cals it Ansa Auriculae the handle of the ear, we call it the Lap of the eare, because it is a softe and flexible bodie, hauing in it neyther bone to stiffen it, nor gristle to harden it, nor Nerue to stretch it, and therefore it may bee perforated withour paine or with very little, as we may see in young folkes of both Sexes, who vsually hang Iewels at it. Laurentius well obserued, that it is a signe of modestye or shamefastnesse, because vpon such a passion this part will grow redde. But the naturall vse of it is to conduct the excrements downward which yssue out of the eare.

The outward circumference of the eare is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Capreolus of the likenesse it hath to the writhen Tendrill of a Vine. [Tab. 4. fig: 1, ^FF. Table: 5, fig: 1 ^bb] The inner compasse, which is as it were opposite to the vtter, is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Pollux calleth it Scapha, beecause it is somewhat like a Lighter or Barge. [Tab. 5. fig. 1. ^cc] The great cauity which is compas∣sed almost round by this inward circumference [Tab. 5. fig. 1] is called Concha, because it is like the shell of a Periwinkle and this is the principall part of the outwarde eare made so large that it might receiue all the sound which runnes within both Circumferences, but the cauity thereof groweth narrower toward the hole of hearing, that the sound being ga∣thered into a narrower scantling might more suddainely and at once be offered vnto the Organ.

But the Cauity which is next vnto the hole of Hearing wherein the eare-wax is, is cald 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Aluearium, and the bitter waxe it selfe Aphrodisaeus calles 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. That eminence which is opposite to the hollownesse [Tab. 4. fig. 2. ^L. Tab. 5. Figure 1, ^c] toward the tem∣ples which hangeth like a pent-house ouer the hole of the eare is called by Ruffus and Pol∣lux 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Hyrcus the He-geate, because in this part there grow haires which in some men are so rigid and stiffe that they are like a Goats beard.

[illustration]

Tab. 5. sheweth the eares and the diuers internal parts thereof.

[illustration]

Figure 1. sheweth the whole externall eare, with a part of the Temple bone.

[illustration]

Figure 2. sheweth the left bone of the Temple diuided in the middest by the instrument of hearing, where about on eieher side there are certaine passages heere parti∣cularly described.

[illustration]

Fig. 3 & 4. Sheweth the three little Bones.

[illustration]

Fig. 5. sheweth a portion of the bone of the temples which is seene nere the hole of Hearing diuided through the middest, whereby the Nerues, Bones & Membrans may appeare as Vesalius conceyueth of them.

[illustration]

Fig. 6. sheweth the Vessels, Membranes, Bones & holes of the Organ of Hearing, as Platerus hath described thē.

[illustration]

Fig. 7. and 8. sheweth the little bones of the hearing of a man and of a Calfe both ioyned and separated.

[illustration]

Fig. 9. sheweth the Muscle found out by Aquapendens.

[illustration]

TABVLA. X.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

II.

[illustration]

III.

[illustration]

IIII.

[illustration]

V.

[illustration]

VI.

[illustration]

VII.

[illustration]

VIII.

[illustration]

IX.

• a. The lower eare or the lap of the eare.
• bb. The circumference of the eare cald in Greeke Helix.
• cc, the interior protuberation or swelling of the eare called Anthelix.
• d, The boate of the outward eare.
• e, the Goates beard called Tragus, wherein are haires growing.
• f, The place against the Goats heard called Anti∣tragus.

[illustration]

Figure 2.

• A. A part of the yoke bone.
• B. The sinus or bosome whereinto the lower iaw is articulated.
• CC, the stony bone swelling within the Scull.
• D. The second hole of the bone of the Temples for the passage of the 〈…〉〈…〉.
• E, A little scale or thin bone betwixte this hole and the first cauity.
• FFF, the porosity or spongines of the stony bone.
• aa, The externall hole of the eare.
• bb, The bony canale of that passage.
• c, the Tympane or Drumme is here placed at the passage.
• d, the interiour hole into which the nerue is in∣serted.
• ef. Heere also is the stony bone perforated.
• ggg. A canale of the auditory Nerue from e to g. in the bone of the Temple's, yet this Canale is described by itselfe at the side of the bone a∣boue the fift Figure.
• α, β, Two holes in the beginning and ending of this Canale.
• γ, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Two other holes in the externall and inter∣nall part.
• h. The first cauity, according to some the second, reaching from c to E.
• ii, two canals or pipes of the fyrst cauity.
• k, the higher hole which is shut with the stirrop∣bone
• l. The lower hole alwayes open.
• mm, The second cauity in the bone.
• 1, 2, 3. Three litle burrows or holes of the second cauity described apart.
• n, the third cauity lying vnder this superfycies.
• Fig: 3. 4. o 3. A long bone representing a pyrami∣dal Figure
• p 3, 4. the membrane of the drum.
• q 3, 4. A bony ring at the Tympane described also by it selfe. r, 4. the Mallet or hammer.
• s, The Anuile. t. the Stirrop. Figure 5.
• A, A part of the hole of hearing.
• B. A membrane couering the hole ouerthwart.
• C. The bone of hearing likened to a hammer.
• D, the auditory Nerue.
• G, His distribution through the great hole of hearing.
• E. A branch of this nerue going through a darke hole vnto the Temples.
• F. Another branch falling through the hole wher¦by a veine doth enter in.
• H, I. A round cauity in the fore-part whereof is placed, the bone noted with I. Fig. 6.
• αα The fyrst hole of the Organ of hearing.

β The auditory Nerue diuided into two partes, where it passeth through the fourth hole. γ the iugular vein with a part of a nerue passing through the first cauity. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, where it passeth through his second hole neere to 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 An artery entring that cauitie thorough the third hole, and a nerue falling through the same hole. H, the same artery falling through the fyft hole. ••, the lower part of the 5. nerue reaching vnto the 2 & 3. cauity. θθ, A higher part of the 5. nerue broght through the scruing canale or pipe vnto •• where it falleth out. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Tympane or Drum shutting the first cauity. Λ, the three little bones of hearing ioyned together. μ, the third cauity or the Trumpet of the or∣gan of hearing. V the second cauity or the mettall mine running out with three burroughs. ξ, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, The Canale or water course carrying a Nerue and an artery, opening it selfe with two holes. Figu: 7 & 8, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 The Hammer 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Anuile, τ, The Stirrop.

The part opposite hereto to which the lap grows somtimes is also haire, [Tab. 5. fig. 1. ^f.] & called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. The vse of both these is to forme the cauity and to hinder the sweat or a∣ny such like excrement or outward thing from falling into the eare. Betwixt these two there is a hollowed furrow like halfe a circle, which Herophilus calleth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and Pollux 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 into which the excrement or whatsoeuer issueth out of the eare falleth before it get into the large cauity and so fall away by the lap.

The vse of the whole outward Eare which like a Fanis dilated, was especially to in∣tercept the species of sounds wandering through the aire, and to gather them as it were in∣to a bosome, or if you will, into a broade tunnell to be conuayed by manifold breaches or returnes to the hole of the Eare. Againe, the many oblique furrowes in the outward Eare doe breake the violence & force of the ayre, which otherwise might haply loosen or break the fine membrane of the Tympane or drumme. There are also certaine bunching protu∣berations where the gristle swels vp into a prominence, which prominence, if the aire doe passe the hole of hearing, beats it backe againe forward toward the cauity. For because the holes of the Ears are placed in the sides of the head the sound may easily slip by them; especially when it commeth from behind vs and we moue forward, if it were not caught in these conuolutions ••nd in the guttures of the grystly substance conueyed vnto the hole of hearing.

And hence it is that euen by instinct of nature we see brute beasts, as Dogs and Horses will pricke vp their eares, and partly turne them toward any sound or noyse that is made. And because the Eare might be thus prominent, as well in the parts as in the whole (for the whole eare standeth of a certaine distance from the head,) Nature hath made them of a cartelaginious or gristly substance, which out of doubt wold grow farther from the head if Nurses or carefull mothers who haue more respect of comlinesse then of vse, did not bind them downe in our infancy.

If you aske me how the sound of any thing farre off can ariue vnto the eare; I will answer by a pregnant example on this manner: If a stone be throwne into the midst of a pond, it moueth the water in circles, one alwayes succeeding greater then another vntill the motion determine in the brinkes or bounds of the pond: so in like manner those bo∣dyes which by their collision do make a sound, mooue the ayre into orbes or circles succee∣ding one another, so that the circles which are nearest to the body from whence the sound came are but small, the rest which follow them grow greater and greater vntill they come vnto the eare, whereat when they beate they are latched in those furrowes wee spake of, and by them directed vnto the hole of hearing.

CHAP. XII. Of the parts of the outward Eares.

THis outward Eare is made of parts, some common, some proper: the com∣mon parts are the cuticle, the skin, the fleshy membrane, flesh itselfe and a little fat in the lobe or lap. The proper parts are muscles, veines, Arteries Nerues and a gristle.

The cuticle or skarfe-skin we haue spoken of before in the second book, as also of all the other cōmon parts; only of the skin itselfe in this part we may say, that it is exceeding thin, yet somewhat thicker in the gibbous or backeside of the eare then it is in the concauous or foreside, and the nearer it comes to the hole of hearing, the thinner it is. This skin compasseth the eare round about, both without and within, and cleaueth very strongly and firmely to a little flesh and to the gristle, that the superficies of the eare, espe∣cially the inner might be smooth and slicke, not corrugated or vnequall, as well for beauty and comelinesse as also for the better reception of sounds: for Aristotle in the seuerth Probleme of the eleuenth section, enquiring why a house that is new plastered doth sound better then an old house? answereth, that the reason is, because the wals are smooth, which smoothnesse procedeth from density or fastnesse. It is reasonable therefore to thinke that the smoothnesse of the eare helpeth the sound, and therefore the very hole also of hearing is inuested with a thight, hard, thin and smooth skin, which cleaueth very closely to the mē∣brane there vnder. But where the skin incompasseth the lobe or lap of the eare, it is so ex∣quisitely mixed with the membrane and the flesh that it cannot be separated from them; and therefore we may call that part a fleshy, fatty and spongy skin.

The vessels of the eare are these. Veines of the eare Hippocrates tooke knowledge of, in his first booke de natura haminis. Branches they are dispersed on either side [Tab. 4. fig. 1. DDD]

[illustration]

Table 6. Figure 1. Sheweth the fore-face of the out∣ward Eare without the skin.

[illustration]

Figure 2. sheweth a ligament of the outward Eare whereby it is tyed to the Skull.

[illustration]

Figure 3. The stony processe being broken sheweth the first cauity and the holes thereof.

[illustration]

Figure 4. & 5. shew the Labyrinth, the Snayly shell called Cochlea, two windowes and three semi∣circles.

[illustration]

TABVLA. VI.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

FIG. IV.

[illustration]

FIG. V.

[illustration]

Fig. 1. & 2.

• AA, The outward eare depressed.
• B, The hind part of the outward eare.
• CCC, The circumscription of the whole ligamēt.
• D, a part of the yoke bone.
• EEE, parts of the scull.

[illustration]

Fig. 3. 4. & 5.

• F 3, 4, 5, the Ouall hole or the window of the laby∣rinth, in the 4. figure it is broken.
• G 3, 4, The window of the snayly shell or the win∣ding hole.
• H 3, The watercourse or darke hole betwixt the mammillary processe and appendix called Styloi∣des.
• I 3, The Mammillary processe.
• K 3, The cauity going vnto the mammillary pro∣cesse whose outward face is all spongy.
• L 3. The interior face.
• M 3, The knub of the nowle-bone inarticulated or ioyned to the first rack-bone of the necke.
• V 3, The hole of the first payre of nerues of the in∣ternall Iugular veine. &c.
• NNN 4, 5, The semicircles.
• O 4, 5, The inner face of the snayly shell called co∣chlea.

from the externall Iugular as also from the lesser braunch of the internall Iugular veine which entreth into the Basis of the scull through the fourth hole of the Temporall∣bones. There is a small branch also directed to the Organ of Hearing and into the first ca∣uity [Tab. 3. lib. 7. fig. 13. ⁿ] which bringeth bloud for the nourishment of the parts contay∣ned, and haply also of the ingenite or in-bred ayre. And that there are veines deriued into this cauity, and vnto the membrane or drum, may be proued by the dissection of those bo∣dies that die of an inflamatiō of the brain or of the eares For if the hole of hearing be featly opned, you shall find small veines conspicuous in the mēbrane or Tympane, which do not appeare when there is no inflamation, as wee said lately it hapneth in the white of the eye.

Arteries it hath from the inner branch of the Carotis or sleepy Artery which passe to the backeside of the Eare [Tab. 13. Lib. 6. ^o] that those parts and the in-bred ayre also might be refreshed with vitall bloud and spirits.

Two small nerues it hath from the backeward, and two from the sides of the second coniugation of the marrow of the necke; and these are very small, sayeth Galen in the sixth Chapter of his 16. Booke de vsu partium, in Men and Apes, because their temporall mus∣cles bee very small, and the substance of their eares is immouable: but in other creatures

sayth he whose temporall muscles and eares are very large, these nerues also are large, be∣cause of the strength required to those motions. The vse of them in men is to bring Sense to the eares and sometimes to mooue the muscles, for those muscles are not alwayes found.

CHAP. XIII. Of the Muscles of the outward Eare.

MEns Eares are for the most part immouable, yet they may be moued, as appea∣reth as well by their muscles as also by the nerues which, as we said euen now, are founde in some bodies. But the muscles are so small and the nerues so threddy that their motion is hardly perceiued: and Nature made them small because too much motion would haue vitiated the hearing, and therefore the head is rather made to moue speedily on euery side toward the sound or voice, which is not so in beastes whose eares are mouable.

Such as they are Falopius first found them out; and therefore the honour of their In∣uention belongeth to him. They are of two sortes, Common and Proper.

The first is Common to the Eare and both the Lippes, and is a portion of that muscle which is accounted the first of those which moue the cheeks and the skinne of the face, and is called Quadratus. [Tabl 7. fig. 1 L] The square muscle, it is inserted with ascending fibres into the roote of the eare [table 6. fig. 1. O.]

[illustration]

Table 7. Fig. 1. Sheweth the muscles of the Fore∣head, the Eye-lids, and the Cheekes.

[illustration]

Figure 2. sheweth the muscles of the Nose, Lips, the lower Iaw and of the bone Hyois.

[illustration]

TABVLA. VII.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

• A 1, 2, The muscle of the forehead and the right fibres thereof.
• B 1, 2, The temporall muscle.
• 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 2, His semicircular originall.
• C E 1, the first muscle of the Eye-lidde compassing the whole lid.
• F D 1, the third muscle of the wing of the nose which endeth into the vpper lip.
• GH 1, the muscle of the vpper lip.
• G 2, The place of the yoke bone without flesh.
• Γ 1, the broad Mouse-muscle stretched ouer the cheeks and all the lower parts.
• 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the circumscription or circumference of this mus∣cle.
• I 1, the yoke-bone.
• I 2, The grinding muscle or the second muscle of the Iaw.
• The forward K in the second figure sheweth the high∣er gristle of the nose.
• L 2, the wing of the nose.
• M 2, a muscle forming the cheeks.
• N 2, the muscle of the lower lip.
• O 2, A part of the fift muscle of the lower iaw called Digastricus, that is, double bellied.
• P 2, the bone hyois is set in this place,
• Q R 2, The first muscle of the bone hyois growing to the Rough artery,
• S 2, the second muscle of the bone hyois vnder the chin
• The lower T in the second figure sheweth the third muscle of the bone hyois streatched to the iaw. The vpper T in the second figure sheweth the insertion of the seuenth muscle of the head.
• V V 2, two venters of the fourth muscle of the bone Hyois,
• The backward K (put in stead of X) sheweth the sea∣uenth muscle of the head and his insertion at the vp∣per T,
• 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 2, The originall of the grinding muscle from the yoke-bone,

μ 2 the insertion of this muscle into the lower iaw, ν 2 A small nerue running to the forehead out of the orbe of the eyes, π 2, a nerue propagated to the face, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 2, two beginnings of the seauenth muscle of the head. T 2, His insertion into the Mammillary processe. •• 2, The clauicle or the coller-bone. φ 2, A place where the vessels attayning to the head and the nerues of the arme do passe through.

The second is a proper muscle [Table 7. fig. 1. neare ^B Table 4. fig. 1. ^{B B} figu. 2. ^A] seated in the forepart vppon the temporall muscle, and ariseth from the vpper end of the muscle of the forehead, and is inserted into the vpper part of the eare.

The third [Table 7. fig. 1. neare O] ariseth from the nowle aboue the Mammillar pro∣cesse, where the muscles that moue the head and the shoulder-blade do end, and is implan∣ted on the backside of the eare.

The fourth proceedeth from the same Mammillary processe vnder the ligament of the gristle of the eare, and is inserted into the whole roote of the eares gristle. [Table 4 fig. 2. ^H.] One part of it aboue, another part in the middest, and the third below. The more exact description of these muscles we referre vnto the booke of muscles.

CHAP. XIIII. Of the Gristle of the Eare.

THe substance of the outward Eare is neither bony nor fleshy [the interior face of the Eare flayed is exhibited in the first Figure of the sixt Table] but of a middle na∣ture betwixt both, for if it had bene bony it must haue bene of a thinne bone or of a thick. If it had bene made of a thin bone, saith Aristotle in the ninth chapter of his second booke.

[illustration]

Table 6. Figure 1. Sheweth the fore-face of the out∣ward Eare without the skin.

[illustration]

Figure 2. sheweth a ligament of the outward Eare whereby it is tyed to the Skull.

[illustration]

Figure 3. The stony processe being broken sheweth the first cauity and the holes thereof.

[illustration]

Figure 4. & 5. shew the Labyrinth, the Snayly shell called Cochlea, two windowes and three semi∣circles.

[illustration]

TABVLA. VIII.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

FIG. IV.

[illustration]

FIG. V.

[illustration]

Fig. 1. & 2.

• AA, The outward eare depressed.
• B, The hind part of the outward eare.
• CCC, The circumscription of the whole ligamēt.
• D, a part of the yoke-bone.
• EEE, parts of the scull.

[illustration]

Fig. 3. 4. & 5.

• F 3, 4, 5, the Ouall hole or the window of the laby∣rinth, in the 4. figure it is broken.
• G 3, 4, The window of the snayly shell or the win∣ding hole.
• H 3, The watercourse or darke hole betwixt the mammillary processe and appendix called Styloi∣des.
• I 3, The Mammillary processe.
• K 3, The cauity going vnto the mammillary pro∣cesse whose outward face is all spongy.
• L 3. The interior face.
• M 3, The knub of the nowle-bone inarticulated or ioyned to the first rack-bone of the necke.
• V 3, The hole of the first payre of nerues of the in∣ternall Iugular veine. &c.
• NNN 4, 5, The semicircles.
• O 4, 5, The inner face of the snayly shell called co∣chlea.

de partibus Animalium, then would it easily haue bene broken. If it had beene made of a thicke and solide bone it would haue beene a burthen to the head, and beside would not haue yeelded to outward occurrents. Againe, if it had beene as soft as flesh it would haue fallen into itselfe and haue beene vtterly vnfit to haue made those cauityes, protuberati∣ons, furrowes and such like which in the eare are very necessary: neither would it haue re∣ceiued the sound which must be returned from a hard body, and so the ingresse of the aire would haue bene hindered.

It was made therefore of a substance moderately soft and moderately hard, that by reason of the softnesse it might be bent on euery side and giue way to the opposition of whatsoeuer doth light against it, that so it might neither be subiect to contusion nor brea∣king. Againe, the moderate hardnesse thereof makes it fitter to be stretched, to stand vp∣right, & to be alwayes open, that the ayre together with the sound might euermore gather into it; for saith Cicero in his 2. booke de natura Deorum, when we are a sleep we haue need of this sense that we might be waked. Moreouer, the hardnesse makes it fit to receiue the cauities and furrowes which are therein, and whereby the sounds are retayned that they passe not the hole of hearing. Yea whilest the sound runneth through those cauityes, Ari∣stotle saith, it gathereth strength, and by the refraction is after a sort modulated or tuned and so commeth more welcome to the Tympane.

Finally, because it is moderately hard it yeeldeth also a sound and so the voyce or noyse is better receiued, and as it were, formed without any eccho or singing, or other noise like the fall of waters which happeneth to those Scythians of whom wee made mention euen now, who when their eares are rotted off doe apply hollow shels of Scallops or such like behind the holes of their eares.

Wherefore it consisteth of one gristle [Tab. 4. fig 1.] and that flexible, couered ouer with a thin skin which cleaueth close vnto it. This gristle proceedeth as it were out of the tem∣ples and standeth a loofe from them more or lesse. For the first originall of this grystle is from the orbe [Tab. 3. lib. 7. fig 9. y.] of the hole of hearing which is boared in the temple bone, and exasperated or made rough in the circumference that the gristle might better a∣rise therfrom. At the very original it is thicker & harder; thicker that the root therof might be more firme; & harder because of the neighbourhood of the temple bone from whence it proceedeth; and by how much it standeth further of from the bone of the head by so much it becommeth the softer and the thinner.

This gristle is also tyed to the stony bone by a strong ligament [Tab. 8. fig. 2 CCC.] which arisieth with many propagations from the Pericranium where it tendeth toward the mammillary processe. These propagations when they haue attained to the eare, doe all ioyne into one ligament, which is inserted into the vpper and gibbous part of the eare, to suspend or hang the gristle streight vpward. This gristle is opposed or set against the hole of hearing that the passage thereof might be larger and more extended into the hol∣lownesse of the gristle, by which meanes the sound is as it were scouped vp.

CHAP. XV. Of the inward Eare.

THe inward Eare hath many parts, fiue holes or passages, three small dennes, small bones as many; the Membrane or head of the drum called Tympanum; two Muskles; a Nerue from the fourth and fifth coniugations: a veine & an Artery and the Inbred Ayre. All which are contayned in one bone called Os petrosum, or the stony bone, whose description we will here prosecute at large, because of the bones of hearing therein contained, and make but slender mention thereof in our booke of Bones.

This stony bone so called, saith Vessalius, because it is like a rugged rocke, [Tab. 3. lib. 7. fig. 9. s. ae.] is the third and interior processe of the Temple bone running along obliquely forward from the hole of the eare, betwixt the Mammillary processe and the processe of the yoke bone, and buncheth out in the inner basis of the skull, [Tab. 9. fig. 2. from a. F to∣ward C. and beyond] betwixt the wedge bone and the nowle bone, so that it is much more conspicuous in the inside of the skull then it is on the outside. This processe is som∣wear round, the better to containe a greater quantity of Inbred aire: long also somewhat like the ridge of a rocke, and that because the nerue of hearing (which is the softest of all nerues except the Opticks) might run his long course from the braine without danger of breaking.

VVherefore the production of this bone is inward to receiue the nerue as soon as it yssueth out of the Cerebellum or After-brane. Another reason why this production is lengthned, is because it might make a fit channell or furrow wherein to carry a braunch of the Iugular veine or sleepy artery to the braine.

But there where it yssueth out of the Temple-bone it is broader and thicker, that those turnings and cauities which were necessary for the Sense of Hearing might be better insculped or wrought therin; yet as it proceedeth forward it endeth by degrees into a sharp Cone or point where the veine or artery entreth into the brain, and so the whole processe is like a Pyramis or spire. [Tab. 9. fig. 3. 0.

This bone is exceeding hard for the security of the Organ of Hearing, and harder in∣deed then any bone of the body, whereupon it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Petrosum or Lapidosum, the Rocky or Stonybone. Some vse to cal the temple-bones Lapidosa, & they call this bone the interior processe of the stony-bone. In Infants it is called Os labyrinthi, the bone of the Laby∣rinth, in whome it is separated from the temple bones (as also in a Calues head it will easi∣ly fall from them when it is sodden) and wanteth the halfe of that passage, which maketh the hole of Hearing in growne bodies. For this hole in Infants is altogither gristly and in dissec∣tions found distinct from the rocky bone: and therefore because it is without that passage we may in Infants perceiue without breaking the bone, the Timpane as wel the membrane or head of it, as also the bony circle to which the membrane is fastned: but as the body in∣creaseth and the gristly parts grow drie, they turne into bones euen the hole of hearing it selfe; and so the rocky bone groweth very fast to the scaly part of the Temple bone vnder which it lieth, and becommeth as it were a processe thereof.

In describing this bone, we must consider his outside and his inside. His outside as it appeareth either within the scull or without the scull. The outside within the cauity of the scull is couered ouer with a hard & strong crust, as hard as is the substance of the teeth. The superficies thereof is smooth, not rough as it is without the scull but yet vnequall; be∣cause in the middle of the length thereof it buncheth out by reason of the bones of Hearing which in that place are contained; [Table 9. figure 2. betwixtⁿ and the lower^•] so also in the vpper part there runneth a sharpe and rough line through his length, whereby it is diui∣ded into two sides, and forward it endeth into a rough sharpnesse [Table 9. figure 2. from^F toward^d.]

It hath many perforations that the ayre hauing receiued as it were the stampe or im∣pression of sounds might passe through them vnto the instrument of Hearing. These per∣forations are of two sorts, some within the scull some without: within the scull there are two; one is a large and patent hole in the face of the processe which looketh backeward, [Table 4. lib. 7. fig. 10. ^a Tab. 9. fig. 2. from^d to^l] and this hole reacheth obliquely outward almost to the very middest of the processe: it is smooth and round in the ingresse, but dila∣ted afterward by degrees as it were into two parts, whereinto the nerue of Hearing is im∣planted. This hole Platerus accounteth to be the sixt of the Temple bones, and the fourth hole of Hearing. But we shall account it for the seauenth hole of the Temples.

This cauity in the bones of Children is shorter, and beareth the forme of a hollowed denne or of a porch. But in grown men when the bone is increased that forme perisheth and it receiueth the figure of a fistulated hole or winding burrough; presently after the in∣gresse of which burrough (as may be perceiued in the scul without dissection) may be foūd two holes in the bottome of the entrance which goe into two bosomes or pipes, the one vpward the other downward [Tab 9. fig. 2. ^ef] into which the nerue is deuided and through them conuayed. The one hole or pipe is higher and runneth more manifestly toward the vpper part of the hole of Hearing, passing obliquely outward to the inner part of the pro∣cesse, and so into that canale or pipe which is called Aquaeductus or the VVater-course. [ta. 8. fig. 3. ^H]

It is distinguished or parted from the second and third cauities onely by a thinne scale, and leadeth along the greater part of the nerue [Table 9. fig. 2. ^e] of which we shall speake in the first cauity.

The other hole or pipe is lower and lesser, sometimes single sometimes double, ap∣pearing in the inside of the passage, and leading a long smal surcles of the nerue into the se∣cond and third cauities. [Tab. 9. fig. 2. ^f]

The other hole of the Stony bone within the scull which Platerus calleth the seauenth hole of the Temples and the fift of Hearing, [Table 9. figu. 2. Γ] is in the foreside of the pro∣cesse,

[illustration]

Tab. 10. sheweth the eares and the diuers internal parts thereof.

[illustration]

Figure 1. sheweth the whole externall eare, with a part of the Temple bone.

[illustration]

Figure 2. sheweth the left bone of the Temple diuided in the middest by the instrument of hearing, whereabout on eicher side there are certaine passages heere parti∣cularly described.

[illustration]

Fig. 3 & 4. Sheweth the three little Bones.

[illustration]

Fig. 5. sheweth a portion of the bone of the temples which is seene nere the hole of Hearing diuided through the middest, whereby the Nerues, Bones & Membrans may appeare as Vesalius conceyueth of them.

[illustration]

Fig. 6. sheweth the Vessels, Membranes, Bones & holes of the Organ of Hearing, as Platerus hath described thē. Fig. 7, and 8. sheweth the little bones of the hearing of a man and of a Calfe both ioyned and separated.

[illustration]

Fig. 9. v sheweth the Muscle found out by Aquapendens.

[illustration]

TABVLA. X.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

II.

[illustration]

III.

[illustration]

V.

[illustration]

VI.

[illustration]

VII.

[illustration]

VIII.

[illustration]

IX.

• a. The lower eare or the lap of the eare.
• bb. The circumference of the eare cald in Greeke Helix.
• cc, the interior protuberation or swelling of the eare called Anthelix.
• d, The boate of the outward eare.
• e, the Goates beard called Tragus, wherein are haires growing.
• f, The place against the Goats beard called Anti∣tragus. Figure 2.
• A. A part of the yoke bone.
• B. The sinus or bosome whereinto the lower iaw is articulated.
• CC, the stony bone swelling within the Scull.
• D. The second hole of the bone of the Temples for the passage of the sleepy Artery.
• E, A little scale or thin bone betwixte this hole and the first cauity.
• FFF, the porosity or spongines of the stony bone.
• aa, The externall hole of the eare.
• bb, The bony canale of that passage.
• c, the Tympane or Drumme is here placed at the passage.
• d, the interiour hole into which the nerue is in∣serted.
• ef. Heere also is the stony bone perforated.
• ggg. A canale of the auditory Nerue from e to g. in the bone of the Temples, yet this Canale is described by it selfe at the side of the bone a∣boue the fift Figure.
• α, β, Two holes in the beginning and ending of this Canale.
• 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Two other holes in the externall and inter∣nall part.
• h. The first cauity, according to some the second, reaching from c to E.
• ii, two canals or pipes of the fyrst cauity.
• k. the higher hole which is shut with the stirrop∣bones
• l. The lower hole alwayes open.
• mm, The second cauity in the bone.
• 1, 2, 3. Three litle burrows or holes of the second cauity described apart.
• n, the third cauity lying vnder this supersycies.
• Fig: 3. 4. o 3. A long bone representing a pyrami∣dal Figure
• p 3, 4. the membrane of the drum.
• q 3, 4. A bony ring at the Tympane described also by it selfe. r, 4. the Mallet or hammer.
• s, The Anuile. t. the Stirrop. Figure 5.
• A, A part of the hole of hearing.
• B. A membrane couering the hole ouerthwart.
• C. The bone of hearing likened to a hammer.
• D, the auditory Nerue.
• G, His distribution through the great hole of hearing.
• E. A branch of this nerue going through a darke hole vnto the Temples.
• F. Another branch falling through the hole wher by a veine doth enter in.
• H, I. A round cauity in the fore-part whereof is placed, the bone noted with I. Fig. 6.
• αα The fyrst hole of the Organ of hearing.
• —β I he auditory Nerue diuided into two partes, where it passeth through the fourth hole. γ the iugular vein with a part of a nerue passing through the first cauity. ♌, where it passeth through his second hole neere to ♌. εε An artery entring that cauitie thorough the third hole, and a nerue falling through the same hole. H, the same artery falling through the syft hole. ••; the lower part of the 5. nerue reaching vnto the 2 & 3. cauity. θθ, A higher part of the 5. nerue broght through the scruing canale or pipe vnto ε where it falleth out. χ, the Tympane or Drum shutting the first cauity. Λ, the three little bones of hearing ioyned together. μ, the third cauity or the Trumper of the or∣gan of hearing. V the second cauity or the mettall mine running out with three burroughs. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, The Canale or water course carrying a Nerue and an artery, opening it selfe with two holes. Figu: 7 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 The Hammer σ, the Anuile, τ, The Stirrop.

narrow and rough like a ragged cleft through which a small artery passeth from the Organe of hearing vnto the scull: we will account this hole for the eight of the Temple bones.

The holes of the stony bone without the scull are three. The first (which we account for the first hole of the Temples runs into the hole of hearing, [Tab. 3. lib. 7. fig. 9. γ. Tab 9. fig. 2. aa.] which is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 meatus auditorius. This hole, because of the gristle which is extended and stretched about the beginning thereof, hath a large and ample ori∣fice resembling a caue or den, and it runneth betwixt the mammillarye processe, & a part of the Iugall or yoke bone.

In yong children, saith Coiter, it is all gristly, in those that are growne it is but halfe gristly and halfe bony. The gristly part groweth out of the gristle of the eare: the bonie out the bony circle of the Temple bone. For in the first conformation it is like a bony ring distinguished from the Temple bone by a cartilage comming betweene them, from which cartilage ariseth the membrane of the Tympane or head of the drumme: and this may be perceiued in the skuls of infants new borne till they bee sixe or seuen months old if they be boyled; but afterwards this gristle is dryed vp & vtterly obliterated & the bony ring or circle, of which we shall speake in the next chapter, is no more distinguished from the hole of hearing but vnited to the rest of the bone and streigthned a little, making a long & round bony canal or pipe [Tab. 9. fig. 2. ll.] wherein to receiue a greater quantity of ayre, & also that the passage might more patent and open vnto any sound: which canall runneth inward to the head of the drumme, [Tab. 9. fig. 2. from e to c.] and that obliquely vpward, or if you will describe the progresse thereof from within foorth, then say, that it slopeth a little downeward, and from behind runneth something obliquely forward into the out∣ward eare, where it becommeth somewhat more ample and large.

This passage therefore is oblique and winding to breake the vehement appulsion, or rushing in of cold ayre, that it should not dissolue the harmony of the Tympane and nerue of hearing. Againe, that a strong sound before it affect the Tympane might be comunica∣ted to the internall ayre to & the nerue; or be broken and so touch the membrane gently & without violence, for a slope blow offendeth lesse then that which commeth in a streight line, and yet for all this we see often times that the noyse of great Ordinance or of Bels, if a man be in the steeple, yea an intollerable cold ayer doe affect the Eare with paine and do∣lour; somtimes also breake the Tympane from whence deafnesse followeth.

This passage also runneth obliquely from behind forward and vpward, lest those things that fall outwardly vpon the eare should easily be admitted into the cauity, as also if any thing haue by chance insinuated it selfe that it might with greater facility fall forth againe. It is by degrees streigthned or becommeth narrow; first that the ayer being beaten might be gathered into a narrow compasse, by which our hearing is farre more distinct. Againe, that if any small creatures should get into the entrance of the cauity, yet the streightnesse thereof in the bottome might stay their course or returne them backe againe.

The like also we may say of crummes, of pease, or of any such thing that should happen to fall into the eare. There is also in this place a bilious viscide and bitter humor wher∣with, saith Cicero in 2. booke de natura Deorum, as with lime such creatures are intangled. Wherefore also there are haires growing in those particles of the eare which before we called Tragus and Antitragus resembling the beard of a Goate.

This hole also is solide and hard, for by that meanes the sound in the passage beeing stronglyer beaten against the bony or hard sides of the passage is so much the more inten∣tended then if it had bene more membranous or soft. It is also inuested or couered with skin, partly to breake the sound which would haue bene more vehement if it had beaten a∣gainst a naked bone: partly also lest the bone should haue bene corrupted or tainted by the ayer: wherefore it is hard, thicke, polished and strongly ioyned to the bone.

Finally, this passage in the beginning and the end hath certaine circles, the outward of which is rough, [Tab. 9. fig. 2. ^b.] because of the gristle of the eare which groweth therto: to the inner circle the small membrane of the Tympane or the drumme-head is stretched and tyed. [Tab. 9. fig. 2. ^c.]

The primary vse of this hole or passage is, that the ayer altered by the sound, might through it be deriued vnto the eare, and so through the concauity thereof might insinuate it selfe from the backepart obliquely forward to the membrane of the Tympane; for through narrow, concauous, smooth and hard passages sounds, are commonly carryed, not

onely with more ease, but also do more exquisitely represent the nature of the sound. And this shall bee easily perceiue that will strike a trunke very gently at one end, so that he that standeth by him may not heare it; and yet if a man lay his eare to the back end of the trunk he shall easily heare how often the fore end is striken; because in the trunke as in a narrow place the ayre is condensed and by that meanes the sound vnited and sharpned: whereasif the ayre that is beaten by the sounding body shall passe thorough a large place, it will bee diffused and dissipated and loose much of his strength.

The secondary vse of this hole of hearing is for the expurgation of the chollericke ex∣crement of the brain, (for phlegme is rarely purged this way because of his thicknes) which through the veines attaineth to the membrane of the Tympane and thorough it sweateth into the hole of Hearing. In this hole also we finde a muscle of which we shall speake af∣terward.

There is another hole which we account to be the third hole of the Temple-bone [ta. 3. li. 7. fig. 9. V] scituated neare the first hole of the wedge-bone, and is a great deale narro∣wer then the former. It is oblique, short and double, and admitteth a braunch of the Iu∣gular veine; emitteth also or sendeth out a small branch of the nerue of Hearing.

CHAP. XVI. Of the Canale out of the Eare into the mouth.

THe third outward hole of the Stony-bone which we account for the fift hole of the Temple-bone [Table 3. lib. 7. fig. 9. ♌] is scituated betwixt the Mammil∣lary processe and the appendixe called Styloides, and endeth into a hole of canale which passeth from the eare into the mouth. Of this passage Aristotle made mention, but Eustachius was the first that described it, and after him Vol∣cherus Coiter. This hole or passage is like a round pipe or small quill, larger in the begin∣ning and passeth obliquely to the inward and foreside of the Basis of the braine, and in the middest of foure holes it penetrateth the whole bone where it is encreased by a substaunce that is partly gristly and partly membranous. But before wee prosecute this passage fur∣ther, we will shew you those foure holes in the middest of which this passage thorough the bone is.

The first therefore is on the backeside where the sleepy artery entreth into the scull. The second is on the foreside through which the fourth coniugation of nerues yssueth out of the scull. The third at the outside making way for the artery which is to be distributed in to the Durameninx. The fourth at the inside is a fissure made of the extremities of the wedge and stony bones, passing obliquely downeward and forward. And in the very mid∣dest of these perforations doth this cauity pierce through the bone.

Now to return vnto the substance. VVe sayd before that it was partly gristly partly mem∣branous. For at the last of the 4 holes or the fissure which is common to the wedge and the Tēplebones the substance of it is gristly and very thick. But on the opposite part it is not ex∣actly gristly but as it were membranous & becommeth thinner. This canale thus encreased with substance of another kinde passeth between two muscles of the throate as the sorena∣med fissure passeth & neare the root of those processes which we likened to Bats wings, on the inside, I say, of them it determineth into one of the cauities of the nostrils, & is inserted into the thicke coate of the Palat neare the roote of the Vuula. But the inward extremity or end of this passage where it respecteth the middle cauity of the nostrilles becommeth a strong gristle bunching or swelling much outward, which is couered with the mucous or slimy coate of the nose, and set as a Porter to keep the end or outlet of the passage.

The figure of it is not round but a little depressed making 2 angles, the hollownes there∣of is much about the proportion of a goose quill, yet so that it is twice as broad in the ende as it is in the beginning, and is likewise couered with a mucous coate, but that thin.

It was made gristly that the way might be alwayes open and that it should not hurt the neighbour parts with his hardnesse, but easily yeeld without danger of breaking. Moreo∣uer, it was couered with a mucous or slimy coate, which Laurentius compareth to a value such as groweth within the veines as we shall vnderstand hereafter: the vse of which coate is to couer the orifice of this passage within the mouth, that euill vapours might not ex∣hale out of the mouth into the eares. The termination of this passage is on both sides common to the nosethrilles, the pallate and the canale it selfe, that by this meanes the mouth might be a fit receptacle for all the kindes of excrements of the braine; and (which sheweth the wonderfull prouidence and wisedome of Nature or rather of the God therof)

the very end of it is where the muscle of the Chops is scituate; that so when vpon our swal∣lowing the chops are dilated or opened by the muscle, this passage also is recluded or ope∣ned to giue way to the descending excrement.

The chiefe vse therefore of this passage is for expurgation, to leade along the superflu∣ities that fall from the heade, by the eare into the mouth, as also to purge and depurate that aire which is implanted in the instrument of hearing; for it was necessary that many excrements should in this place be gathered together, because the Braine lyeth aboue it which yeeldeth much excrement: and we may well conceiue that many of those Ex∣crements are gathered together about the eare, by the quantity that issueth sometimes outward through the hole of hearing.

An honest man of good credit tolde me that hee had beene deafe three or foure yeares, at length his eare was cleansed by one that professed some skill in curing deafe∣nesse, and that in two daies he drew out of his eare the quantitie of two great Wall-nut shels ful of wax, and that therupon he instantly recouered his hearing againe. If therfore there were so manie thinne excrements which could sweate through the fast membrane of the Tympane, what a multitude shall wee imagine may lurke within, which for their thicknesse cannot possibly sweate through?

Aquapendens also testifieth, that he hath often obserued these inward cauities especi∣allie in children to be full of a thicke humour, slimy and mucous, which ought to haue bene purged away by this canale or passage: otherwise if it stay within, either it altoge∣ther stoppeth vp the eare, or else being resolued by inward heat is conuerted into wind, from whence come those singing noises and murmurs of the eares and consequentlie the deprauation or vtter amission and losse of hearing.

Hence therefore we may obserue, that in inward offences of the eares, it is a very rea∣sonable course for the Physitian to prescribe Masticatories, beecause the waies are open, either for nature to expell being prouoked, or for the medicine to draw euen crasse and thicke matter by this way into the mouth. Beside by this meanes the passage shalbe kept drie, and the drier it is the more fit to receiue sounds. And hence it is, that Hippocrates in the 17. Aphorisme of the third Section saith, that the North winde because it is drie makes a man heare the better, and on the contrarie, the South-winde which is moyst duls and offends the eare.

Another vse of this Canale is for the behoofe of the In-bred aire of the eare: first, to purge it and make it clearer, drier and thinner: againe to restore it and refresh it; for it is not to be doubted but that new aire is supplied out of the mouth by this passage. For considering that the Ingenit ayre is perpetuallie wasted by the inbred heate, it is agreea∣ble to the wisedome of Nature that it shoulde bee supplied by a regeneration of newe aire which must be made of externall aire, because the ingenite aire was at the first made of externall. Furthermore, that the aire doth passe out of the mouth into the ears, we are taught both by Aristotle in the cleauenth chapter of the first booke of his Historie of Creatures and also by experience, because when a man yawneth wide hee cannot heare what is spoken, and beside he perceiueth a noise in his eares. In like manner, when a man blowes his nose or with anie force conteines his breath, hee shall euer perceiue that the aire entereth into his eares, and with a certaine perturbation whereby the implanted aire is disturbed, because it is a drift not without some violence or constraint; but vvhen the aire insinuateth it selfe of it owne accord for the refection of that which is bredde in the eare, then is the motion gentle so that we do not perceiue it. And beside the length of the passage prepareth and fitteth the newe aire for the refection and nourishment of the old. We may also imagine that by reason of this passage Alcmaeon of whome A∣ristotle maketh mention in the place aboue quoted, did thinke that Goates drew their breath not onely by their mouths and by their Nosethrils, but also by their eares, which we haue no great Reason to thinke strange, because we see that cunning Tobacconistes (a generation of new and addle Artists) can driue the smoake out of their mouthes tho∣rough their eare.

A third vse of this canale is, that if it happen the sound cannot directly passe vnto the Nerue of Hearing by the hole of the eare, that then at least some of it might this waie through the mouth be conueyed vnto the organ of Hearing, and so those that are deafe by outward accident might receyue the sound or voice by their mouths. And this wee may verie well discerne by the receipt of the sound of a Musicall instrument. For if a man

stoppe both his eares verie close and hold a wand in his mouth, the other end whereof doth touch any instrument that is plaide vpon, he that so holdeth the wand in his mouth shall be able to discerne the Musicke. In like manner if in the night time you be desirous to know whether any man be comming toward you, set a staffe vpon the ground or but a sword, and hold the end or pommell betwixt your teeth, and you shall heare a great way further off then your outward eare will bee able to discerne especially if the waie be stonie.

A fourth vse of this canale is, that in a vehement and violent noyse such as the shooting of ordenance, thunder & such like is, the membrane of the Tympane or head of the drum might be secured from breaking, for surely it would be in great danger to breake if the In∣bred aire had no passage out. For when this Inbred ayre is mooued if it could not retire backeward, it must presse the membrane outward toward the eare, and the outward ayre we know forceth it inward, by which two contrary inforcements it could not but be endan∣gered, whereas now the inbred ayre hauing an out-let into which it may retyre, it leaueth the membrane scope and roome to yeeld to the impulsion of the outward ayre.

He that would find this passage must take a dryed skull and put a hogs bristle into the hole of hearing, and he shall perceiue that it will issue out again in the palat of the mouth. But in a greene head the holes of this canale are very conspicuous in the same palate. And thus much of the canale which runneth from the eare vnto the mouth, as also of the exter∣nall part of the stony bone within the skull with the processe and holes that belong vn∣to it.

The other part of the exterior superficies of this stony processe or rocky bone without the skul is diuersly exasperated and made vnequall with knubs, bosoms or cauities, posrosities or small holes and lines running in it. So that the ancients did rightly compare it to a craggy rocke. The vse of which inequalities is that from them the muskles might better arise and into them be better inserted.

This bone also hath belonging vnto it a processe and an Appendix. The processe is somewhat thicke, and because it resembleth the tears of a womans dug it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 mammillaris. [Tab. 3. lib. 7. fig 8. M. fig. 9. K.] This processe is not found in infants, but ariseth afterward. The appendix is slender, long and sharpe, and therefore called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Coi•••• calleth it Os sagittale, os clauale, os acuale; from the resemblance it hath with an arrow, with a nayle, or with a needle. It is also called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because it is like a spurre. [Tab. 3. lib. 7. fig. 9. ii.] This appendix in infants new borne is gristly, but afterward becommeth bony when the bones grow and the gristles are dryed; yet for the most part as it is in other ap∣pendices there remaineth in it some remembrance of a gristle. But of these we shall spea••e more at large in our discourse of the bones of the head. In the meane time thus much shal suffise to haue sayd concerning the externall superficies of this stony processe of the Tem∣ple bones or of the rocky bone whether you will, as well within the skull as without.

On the inside this stony bone is not solide, the reason was, that it should not bee too heauy, but thrilled and perforated with infinite holes, dens and scrued passages, [Tab. 18. lib. 7. fig. 2. ag, 3. 2. m n E i.] and in a word, the greatest part of it is a very sponge wher∣in the implanted or inbred ayre is laboured or perfected. But in the middest of it there are three notable cauities formed, especially to help our hearing; the smal partitions of which cauities, although they be very thin because the bone should be light, yet are they very fast and strong bones. But because the membrane of the Tympane or head of the drumme is interposed betwixt the hole of hearing and the first of these cauities, we will intreat of the Tympane before we come vnto the cauitie.

CHAP. XVII. Of the Membrane of the Tympane or head of the Drumme.

THe Membrane of the Tympane which Hippocrates first of al men, in his book de earnibus, made mention of vnder the name of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, of a skin in the hole of hearing, is called by Aristotle in the 83. text of his second booke de anima 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Galen in the sixth chapter of his eight booke de vsu partium, calleth it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, a lid, and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, a couering. Some call it Tym∣panum, because it is stretched ouer the first cauity as a peece of Vellam ouer the head of a Drumme, or because as a Drumme being beaten with a sticke maketh a great sound, so this membrane being beaten vppon by the ayre, communicateth this sound vnto the

nerue of sense. But it may most properly bee called not the Tympane or drumme, but the membrane or head of the drumme, because it is stretched vpon the bony circle wee shall speake of afterward and receiuing the impression of the sound returneth the same a∣gaine vnto the sense. [Tab. 10. fig 3. and 4. p. Tab. 11. d.] It is scituated betwixt the hole of hearing, at whose inward end it is set, and the first cauity of the inside of the stony bone, which cauity we properly call Tympanum. It is extended ouer the cauity obliquely forward and vpward, as if a man should couer the sloping cut of a writing pen with a filme: and the reason of this scituation is, because it might more directly respect the first cauity which is somewhat higher then the hole of hearing. Againe, that the violence of the ayre, of water or of any such like that might by accident fall into the eare, should not directly or by a right line attaine vnto the membrane to offer it violence.

The figure of it is round [Tab. 10. fig, 6. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Tab. 11. d:] curued a little inward in the midst like that herbe which we call Pennigrasse or Venus nauell, the better to receiue the sound which commeth from without, because that which is concauous or hollow doth more perfectly, and fully receiue the sound.

Concerning the substance and originall of this membrane, there are almost as many o∣pinions as there be writers. Some think it ariseth from the Brain, some frō the dura meninx, some from the periostium, some from the pericranium, some from the nerues of the fift con∣iugation, some from the Pia mater. But if it may bee lawfull for vs to interpose our opi∣nion, we perswade our selues, saith Bauhine, that it ariseth from the seede it selfe, as beeing generated in the first conformation as we sayd before the membrane of the Cristalline hu∣mour was generated; and the reason that perswadeth vs thereto, is, because the very sub∣stance of it differs from the substance of the other membranes in the body. But if this o∣pinion should not please, we next of all incline to them who produce it from the periostium because if you dissect the head of an infant, you shall finde this membrane to cleaue to the periostium, [Tab. 11. kk.] where it couereth the scaly bone and the neighbour parts: as also that at the hole of hearing the periostium is dilated, where there breaketh or riseth out of the stony bone a little oblique and round processe much like a quill, when the first oblique incision is made in it toward the framing of a pen, which processe was ordayned that this membrane might be connected with the stony bone.

This processe is called the ring or the bony circle [Tab. 10. fig. 3. *. Tab. 11. e.] out of whose circumference the hole of hearing beginneth. This processe hath a double origi∣nall [Tab. 11. n.] the lower groweth out of the scaly bone and resembleth a knub or knot, which bending a little obliquely inward is placed before the doore or entrance of the first cauity, where on the inside it hath a round furrow, or is lightly excauated in the middest round about the circumference with two bony brims or edges swelling out on either side, in which furrow the membrane groweth very fast round about, that it might bee secu∣red frō the violent motions either of the external Ayre entring in, or the internal ayre bea∣ting outward, as it happeneth in oscitations or yawnings when wee hold our breath long, or when we blow our Noses.

Wherefore it is most like that circle in a Drumme to which the Vellam is fastened. [Tab. 10. fig. 3. & 4. q. Tab. 11. d.] And this bony ring in infants is easily separated from the Temple bone, but in growne bodyes it is so close ioyned on one side to the stony bone on the other side to the hole of hearing, that a man would not thinke it had beene euer separated from them: neither indeed can it bee separated in growne bodyes without brea∣king. Yet the furrow remaineth still to be seene. And thus the membrane of the Tympane seemeth to be separated in the circumference from the Pericranium. But let vs heare what Galen can say of this membrane.

Galen inquiring into the substance of this membrane, and instituting a comparison betwixt the couering or coate of the Opticke and the first nerue of hearing, and afterward of the instrument of smelling, sheweth; That it was not fit these Nerues should be left naked, because then they would haue bene exposed to all outward iuiuries. Seeing then they needed a co∣uering, either it must be crasse and thight as that of the eye; or rare & porous, or in a meane be∣twixt both. It behooued not it should bee crasse and thight, because such a couering would haue hindered the accesse of the Ayre when it was mooued, especially if the motion were but easie, as it is when we speake ordinarily one to another. Neither ought it to haue beene rare and porous, for then the Ayre would haue peirced through it and so the nerues should easily haue bene offended and the Braine it selfe refrigerated.

[illustration]

Tab. 10. sheweth the eares and the diuers internal parts thereof.

[illustration]

Figure 1. sheweth the whole externall eare, with a part of the Temple bone.

[illustration]

Figure 2. sheweth the left bone of the Temple diuided in the middest by the instrument of hearing, where about on either side there are certaine passages heere parti∣cularly described.

[illustration]

Fig. 3 & 4. Sheweth the three little Bones.

[illustration]

Fig. 5. sheweth a portion of the bone of the temples which is seene nere the hole of Hearing diuided through the middest, whereby the Nerues, Bones & Membrans may appeare as Vesalius conceyueth of them.

[illustration]

Fig. 6. sheweth the Vessels, Membranes, Bones & holes of the Organ of Hearing, as Platerus hath described thē.

[illustration]

Fig. 7, and 8. sheweth the little bones of the hearing of a man and of a Calfe both ioyned and separated.

[illustration]

Fig. 9. sheweth the Muscle found out by Aquapendens.

[illustration]

TABVLA. X.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

III.

[illustration]

II.

[illustration]

V.

[illustration]

VII.

[illustration]

VI.

[illustration]

IX.

[illustration]

VIII.

• a. The lower eare or the lap of the eare.
• bb. The circumference of the eare cald in Greeke Helix.
• cc, the interior protuberation or swelling of the eare called Anthelix.
• d, The boate of the outward eare.
• e, the Goates beard called Tragus, wherein are haires growing.
• f, The place against the Goats beard called Anti∣tragus. Figure 2.
• A. A part of the yoke bone.
• B. The sinus or bosome whereinto the lower iaw is articulated.
• CC, the stony bone swelling within the Scull.
• D. The second hole of the bone of the Temples for the passage of the sleepy Artery.
• E, A little scale or thin bone betwixt this hole and the first cauity.
• FFF, the porosity or spongines of the stony bone.
• aa, The externall hole of the eare.
• bb, The bony canale of that passage.
• c, the Tympane or Drumme is here placed at the passage.
• d, the interiour hole into which the nerue is in∣serted.
• ef. Heere also is the stony bone perforated.
• ggg. A canale of the auditory Nerue from e to g. in the bone of the Temples, yet this Canale is described by it selfe at the side of the bone a∣boue the fift Figure.
• α, β, Two holes in the beginning and ending of this Canale.
• γ, ♌. Two other holes in the externall and inter∣nall part.
• h. The first cauity, according to some the second, reaching from c to E.
• ii, two canals or pipes of the first cauity.
• k, the higher hole which is shut with the stirrop∣bone
• l. The lower hole alwayes open.
• mm, The second cauity in the bone.
• 1, 2, 3. Three litle burrows or holes of the second cauity described apart.
• n, the third cauity lying vnder this superficies.
• Fig: 3. 4. o 3. A long bone representing a pyrami∣dal Figure
• p 3, 4. the membrane of the drum.
• q 3, 4. A bony ring at the Tympane described also by it selfe. r, 4. the Mallet or hammer.
• s, The Anuile. t. the Stirrop. Figure 5.
• A, A part of the hole of hearing.
• B. A membrane couering the hole ouerthwart.
• C. The bone of hearing likened to a hammer.
• D. the auditory Nerue.
• G, His distribution through the great hole of hearing.
• E. A branch of this nerue going through a darke hole vnto the Temples.
• F. Another branch falling through the hole wher by a veine doth enter in.
• H, I. A round cauity in the fore-part whereof is placed, the bone noted with I. Fig. 6.
• αα The fyrst hole of the Organ of hearing.

β The auditory Nerue diuided into two partes, where it passeth through the fourth hole. γ the iugular vein with a part of a nerue passing through the first cauity. ♌, where it passeth through his second hole neere to ♌. εε An artery entring that cauitie thorough the third hole, and a nerue falling through the same hole. H, the same artery falling through the fift hole. u, the lower part of the 5. nerue reaching vnto the 2 & 3. cauity. θθ, A higher part of the 5. nerue broght through the scruing canale or pipe vnto θ where it falleth out. x, the Tympane or Drum shutting the first cauity. λ, the three little bones of hearing ioyned together. μ, the third cauity or the Trumpet of the or∣gan of hearing. V the second cauity or the mettall mine running out with three burroughs. ξ, π, Th•• Canale or watercourse carrying a Nerue and an artery, opening it selfe with two holes. Figu: 7 & 8, •• The Hammer σ, the Anuile, τ, The Stirrop.

Wherefore Nature framed a Muniment or defence, to helpe the security of the Instrument, of a moderate Consistence. And thus hee concludeth: Nature therefore foreseeing that if shee had made the construction of that Nerue with a strong Maniment, it would indeede haue beene fitte to beare off offences: but the Instrument of the Sense must of necessity haue beene Deafe. A∣gaine, if the construction of the Nerue had had no defence, it would haue beene very subiect to outward iniuries: and therefore shee tooke a way betwixt them both, and made for the construc∣tion of this Nerue a helpe, neither too stiffe to hinder the Sense of Hearing: nor too rare, that the ayre should penetrate through it, but of a moderate Consistence, which might not onely secure the Instrument from violence, but also receiue and returne the impressions of sounds.

Againe, the same Galen writing of the couering of the Instrument of Smelling, sayeth, that it needed 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 a Defence more rare then that of the Instrument of Hearing which is fast and thight, because the obiect of the Sense of Smelling is thicker then the obiect of the Sense of Hearing: for the obiect of Smelling is a vaporous substance wherein the odour doeth exhale, but the obiect of Hearing is ayre altered only by an impression of Sounds.

By this wee may see that Galen was not vtterly ignorant of this membrane, and wee haue the rather inserted this passage out of him, because many late Anatomistes haue a∣uouched that Galen made no mention thereof at all, but was vtterly ignorant of it. VVe re∣turne now vnto the membrane.

The substance therefore of this membrane is thinne, fast, dry, translucide and of exqui∣site sence: so thinne and fine that Hipocrates compares it to a Spiders webbe, the better to transmit an easie voice or soft sound (for it was necessary vnto the act of Hearing or if you wil vnto the passion of Hearing, that the sound should be communicated with the In bred Ayre although the substances of the outward and inward ayres are not mingled) and yet so strong withall that it might be able to beare a pulsation which might affect the instrument of Hearing.

Wherefore Bony it behoued not to be, for then the instrument of Sense would haue beene deafe, because the in bred Ayre would not haue receiued the Sound and alteration of the externall ayre, and if the bone had beene so thin that it could haue transmitted the affection of the ayre, then also would it haue bin in danger of breaking.

It was not fit this couering or instrument should be fleshy, because if that which recei∣ued the sound had beene laxe or loose it would not so well haue transmitted the impressi∣on, for wee see that the strayter a drumme is braced the shriller sound it yeelds. Againe, if it had beene fleshy it would haue bin soft and full of moysture, and by that meanes would haue admitted of many things to cleaue or sticke vnto it which now doe fall away from it, because it is membranous.

This partition therefore or muniment, or couering, call it what you will, is membra∣nous and thinne withall: for if in the first conformation it bee produced a thicke and fast membrane then is the party deafe incurably, as Arantius and Laurentius haue well remem∣bred.

But wee finde sometimes before this membrane on the outside that there groweth a certaine thicke coate beside the intent of Nature, of which Aegineta maketh mention in the 23. Chapter of his 2. booke, and Aquapendens saith he found it twice, but Aegineta tea∣cheth also the way how to cure it; yet it is much to be doubted that if it grow from the Na∣tiuity such children will become deafe and dumbe; Deafe because this coate hindreth the appulsion of the sound vnto the membrane; Dumbe because they are not able either to conceiue with their minds or to vtter with their voices, that they are altogither ignorāt of.

And as such a coate or filme before the membrane doth cause deafnesse, so it sometime hapneth that immediatly behinde the membrane there is a collection of mucous matter, or an affluence of some humour from whence proceedeth a great difficulty of Hearing hard to be cured: but if the humour be thinne then the Hearing is not so much impeached as the patient is vexed with ringings, singings, whistlings and hissing murmures in his Eares. Furthermore this membrane is thight and fast, hauing in it no conspicuous pores but neruous & strong, the better to resist outward iniuries & violent incusions of the ayre.

It is also very dry that it might more readily receiue the Sound, and more distinctly make represetation of the same. For we imagine that the image of the Sound is receiued in this membrane without the matter, euen as the images of colours are receiued in the horny membrane of the eye. Beside Hippocrates sayth that drynesse is a great helpe to the conception or reception of Sounds, because that which soundeth shrillest is farthest hard,

as we haue experience in small bells which are made of thin and fast Lattin plate.

This membrane is also translucide and pollished like a Looking-glasse both within & without, sauing that on the inside the processe of the bone cald the Mallet or Hāmer is extended vpward vnto the middest thereof like as we see in the tayle of a drumme there is a chord stretched ouerthwart through the midst.

The vse of this membrane is to close vp the hole of Hearing in a round compasse, & like a hedge or wall to distinguish it from the fourth cauity of the Stony-bone, and there∣fore Laurentius calleth it septum, the partition. It serueth also to distinguish the externall from the internall parts of the care; but especially to separate the In-bred ayre, whose duty it is to receiue the impressions of Sounds from the externall or the ayre that cometh from without, for if these two ayres had beene mixed and confounded, the outward ayre being oftentimes foggy and thicke, must needes haue made the inward ayre also more vnfit for sensation. Neither doeth it only keep the inward ayre from permixtion with the outward but also containeth it that it should not vanish of it owne accord, or be dispersed and dissi∣pated in vehement noyses or sounds. Adde hereto that it keepeth out the externall aire so that neither the cold nor heate thereof can offend the nerues of the braine. Finally it de∣fendeth the inward parts from outward wrongs, so that if a man be ouer head and eates in the water, yet the water cannot passe beyond the Membrane: In like maner it keepeth out flies and other such busie creatures, dust and whatsoeuer else should happen to fall into the hole of hearing.

But because the thinnesse of this membrane made it subiect to bee violated or indan∣gered by such outward accidents, Nature for more security hath placed on the inside ther∣of three bones, a chord or string and two muscles wherby this membrane is made better a∣ble to endure the force of the ayre when it is beaten against it.

CHAP. XVIII. Of the small bones of the Organe of hearing, and of the Chord.

THe three bones of the Organe of hearing were not knowne to Anatomists till the age wherein we liue. Those two which are knowne by the names of the Anuill or the Stithy, and the Mallet or Hammer were inuented or found out by that restorer of Anatomie, Iohannes Carpus of Bononia, and the third Iohannes Phillippus Ingrassias challengeth vnto himselfe, so doth al∣so Columbus and Eustachius, and well it may be that all these being so oculate Anatomists did find it out by their industry. But now we haue them, it shall bee more expedient pre∣cisely to describe them vnto you then to determine who were the first inuenters of them.

These bones therefore are scituated in the first cauity of the stony bone, which before we called the Tympane that is the drume or Taber, and because their figure is diuers they haue also diuers names giuen them, partly from the similitude they haue with the things, whose names they beare, partly also from their vse. The first is called Malleus or Malleo∣lus the Mallet or the Hammer. The second Incus the Anuill or the Stithy. The third Stapes the Stirrop [Tab. 10. fig. 6. 7. 8.]

The Hammer or Mallet [Tab. 10. fig. 4. r. fig. 5. C. fig. 8. q. Tab. 11. c. l.] is seated in the beginning of the first cauitie of the stony bone [Tab. 10. fig. 2. neere to c.] at the end of the hole of hearing. This bone saith Coiter hath his name rather from his vse then from his forme, because when the membrane is mooued, the Mallet also is mooued there∣withall: or because like a hammer it lies vpon the Anuill, and in the motion beates vpon the membrane. Others doe liken it to the thigh-bone, as Vessalius on this manner. As the thigh neere the necke thereof hath two processes, so this small bone hath two proportio∣nable processes in the necke thereof, whereby it groweth more strongly to his membrane. Againe as the necke of the thigh bending obliquely to the cauity of the hanch endeth in a round head; so this bone departing inward from the membrane and ending in a round smooth & plain head, is ioyned to the vpper part of the other bone by the interposition of the membrane, as if a hammer were loosely tyed to a Smiths Anuill. This first bone there∣fore is long and crooked, hauing a head, a necke, and a taile.

The head is the vpper and thicker part, long and bunching out, for this head is not perfectly round, as hauing ingrauen in the outside of the top a smal and long cauity wher∣in it receiueth the head of the second bone which we called the Anuill, whereto being ioy∣ned, it lifteth it vpward and forward to the side of the hole of hearing.

The necke of it is but narrow, yet on the backeside thereof do two small processes

shoote out, which are very slender and sharpe. To the vppermost adhereth the ligament or chord & the lowermost resteth vpon the membrane that it might not be driuen too far inward or broken. But the vse of this processe I cannot better demonstrate then by those Chords which they vse to stretch vpon the bottome of a drumme whereby it is secured from the violence of the aire which is within it; which aire otherwise being so violentlie and so often beaten, would rend the bottome asunder. Betwixt these is a small cauity & right opposite against it a little knubbe into which one of the Tendons of the Muscle is implanted, as the other is into the necke.

The taile of this bone which Fallopius calleth Pediculus as it were the Stalke is somwhat broad in the top, but endeth into a small knot which receyueth the insertion or tendon of the the Muscle; (Columbus addeth, that into this sharpe processe there determineth a a small Nerue from the fift coniugation which affoordeth a hairy and crooked braunch which is inserted into the labyrinth of the eare) presently after it runneth backward and downward, and by degrees endeth into a slender and sharpe processe, somwhat rough and a little incurued or hooked, so that it cleaueth to the Membrane of the Tympane, not in the end or point of this processe but thoroughout his length, yet not in the verie middest of the Membranes bredth. [Tab. 10. fig. 4. from ^r to ^P]

The reason of this Connexion is partly to defend the Membrane from outward vio∣lence, that it should not be driuen beyonde his extent (wherein also it is assisted by the Chord of which we shall heare euen now) partly to draw it downward and inwarde for the processe we spake of is curued or hooked inward, and by this meanes the Membrane is made inward conuexe, and outward hollowe, in which figure it is also by this pro∣cesse preserued, whence it commeth to passe that the outward aire which entereth into hole of Hearing slideth from the sides of the Membrane and gathereth it selfe togither in the center where the Mallet hangeth, and beeing so vnited and intended is a great furtherance for the communication of the sound to the inward partes.

Againe, as this hammer groweth to the Membrane [Tab. 10. fig. 6; ^•] by his lower processe and the inferiour part of his taile, as also to the orbe of the hole of Hearing by the benefite of a Ligament which runneth ouerthwart from the prominence which is on one side the hole to the prominence on the other; so that it is no where at libertie, but on euery side fastned to the Membrane: in like maner the head therof is articulated to the Anuill vpon which it lyeth by that kinde of articulation or iuncture which we cal Ginglymos. [Tab. 10. fig. 6, 7, 8] For in the Hammer and the Anuile there is a cauity and a head, and the Hammer is moued aboue the Anuile. Notwithstanding this Hammer & the Anuile after a man is dead are so closely ioyned (whither it be so in liuing bodies it is much doubted) that Nature seemeth to haue as much vse of their continuity & vnity as of their diuision and plurality: for being two they do better safegard and defend the Membrane, but their continuation auayleth no whit lesse for the better conueyance of the sound. Wherefore although the articulation of these two bones is worthily saide to be per Ginglymon because they mutually receiue and are receiued one of another, yet be∣cause of their straite and close copulation some are of opinion that their iuncture is rather to bee referred to that kinde which wee call Synarthrosis, the meaning of which words of Art shall be at full expounded in our last booke of the bones.

Finally, the Hammer is a longer bone then the Anuile but withall more slender, be∣cause it was to mooue aboue the Anuile, and wee know it is reasonable that that vvhich beareth should be greater then that which is borne. Notwithstanding both these bones in the place where they are articulated or ioyned, are much greater and thicker then in their other part, which thing to say true may bee obserued almost in the articulations of all other bones of the body.

The Anuile [Tab. 10. fig. 4^s. Fig. 5. I. figure. 7 and 8.^b. Tab. 11, ^m] is the second bone which is situated in the hinder side of the first cauity and lyeth nexte to the Hammer to which it is opposite and couereth (saith Coiter) that part of the Membrane which is not couered by the Hammer, yet so that his thicker part is toward the care and his legges (if we may so cal them) or his thinner parts toward the Tympane. Some are of opinion as Columbus and Archang. that this bone had his name from his action, because as an Anuile it receiueth the stroke of the Hammer which mooueth aboue it and beateth against it . Others conceiue that it hath the name from the similitude it hath with a Smiths Stithy or Anuile, not that great one wheron they driue sledges of iron, but the little and moo∣uable

Anuiles which are partly plaine and partly round. And heereupon Vesalius, Eustaclius, Coiter, Platerus and Aquapendens, because it is not altogether plaine as a great Anuile is, but hath an vnequall cauity such as is to be seene in the top of the Grinding teeth, haue likened it to a tooth hauing two fangs or rootes, the one longer and smaller, the other thicker but shorter, insomuch as they call it not Incus or the Anvile, but Dens or the Tooth.

This bone is shorter and thicker then the Hammer (Aquapendens saith as thick againe) & hath two legges; for in the vpper extreamity it is thicker and swelling, and in a smooth cauity receiueth the head of the Hammer: it hath engrauen in it a small sinus or bosom, which Aquap. calleth an vnequallcauity, in the midst whereof riseth a Line, as it is in the bone of the Cubue where it is articulated to the Arme, so that the articulation thereof is more truely sayde to bee made by Ginglymos, which for the motion is more expedite and ready. And as the head of this Anuile is articulated with the Hammer, so the producti∣ons or processes thereof doe grow to the orbe of the hole of Hearing, and to the toppe of the Stirrup or third bone. For the lower end thereof which is also the smaller, doth de∣uide it selfe into two slender and acute processes (which Fallopius and Laurentius with some others doe call Legges) standing off one from another.

The higher of these which is the shorter and the thicker, is somewhat broad, a little in∣torted or bent inward and leaneth vpon the Scaly bone of the Temples, & by a transuerse ligament cleaueth to the walles or sides of the orbe of the Tympane euen there where the VVatercourse slideth, & by this meanes it is tyed more strongly to the Hammer, that when the membrane hapneth to bee vehemently shaken, the two bones might not be separated one from the other.

The other processe of this Anuill or roote of this Tooth is somewhat longer, slenderer and bending downward; yet sensibly intorted vpward it appeareth aboue the membrane and is tyed to the top of the stirrup by the mediation of a ligament and affixed thereto by that kinde of coniunction which we call Arthrodia, occupying that place of the membrane wherein the Hammer is not, whereby it might Perceiue or receiue the pulsion of that part, and communicate the Sound to the stirrop, from whence through small holes it is ledde a long vnto the nerue of Hearing.

The Stirrop [Table 10. fig. 4. ^tp fig. 8. ^T Table 11. ^s] called Stapes, is the third bone of the Eare, which the first Inuenters did very aptly expresse by this resemblance. Many con∣tend about the Inuētion of this bone; among the rest Columbus, Ingrassias, Fallopius & Eu∣stachius, all excellent Anatomists and haply all of them as fortunate in the finding it out as they haue been diligent to search into the secret corners of man; and therefore we wil not determine any thing in the preiudice of any of them. VVe finde it to be scituated as it were in the middest of the first cauity of the stony bone neare the Ouall window.

In bruite beastes it is triangular, very like the greeke letter δ [Table 10. figur. 8. sheweth the figure of it in bruite beastes] but in men it may bee sayde to bee formed of two partes, [Table 10. fig. 7. sheweth the forme of it in men] the one superior which is bent like abowe hauing two smal legges somewhat sinuated, which becomming narrow are inserted into a transuerse Basis.

The top thereof is not sharpe but hath a smal plaine and round head, wherewith like an Arch it sustaineth the longer processe of the Anuill, or if you will the Stirrop hangeth to this processe by the mediation of a ligament.

The sides or Legges of this Stirrop are very small and depart but a little asunder, ma∣king a hole betwixt them more long then round. Some say it is Triangular, others of an Ouall forme; but the Basis of the bone which is the part remaining is transuerse, somewhat broad and the edge thereof a little thicker then the other part.

The Basis also shooteth out a little beyond the legges or side-bones thereof, whereby it is articulated to the bone at the Ouall window, and is firmly fastned to the membrane which shutteth the perforation, and that by the helpe of a Ligament arising from that side of the head which hath the cauity. Varolius called it very elegantly 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 as it were the Pupilla of the Hearing. And on this manner it doeth exactly represent the forme of a Stirrope, not such a stirrop as is vsed now a dayes, but such as wee see grauen and figured in old pic∣tures and tables, that is, triangular, and representing the fashion of the greeke letter δ.

This bone is much lesse then either of the other two, for if it had been bigger or waigh∣ed more, then being mooued together with the other two, it would haue drawn the mem∣brane

downeward. In the middest it is perforated or open like a stirrop, that it might be the lighter, and that hereunto the Inbred ayre might insinuate it selfe and be mooued. A∣gaine the better to contray the sound which it receiueth communicated from the Anuill not only to the depth of the first cauity, but also beyond to the other cauity, & so through the Ouall window directly vnto the Labyrinth. Wherefore without this stirrop the sound could not haue beene transported into the whole cauity.

For example, as the visible species or forme which is receiued within the horny coate must first passe through the marrow and streight hole of the Pupilla or Apple of the eye before it can ariue at the Cristalline humour: so the species or forme of the sound which hath gotten into the concauity of the membrane, must passe vnto the chiefe Organe of hearing through the small hole of the stirrop bone: and thence it was that Varolius, as wee said euen now, called this hole of the stirrop Pupillam auditus the Apple of the eare.

Wherefore, as wee sayd, the formes of sounds passe through the emptie hole of the stirroppe into the cauities which are wrought by nature in the stony bone where they meete with the Inbred Ayre, which may also be compared to the Cristalline humor. For as the Cristalline is the chiefe instrument of the sight in respect of reception of Ima∣ges or Formes; so is this In-bred aire of the Eare the chiefe instrument which receiueth the formes of sounds, although there bee another more noble Organ which iudgeth of them.

Moreouer, least these three bones if they should haue mooued inconstantly, might haue indangered the membrane to which they are firmly tyed by drawing it too much this way or that way, it is fastened to the bone with a small ligament or chord, reaching ouerthwart from the sides vnto the top of the stirrop. Yea they are tyed together with slender and soft membranes which do the office of a ligament, and that by two ioynts which in their extremities are crusted ouer with a gristly substance after the same manner that it is in o∣ther bones, and so their articulation doth not differ from the Syntax or coniunction of o∣ther parts.

They were made three in number (though some creatures haue but two as Placenti∣nus recordeth) for their better motion whereby the membrane is secured, which other∣wise in violent concussions of the ayre might haue beene broken. For if it had bene but one bone, the membrane in impulsion could not haue giuen place because the bone would not haue bent therewith; or if the processe of the bone should haue yeelded, being necessarily so fine and thin, it might easily haue crackt a sunder. Wherefore the mem∣brane of the Tympane is to fastened so the tayle of the Hammer that it might not breake when it is violently driuen inward: And againe the taile or handle of the Hammer clea∣ueth vnto the membrane that it might not be driuen too much outward. But that it might better resist any violent motion outward or inward there were two other bones added to the Hammer to helpe the flexion; and two muscles whereby the motion is restrayned when the hammer with the membrane is driuen with violence either inward or outward. For the bone which we compare to a Hammer hath a double motion, as Arantius ele∣gantly obserueth, pressing forward and recoyling backeward.

Forward or inward according to the motion of the membrane whereto it is annex∣ed, which membrane being shaken by the outward ayre is driuen inward, and vpward re∣maining so long gibbous on the inside til the Inbred ayre is affected with the sound, which ayre wandring through the circles conuolutions and burroughs of the eare, maketh the repesentations of the sounds to be receiued by the branches or tendrils of the fifth payre of Synewes, by which they are conueyed in a moment of time vnto the Braine. But that this membrane should not be driuen too farre inward, the Hammer opposeth it selfe. The Hammer determineth at the small cauity of the Anuill whereinto the head of the Ham∣mer is articulated; wherefore the Anuill being a firme and stable bone, stayeth the inclina∣tion of the membrane, euen as sayth Arantius, in clocks there are certaine points of iron which wil nor suffer the wheele to run beyond the number limited for the time of the day, And as the Anuill is assistant vnto the Hammer by laying a law vpon his motion; (and therefore hath two legs or processes whereby it is fixed to the stony bone and the stirrop) so also the stirrop standing vpon the cauity of the stony bone neere the circles as it were vpon a stable basis, doth elegantly sustaine vpon his head which is built in the maner of an arch, the longer processe or leg of the Anuill.

The second motion of the hammer is outward, for the membrane of the Tympane

together with the Hāmer when the violence or constraint which before bare them inward is remitted do returne vnto their natural station; partly by a naturall motion whereby they recouer their former position when the violence is intermitted; partly by the muscle which is an instrument of arbitrarie motion; for that muscle is contracted toward his originall and so the head of the Hammer is separated from his iuncture with the Anuile, and the re∣curued processe of the Hammer beareth the membrane outward. But beside these twoe bones, the 2. muscles also of the inward eare doe assist the membrane, one of them against the inward impulsion, and the other against the outward expulsion.

The substance of these bones is hard, dense and smooth. Hard for that helpeth the hearing, as also addeth a greater strength and firmitude vnto the membrane. They are also dense and smooth for the better reception and transportation of the Sound; yet Co∣lumbus and Coiter are of opinion that the two first are within spongy and medullous. The third is so small that there can be no holes perceiued therein.

And as these bones in forme and figure doe differ much from other bones of the body, so also and especially they haue two notable dissimilitudes or disproportions from the rest.

The first is that they are not compassed about with the Periostium, least sayth Aquapen∣dens and Placentinus, they should be vnfit for the reception of Sounds: for if you couer a hard body with a soft cloth and then strike vpon it, it will not yeeld so shrill a sound as it doth when it is bare or naked.

Againe, herein they differ from other bones as all Anatomistes doe concurre, that they are perfect and accomplished at the very birth, hauing the same magnitude then that they haue in olde age; partly because man at all times euen from his Infancy hath greate neede of the Sense of Hearing, as wel to learne to speak as to gather knowledge: partly because the membrane of the Tympane is as much subiect to danger by outward violence in our Infancy as in any time of our life. Notwithstanding they are not so hard in Infancy as in old folke, for children are full of moysture: whence it is that children do not heare so suddenly as grown men, because to the exact perfection of the Sence there is required a notable drinesse.

Aquapendens addeth a third difference betwixt these bones and other bones of the body: for, sayeth hee, these bones of the Eare doe hang suspended from a membrane. Whence it commeth to passe that the externall aire together with the sound is moe ea∣sily communicated by the Hammer and the Anuill to the aire implanted in the eare: for Soundes are more liuely communicated to hard bodies, which hang loose as you may perceiue if you tie a peece of Iron to a string and strike vpon it, it wil yeeld a shriller soūd then it will if it be not suspended. But this conceit of Aquapendens sounds but harsh in Placentinus eares.

These bones are also hollowe, as well to make them the lighter, as also to containe Marrow for their nourishment, whereto we may adde, that that which is hollow maketh a better resonance.

And albeit these three bones are of all others the least in quantitie, yet by that which hath beene saide, we may conceiue that they are of great vse and necessitie. In a word, their vses are first to establish and defend the membrane of the Tympane, least it should be torne either by inward windes gathered in the brain, or by the violent motion of the outward aire, as in thunder, shooting off Ordinance, or such like.

Secondlie, they yeeld some assistance vnto the Sense of Hearing, for by their help the Sound is conuaide by a kinde of consequence or succession to the auditorie Nerue. For vpon their commotion the Chord is shaken, the implanted aire is moued to receiue the Sound. Now the Chord could not haue beene so vehemently moued by the mem∣brane alone as by the membrane and the bones; and so these bones together with the Chord being shaken by the appulsion of outward aire, doe conferre vnto the distincti∣on of Sounds as the Teeth doe to the explanation of the speach.

I am not ignorant that many men haue busied themselues to finde out the particu∣lar vse of each of these bones, wherein what satisfaction they haue giuen themselues, I know not; certainely to vs that reade their writings they giue but little. Their conceites being meere speculations, & so intricate for the most part as if they did vnderstand what they would haue saide, yet they haue not beene able to expresse themselues vnto others. Coiter me thinks resolueth very well that their exact historieespecially, for the vse, is not

so curiously to bee sought into, because it is impossible that wee shoulde attaine further then a bare coniecture, and beside something would be left by vs for admiration, especi∣ally where our vncertaine guesses cannot bring vs any great profite sauing the satisfacti∣on of an ouer curious conceite.

It remaineth that we speake of that flender and neruous Chord which is within the membrane. It doeth not indeed compasse the membrane round about, but running tho∣rough the middest there of is fastned to that ioynte where the stirrop is articulated with one of the Legges of the Annuill. This Chord if it be drawn out is thrice or foure times as long as it appeareth before it be drawne. For the substance Eustachius taketh it to be a branch of the fourth coniugation. Fallopius ingenuously confesseth that hee knowes not what to cal it, yet resolues to giue it the name of a Nerue, and with him Cower consenteth. Ingrassias calles it a thred or a chord: Aquapendens a slender rope of the Nature of a Liga∣ment, or, sayth he, if it be not so nor any of the other aboue named, then is it a body of his owne kinde.

Howsoeuer it be framed or of whatsoeuer, the vse of it seemeth to be for pulsation, for as in a Drumme the sound is made by the repercussion of the chord which is streatched o∣uer the Vellam or the Skin, so in the eare sayeth Coiter this chord receiuing an impression by a beating made vpon it from the three bones, doth strike the inward ayre whereuppon Sensation is made.

CHAP. XIX. Of the Muscles of the inward Eare

THE Hammer beeing articulated to the Anuill with that kinde of articulation which we call Ginglymos, it followeth that their motion must be very obscure, now they are moued together with the membrane at which the Hammer han∣geth, vpward and downeward hauing one muscle appointed for this motion within the membrane, another seated without it.

The internall muscle [Table II. figu 2. 1] described first by Eustachius, and scituated in the stony bone, is exceeding small, there being in the whole body none lesser: and yet the frame thereof is so elegant as no muscle in the body may bee compared thereto. It ari∣seth in the Basis of the wedge-bone in that place where there is a hole made with a root of the processe of the stony bone, and an additament of the nowle-bone.

It taketh his originall from a substaunce much like a Ligament. Afterward it becom∣meth fleshy, and groweth a little broader euen to the verie middest. Afterward it is againe angustated or straightned and produceth, Eustachius sayth but one Tendon. Whome Coiter and Aquapendens do follow. But Placentinus & according to him Bauhine say, they are two, very small, [Table II. fig. 5. below i] one of which is inserted into the vpper processe of the Hammer, the other into the necke thereof. But in Dogges a little before the insertion it hath a fleshy and round glandule a little depressed, which is not fixed to the membrane lest if it were drawne by it selfe being very small it should be in danger of breaking.

This muscle when it worketh draweth the head of the Hammer obliquely forward, and inward deduceth or inclineth it from the Anuill, and bending the processe of the Hammer driueth the membrane outward.

That this is the vse of this muscle Arantius proueth by an experiment on this manner. If, sayth he, in a greene head that is well dissected till you come to this part, you drawe this muscle with a sharpe hooke toward his originall you shall finde it hath a double vse: one that the head of the Hammer will manifestly recede or depart from the Anuil and be lifted vp, the other that the membrane will be driuen outward.

Now this motion which is made in the eares although it seeme to bee voluntary, be∣cause it is accomplished by a muscle which is an instrument of voluntary motion; yet it can hardly be perceiued by our selues, yea wee heare whether wee will or no, the reason is be∣cause the muscle is so very smal.

Neither doe we want examples of many muscles which we know assuredly doe worke as well while we sleepe as while we wake, which yet wee cannot obserue in our selues, but their motion seemes to be without our consent, as we may instance in the muscles of Re∣spiration, of the eies, of the eie-lids, the bladder and the fundament. Yet in some men this motion is more euident, which also they can at their pleasure moue or containe. The truth of this Aquapendens proueth on this manner. The motion sayth he is Sensible, and with a kinde of noyse, as if a man should stretch three threds a little distant one from another, and strike them with a Cittern quill as we do strike an instrument; or as if a man should scratch

ouerthwart the graine of a wansecoate, or imagine it to bee like the noise that the Steele makes when you strike fire out of the Flint. This motion is especially perceyued vvhen a man begins to yawne, but in the beginning of it we heare a kinde of obscure or dull sound from the commotion of the aire, much like the noise that a staffe makes when it is beaten against the aire. But this motion or noise in the aire many men do not obserue, neyther doth it seeme to me saith Placentinus, to haue any vse or to conferre at all to the Sense of Hearing; for if there be a noise in the aire and at the same time a man shall striue to stirre vp this motion, he shall heare the outward noise more imperfectly: And therefore this motion seemeth to happen either from the necessity of the matter, the Muscles necessari∣ly following the attrition of the Hammer against the Anuile, or else it was ordained by na∣ture for the auoyding of vapours. For in Agues wherein many vapors do arise vnto the head this noise is frequently heard, which wee conceiue to be when as the vapours which fill the cauity of the eares are by this motion dislodged, and yet we may vnderstande that this motion is not altogether at our owne disposition.

In like manner saith Bauhine when the Eares are purged into the mouth by the passage that way opened, I am woont to perceiue in my selfe a kind of tickling within my mouth neere the roote of the Vuula, at which time if I often swallow my spittle, I doe manifestly perceiue by the noise that that motion is ordinarily stirred vppe in mine eares: and I per∣ceiue likewise the foresaide tickling to bee appeased when the matter by that meanes is sooner purged into my mouth.

But how commeth it to passe that this motion is perceiued in both the ears at once? It may bee answered, that it happeneth in the eare as it dooth in the eye: for vvhen one eye is mooued, the other also instantly accompanieth it, as wee haue shewed before. A man would imagine that in large bodyed creatures this Muscle might be better perceiued then in a man. But we find it farre otherwise; for although beasts haue it, yet for the most part it is in them lesse and harder to finde then in a man.

Hee that is desirous to finde out this Muscle, must lightlie cut the Stonie process•• thoroughout the length, guiding his Knife by a Line which runneth there through but not very high, beginning at that part of the processe which is next vnto the Wedge∣bone, for the muscle runnes length-wise and so determines into the membrane of the Tympane.

The other Muscle [Table 11. figure 1 and whose insertion is at^b] is situated with∣out the membrane of the Tympane in the vpper part of the hole of Hearing about the middest thereof. Concerning the inuention thereof two excellent Anatomists of Pa∣dua in Italy doe contend. For Hieronymus Fabritius ab Aquapendente, whome therefore we call Aquapendens affirmeth, that he found it in the yeare 1599. But Iulius Casserius Pla∣centinus auoucheth, that he obserued it the seauenth day of March, in the yeare one thou∣sand fiue hundred ninety three. But out of question they both haue deserued wonde∣rous well of this Art which of them soeuer was the first inuenter thereof.

And because, sayth Bauhine, I would haue the world know how much I esteem them both, I will set downe both their descriptions thereof beginning with Aquapendens, bee∣cause he is the Ancienter, not to derogate from the other, seeing I loue and honor them both. The one was my maister in the yeares one thousand fiue hundred seuenty seuen, one thousand fiue hundred seuenty eight, and one thousand fiue hundred seauentie nine: the other in the yeare one thousand fiue hundred seuenty nine was my friend and fellow-Studient, and this friendship to this day we maintaine by entercourse of Letters, and shall do I doubt not so long as we liue. Aquapendens therefore hath it thus.

Furthermore, this yeare 1599. I found a muscle in the hole of hearing, cald 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 [Tab. 10. fig. 9] which is without the membrane very small, fleshy and not without a tendon which proceedeth directly from the midst of that hole or passage, till it be inserted into the very center almost of the membrane on the outside iust against the place where the Ham∣mer on the inside is fastened to the membrane, which together with the Hammer it draw∣eth outward. You shall finde this newe muscle if in a greene head you cut the vtter Shell of the Bone which maketh the Hole of Hearing on both sides, which you may best do with a Chizell and a Mallet and so remooue the bone carefully to the sides, for so the Muscle will appeare, and yet I haue not bene able to finde it in all my latter dissections, although I esteeme the necessity of it to be so great that I thinke it was rather the fault of my dilli∣gence then a defect in Nature. Thus farre Aquapendens.

Placentinus describeth it on this manner.

In a man there is another Muscle situated in the vpper part of the hole of Hearing, [Tab. 11. fig. 1, ^{a b}] about the middest whereof the skinne and the Membrane which be∣ing implicated or folded together do inuest the saide hole, do euidently degenerate for the forming of this Muscle into a fleshy body: but almost membranous, distinguished or lined through with Fibres, hauing also a Tendon. The Figure of the muscle is round and in the progresse groweth slenderer by degrees, and so passeth directly on vnto the Tympane. It is inserted not into the outside of the Membrane nere the center; but the Tendon (which it transmitteth with a double extremity or termination into the cauitie of the stony-bone betwixt the Tympane and that part of the temple-bone from vvhich the bonie ring proceedeth) is fastened on the inside into the heade of the Hammer, be∣twixt the vpper and the lower processes thereof. The inuention of this Muscle if I attri∣bute to my selfe I shall not defraud any man of his due commendation, for I obserued it the seuenth of March in the yeare 1593. in the presence, &c. Thus far Placentinus.

The vse as well of the Internall as of this externall Muscle Aquapendens thus expres∣seth.

The vse of these Muscles is for the securitie of the Membrane, for because it might haue bene broken or torne either on the inside or the out, Nature prouided a strength

[illustration]

Table 11. Sheweth the Muscles placed in the cauity of the eares, with some other cauities and bones of the eares.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XI.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

[illustration]

III

[illustration]

IV

[illustration]

V

[illustration]

VI

[illustration]

VII.

[illustration]

IIX

[illustration]

IX

• a, b. The externall Muscle whose insertion is at b.
• c. The Hammer of the Tympane couered with the Membrane.
• d. The membrane of the Tympane.
• e. The bony Circle.
• f. The bone called Mastoides.
• g. The Temple bone.
• h. The circle of the first cauitie.
• i. The internal muscle whose bifurcated ten∣don is shewne in the fift figure.
• KK. A portion of the Pericranium or scul-skin going vnder the bony Circle, making the membrane of the Tympane or Drumme.
• l. The Hammer lying vnder the membrane.
• m. The Anuile.
• n. The breach of the bonye circle at e vvhere the beginning and termination of it is.
• o. A part of the yoake bone.
• p. A part of the bone called Basillare.
• q, r. The first cauity.
• s. The Stirrop.
• tt. The Circumference of the Shell called Concha.
• u. A protuberation or swelling in the middle of the Cauity.

or defence in both places. For on the outside the aire beeing violently mooued might haue broken the membrane by thrusting it inward, and on the inside by beating it out∣ward; in the outside the externall aire which with violence togither with the sound ru∣sheth into the eare; on the inside the aire which thorow the mouth getteth into the eare doth forcibly sometimes driue the membrane from within outwarde; and in this man∣ner is the membrane stretched ordinarily in yawnings, blowings of the nose, retention of the breath, strong contentions, lowd voices, the excretion of excrements, and such like violent constraints. The externall Muscle therefore when the Membrane is driuen inward draweth it backe, and as it were recalleth it into the right place. In like manner, the internall Muscle retracteth it inward when it is turned or driuen outward. And these are the necessities for the satisfaction whereof Nature ordained these two elegant mus∣cles, to wit, for the preseruation of the Membrane.

The reason why the custodie of the Membrane was committed to a Muscle, that is, to an instrument of voluntary motion is rendred on this maner. If any other tie but that of a Muscle had bene made the Custos or Vindex of this Muscle, such a tie must haue held it alwayes stretched or tentred alike, and so the Membrane would rather haue bene more endangred then any whit secured. Besides, it was verie necessarie that as the impulsions of the aire vnto the Membrane are diuers, so there should be a varietie of power in that that was to curbe or limmit those diuers motions or impulsions. Such a varietie of power cannot bee imagined to bee in anie Ligament but onely in Muscles which make their operation with a certaine Analogie or proportion to the finall end which Nature entends, or according to measure; contracting and relaxing themselues more or lesse as neede shall be, accommodating their motion diuersly according to the diuers impulsi∣ons of the aire; for they suffer the Membrane onely so to receiue the offered violence, that neither the violence might be altogethet withstood but that the membrane might yeeld therto, nor yet the Membrane be outraged by such violence. In a word, these mus∣cles partly by yeelding and giuing groūd, partly by obluctation or opposition do secure the Membrane from being torne and rent asunder. Thus far Aquapendens.

Placentinus thus. The Muscles of the inward eare doe one of them assist the Ham∣mer against internall impulsions, the other against externall. The outward muscle which I founde out, that sendeth his Tendon into the cauitie of the Stony bone and ioyneth it selfe with the greater processe of the Hammer, draweth that part of the Hammer out∣ward which inclineth inward, and so moderateth the compression thereof made vppon the Anuile, that it is a defence against the internall Muscle.

The Internall which ariseth from the Wedge-bone and passeth into the cauity of the Stony-bone vnto the Head of the Hammer into which it is inserted, succoureth the same against the former when it is driuen inward, defining and limiting his introcession. For when the Tympane by an irruption of outward ayre, is together with the Hammer driuen inwarde, this muscle resisteth their motion that the Tympane and the Hammer should not be constrained beyond their Tether & so suffer laceration. Thus farre Pla∣centinus.

Varolius concerning this matter (for we account him also among our classicke authors, especially concerning the head) writeth on this manner.

Although, saith he, the sound do mooue the Sense of Hearing whither wee will or no, yet there is in vs a kinde of voluntary Animadversion which wee exercise in all our sen∣ses at our owne pleasure when we would iudge curiously of any sensible thing. Wherefore as by the helpe of the muscles of the eye men do voluntarily direct the center of the Cri∣stalline toward the obiect which they attentiuely behold, so within the organ of Hearing there is placed a small muscle, which arising from the fore-part is inserted into the articu∣lation of the triangle (so he calleth the Stirrop) with the Anuil: when this muscle is contra∣cted, the Triangle or Stirrop is drawne a little forwarde, the ioynt of the Anuile vvith the Hammer yeelding thereto, and approacheth more directly to the Center of the Tympa∣ne, and at that time we heare with more attention and better iudgement, like as wee are able to see the least visible obiect when we stedfastly beholde it by a line concentricall to the Horny Membrane, the Pupilla and the Cristalline humor. Some haue imagined that the small bones of the cares diuersly mooued by this muscle, doe make within the organe of Hearing many and different sorts of sounds, whose opinion we thinke sufficiently confuted by the former assignation which we made of the vse of the muscle. Thus farre Varolius.

CHAP. XX. Of the Cauities of the Stony-bone.

ALbeit wee purpose in the Booke of Bones as particularly as wee can to follow their history; yet because this Stony bone and the dissection thereof is most necessary for the vnderstanding of the manner of the Sense of Hearing. VVee haue determined to make our particular description thereof in this place; and to passe it ouer with little more then bare mention in the booke of Bones.

Although therefore (as before is sayd) the Stony bone is within altogether Canernous and spongy, and that the Antients haue made mention of one only Denne or Cauity there in: yet wee will reckon vnto you three notable ones and of great moment, which also the Neotericks or later Anatomistes haue called Dennes and Caues.

These Dennes or Caues are formed in the middest of the stony-bone where it swelleth most, to contayne the Organs of Hearing, that is to say, the mēbrane, the three smal bones, the internall muscle, the chord, the auditory nerue and the in-bred ayre, which also is cal∣led the internal medium of this Sence. All which Caues may more distinctly and district∣ly bee demonstrated in children, then in growne men. Placentinus findes them also verie conspicuous in Birds. They haue each of them proper names borrowed from externall things: the first is called Concha or Tympanum; because it is like the shell of a winke or a Ta∣ber. The second is called Labyrinthus, because of the turnings therein. And the third is cal∣led Cochlea, because it is like a Snailes shell.

The first [Table 10. fig. 2 ^h from ^c to ^• Table 11. ^qr] cauity is layd open, when the mem∣brane of the Tympane is taken away. It is called Concha, as we sayd euen now, because it is like a VVinkle or Periwinkle, so acknowledged by Aquapendens, Placentinus, Arantius, & our Authour Bauhine, although I knowe there is great contention against Aristotle in this point, who seemeth first to haue giuen this name to this cauity. But wee stand not vppon names so much, so we know the thing signified by the name. The better appellation as me seemeth is a Tympane, because this cauity couered with his membrane resembleth a Drumme or Taber, for when the membrane is strucken by the Sound it resoundeth again as a Drumme if it bee beaten by reason of the ayre therein contayned rendreth a great sound.

Coiter reprehends Fallopius and Platerus for this appellation, because, sayth hee, in this cauity there are holes, & windowes, and diuers windings which a Drumme hath not. To whome we answere, that in men it hath the name of a Drumme or Tympane from the vse; but in bruite beastes not onely from the vse but also from the figure because in those crea∣tures that chaw the Cud it is very like to a Turkish Drumme. This cauity is also called by Coiter and Placentinus the Bason and the Denne. It is excauated or hollowed in the begin∣ning of the stony-bone, betwixt the roots of the Mammillary processe, and the place where the head of the Iaw is inserted or fastned to his ioynt. The vtter part thereof regardeth the hole of Hearing from which it is onely separated by the membrane [Table 10. figu. 2. from ^b toward ^c.]

Hence it is that if the inside of the eare be inflamed or vlcerated, vppon the motion of the lower iaw the patient is payned in his eare.

The inner part of the cauity is by a thin scale distinguished from the hole of the sleepy artery [Table 10. fig. 2. from ^h to ^L.]

This first is the greatest cauity of the three, and by a successiue ingresse or continuity of passage is ioyned with them, by which meanes it is able to containe a greater quantity of in-bred ayre, & also receiue at the same time diuers sounds comming from diuers quar∣ters.

But because the internall ayre must first be mooued by that which is without, and then transport the image of that sound wherewith it is moued to the Auditory nerue, it was ve∣ry necessarie that it should be purged and kept pure from any stayn of corruption, that like aneate glasse it might represent the image offered vnto it. For this purification and ex∣purgation of the inward ayre, Nature hath placed in this cauity diuers instruments: some seruing for Pulsation, some for Traiection, and some for Expurgation. For Pulsation serue the three bones, the chord and the muscles. For Traiection or conduction vnto the other cauities serue two perforations commonly called Fenestellae or the VVindowes. For Ex∣purgation there is a passage which leadeth into these pallat. All the particles did require a large cauity; whence it was that Nature framed this stony bone long and round, that so it

might containe the more. Furthermore, this cauity is but single, whence it comes to passe that though there be many noyses made together, yet they are at the same time receiued. For if this first cauity had bene distinguished into many dens, neither would the sounds haue bene receiued at the same time nor after the same manner intertained and iudged of by the faculty, for the diuersity of reception would also haue induced a diuersity of appre∣hension, as Aquapendens very wittily hath obserued.

The interior superficies or inner surface of this cauity is vnequall, being in some parts depressed and thrilled through, in others knotty and swelling. Immediatly behinde the membrane it runneth vpward toward the forepart, where also it becommeth narrower, af∣terward it is dilated and tendeth backeward toward the top; then as if it were another ca∣uity it is produced or lengthened downeward; which part saith Coiter, in a man is like a bladder. [Tab. 11. fig 8. and 9.] In a calfe like a waggeners budget, in a kid and lambe like a market womans pouch. It is also rough and spongy; rough, that it might receiue the sounds and not reflect, returne or double them, for if it had bene leuigated, that is, smooth and e∣quall like the arch of a Church, it would haue returned an Eccho. Spongy also, that if at any time the noyse should happen to bee so strong that it might offend the hearing, the force thereof might be abated in those small holes. Moreouer, in that spongy porosity the Inbred Ayre is laboured and brought to perfection. But when I say, it is spongy, I would not haue you conceiue that it is soft as a sponge but porous, for otherwise it is ex∣ceeding hard and stony, thereby yeelding and returning a quicker sound.

Againe some parts of this cauity are lined ouer with a membrane produced from the Pericranium: for after the pericranium hath framed the membrane of the Tympane, it is duplicated and diuersly diuided, so as some of it doth inuest certaine parts of this cauity.

But because this cauity was destined for the reception of the implanted or Inbred Ayre, which was to receiue the outward Ayre altered by the sound, it was very ne∣cessary that it should receiue some kind of percussion: but being by the membrane distin∣guished or diuided from the hole of hearing, it could not receiue the alteration of the out∣ward Ayre without some other helpe, which helpe is pulsation, and that pulsation is ac∣complished by the three bones, the chord and the muscles.

Now that the internall Ayre being affected by the pulsation of the outward Ayre altered by the sound, might carry this affection vnto the sense, there was made certaine ca∣nales wherein the inward Ayre might be conuayed vnto the Auditory nerue, to wit, the two Windowes with a passage into the Labyrinth. Furthermore, it was also necessary that this implanted Ayre should be preserued pure, as also bee cherished and sustayned by the Ayre which we draw in at our mouthes, to which purpose Nature hath created a canale or passage out of this cauity into the pallate, by which it is purged and receiueth new Ayre for his perpetuall nourishment. Of the instruments seruing to pulsation, we haue entrea∣ted at large in the seuenteenth & eighteenth chapters; of those seruing for expurgation ve∣ry particularly in the nineteenth chapter; and both we haue repeated in this. It remaineth now that we prosecute those Organes which serue for Traiection or transmission of the af∣fected Ayre vnto the auditory nerue, and so to the first sensator.

CHAP. XXI. Of the two windowes called Fenestellae, and the watercourse in the first cauitie.

IN this cauity there are two holes very small, which some men call Fenestra or Fenestellae the windowes. These regard the orbe of the hole of hearing as from a higher place. The first which is the foreward and the higher and looketh toward the face, [Tab. 8. fig. 4. and 5. F. Tab. 10. fig. 2. k.] being as it were in the middest of the cauity, is of an Ouall figure or like an Egge, and therefore is it by some Anatomists called Fenestra oualis, the ouall window.

It is somewhat long and flatted on the sides, and in the backe side it openeth it selfe into the Colchea or the last cauity with a large mouth and becommeth so like the forepart of the Colchea that a man cannot tell whether that this Ouall window open into the Col∣chea, or the Colchea into it. This also ioyneth it selfe with the posterior hole, and passing inward is dilated, and maketh as it were a Market place or is like the cauitie of a mettall Mine, (for thus the Anatomists haue pleased to compare little things with great) from which many streets, wayes or burroughs do runne. Vpon this lieth the basis of the stirrop, and for the most part closeth it vp.

The other hole or window is the posterior and lower. [Tab. 8. fig. 3. 4. G. Tab. 10. fig.

2. ^l.] It is rounde and lesse then the former and somewhat narrower in a man; but in a Calfe and a Sheep sayth Placentinus it is somewhat larger, and a little extuberating or bun∣ching out; alwaies open it is and declining toward the backeside of the cauity, and yssueth together with the former through the bone making a double canale.

Betwixt these two windowes [Table 10. figur. 2. ^k and ^l] aboue the lower hole is there a little knub or protuberation, which together with the round hole and the strutting bunch placed vnder the vpper part, may be compared to the little bosse (saith Placentinus and be∣fore him Vesalius, Coiter and Platerus) wherewith they vse to adorne the cheeks of a horses bit. In this knub lieth the chamber of the third cauity which is called Cochlea, of which wee shall heare more in the next Chapter.

The vse of these windowes is, by pulsation to receiue the sound communicated to the im∣planted ayre, and to transmit the same to the other cauities that follow.

The lower hole is cleaued into a double pipe which lie one vppon another [Table 10. figu. 2. ii] and are deuided onely by a thinne bony scale, the one of them together with the Ouall window passeth to the Cochlea, the other goeth into the Labyrinth or the second ca∣uity of the stony bone. The more forward of these admitteth a surcle of the Iugular veine, and sendeth out a braunch of the first coniugation. The posterior is compared to a Water∣course [Table 8. fig. 3. ^H Table 10. figu. 2. g] because it is like the pipes wherein water is con∣uayed, imagine it to be in a Serpentine Still, some call it the Saylie pipe. The Auntients and Galen call it Caecum meatum the blinde passage, others Capreolaris, that is writhen or in∣torted, not because it is blinde, but because if you put a Hogges bristle into it, it will hardly finde an yssue. And truely in the dry skull of an Oxe you cannot finde way for a bristle by any meanes.

It passeth writhen, first forward, then backward and obliquely aboue the hole of the first cauity. From thence turning downewardes it determineth into the fift hole of Hearing, [Table 10. figu. 2. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉] it is full of holes. In the beginning is that which is marked with [ae] common to it with the vpper part of the passage of the auditory nerue. Afterward in the middle of the passage on the outside in the forepart of this canale [♌] it maketh the fift hole of Hearing and letteth fall an arterie; so also in the inside [γ] at the beginning of the second cauity it opneth it selfe. In the end also it hath another hole [β] which determineth into the 3. bone of Hearing. Through this canale is the greater part of the auditory nerue as also an artery diuersly deduced and dilated. For because it was necessary that the branch of the nerue of the fift coniugation should grow hard, it was also fit it should be conuayed thorough the hardest, driest and most torted passage, especially seeing there was no other way where through it might be conuayed.

CHAP. XXII. Of the Labyrinth and the Cochlea or Snaile-shell, that is, of the second and third Cauities of the Stony Bone

THe second Cauity because it is full of windings and turnings like a Conny∣burrough, is called Labyrinthus and the Mine. It is insculped or excauated in the posterior and anterior sides of the stony bone or in the root of his processe, and is distinguished or deuided from the hole of the nerue of Hearing, onely by a thinne scale. [Table 10. fig. 2. betwixt ^m and ^e] It is round and lesse then the former: and when it hath (vnder the knub and behind the Oual window) ioyned it selfe to the following cauity; attayning inward it is dilated & maketh as it weere a Market place, or the broad floore of a Mettall Myne as before is sayde; from which many wayes run out, which proceeding thorough the hard substance of the bone like a hollowed circle, doe a∣gaine returne into a large Chamber.

These wayes we call burroughes with Fallopius, Coiter and Platerus, or with Placentinus bony Semicircles. [Table 8. fig. 4. and 5. ^NNN Table 10. fig. 2. ^m 1. 2. 3. and particularly ^m with the Characters 1. 2. 3. fig. 6. V] Of these we make three, which do so passe that two of them do twice intersect thēselues with right angles, but the more manifest intersection is made aboue the top of the third cauity where the hole endeth which receiueth and transmitteth the nerue of the fift coniugation.

In their originall they are ample or large and become narrower by degrees, because it was not fit that the Sound should passe through a broad space; afterward running through the substance of the bone in circular reflections, they returne to their beginning, yet so that in their whole progresse they neuer manifestly open one into another.

One of these is the lower which runneth from the forepart of the cauity diuerting of turning aside outward yet still in the same cauity, afterward it is reflected and runneth tho∣rough the posterior angle.

The second issueth out of the same anterior angle, and arising vpward after it hath made a semicircle, it returneth through the posterior angle.

The third ariseth and determineth in the backeward angle of the cauity: for beginning there it perforateth the bone with a circular cauity tending outward, and so returneth thi∣ther againe. And all these in young Infants may be separated whole from the cauity and from the crust wherewith the bone is lined, but in time they grow stony & are vnited. These canals or burroughes could not be made long because of the shortnesse of the stony bone, although it had beene very profitable, because length maketh the sound bee better percei∣ued. VVherefore Nature recompenced their shortnes with circumuolutions, and indeed the gyrations do better helpe the Hearing then length would haue done, because in them as it were by degrees the sound is by little and little laboured, and ascends broken and diui∣ded into the braine. Furthermore, the burroughes in their inward superficies are inuested with a very soft and fine membrane.

These burroughs by their egresse and regresse into this cauity make sixe holes: beside, from the first cauity into this are two holes, and moreouer certaine small ones from the lo∣wer hole of the auditory nerue and from the common canale. [Table 10. fig. 2. Γ] The ca∣uities or holes, saith Aquapendens, are so innumerable and intricated one with another, that it may well be called a Labyrinth. For their number they are rather to be admired then numbred, neither can a man finde any order in them, and if any man shoulde attempt any such thing, it were a worke of a vaine and addle witte, albeit Placentinus thinketh it faesible. For cutte any parte of this bone, and beside the vtmost crust you shall finde the rest of the whole bone to be full of holes, pores and dennes, yea altogether spongy, as is touched part∣ly before.

The vse of the Conuolutions and Meanders is, that the sound being conuayed through so narrow passages might be more sharpe and not bee dissipated; and this wee may see in Instruments of musicke, for a Flute or Cornet by how much it is the longer and the narro∣wer, by so much is their sound more shrill: the reason is, first because the ayre remayning quiet and at rest in the canale doth more easily receiue the alteration proceeding from the sound then it would doe if it had scope wherein it might be troubled and disturbed. Again, the aire concluded in a narrow roome is not dissipated but vnited, and so remayning yeel∣deth a greater and quicker representation of the sound vnto the nerue, then it would do if it were dispersed.

The third cauitie is called Cochlea or the Snaile-shell from the sinuing obliquitie of his passage; which elegantly resembleth the winding of a Snayle or Periwinke shell [Table 8. fig. 4. and 5. O Table 10. figu. 2. vnderⁿ] especially if you take off the vpper part of the shell till you come to the narrower part thereof where the scruing begins to be thick. Vesalius calleth it Antrum Buccinosum the Den like a Trumpet. The Antients called it the blinde hole or the blinde cauity, because they thought it had no through passage. But the truth is, that though it be much intorted and writhen, yet it hath an yssue in the middest, in that place where the gyrations are fastned from the beginning to the end, and this yssue is nar∣row and direct. For if this cauity had beene blinde without an out-let, the ayre being bea∣ten could not haue attained to the nerue of Hearing.

This is farre lesse then the former two, scituate in the forepart of the processe vnder the knub of the first cauity, that it might meet with the Soūd which proceedeth from behinde forward, and is distinguished from the canale, which wee sayd was like a watercourse (pla∣ced in the middest of the stony processe) by a thinne bone like a bridge [Table 10. fig. 2. be∣twixtⁿ and^f.]

It is long and crooked and hath three gyrations sometimes, sometimes foure, one of them receiuing another after the manner of the Coehlea or Snaile-shell, by which it is in∣torted some what inward and downeward. But the broader scrue standing highest recei∣ueth the nerue; the narrower standing lowest determineth in the cauity of the bone, and worketh it selfe also a passage. Into this endeth the hole of the first cauity called Fenestel∣la cualis, which platerus calleth the lower hole and Placentinus the vpper [Table 10. fig. 2.^l] I meane into the greater gyre of this bone.

This bone of the Cochlea or the Snaile shell consisteth of two kinds of circles, whereof

one is made of a bony substance very thin and dry, which may easily be crumbled, and on euery side like a Snake rowled vp into boughts. The other was first propounded by Eu∣stachius, which is made of a soft & mucous matter yet firme, and hath I know not what kind of sandy matter mingled therewith. It ariseth out of the middle space of the first conuo∣lutions, as it were out of a large basis, and being by degrees extenuated, endeth in a sharpe point; but it ascendeth not so high as that it toucheth the circumference of the bone wher∣into the first gyrations doe determine.

This wonderfull prouidence of our Creator, Empedocles as Galen witnesseth in his booke de historia Philosophica, did first intimate, when hee saith that the sense of hearing is made by the impulsion of the ayre, or of a spirit which striketh & beateth the part like a Snailes shell, suspended within the eare like a bell. And with him agreeth Aristotle in the eleuenth chapter of his first booke de historia Animalium, where he saith, that the inward eare which is like the contortions of a Snayles shell, endeth in a bone which is like the out∣ward eare.

This third cauity as also the second and the burroughs thereof, are inuested with a soft and thin membrane, after the same manner that the sockets of the teeth are. Vesalius saith it is a part of the nerue of the fifth coniugation, and that it doth inuest but some parts onely of the cauity, not all throughout. Into this cauity as well as into the former, do run three or foure holes so small that a haire will scarse passe through them, issuing out of that canale through which we sayd the auditory nerue doth passe; through which holes certain nerues of the fist coniugation, or at least their faculty is communicated to the forēsayde membrane. So differeth Bauhine from Vesalius.

And although it is generally beleeued that the sense of hearing is especially made in the first cauity, yet it cannot be denyed but that it is also made in the others; seeing into them as is sayd, there are surcles of nerues deriued, and in them also Animall spirits and Inbred ayre is contained. Notwithstanding the two hindmost cauities were rather made to hinder an Eccho or reflexion of the sound to the first cauity. And whereas these ca∣uities haue holes of diuers magnitude, length and figure, it is reasonable to thinke that they were so framed for the difference of sounds. For a base sound and a great quantity of ayre iequire a large hole.

The length prohibiteth the Eccho and the reflection of the sound, wherefore the greater sound required longer canales, and the lesser shorter, that the sound in them might as it were, be appeased, and an Eccho prohibited. The varietie of the figure maketh much either for the naturall delation or transmition of the sound and the ayre, which runneth for the most part through circled meanders; or that the sound in them might rest: now we may easily imagine that a sound will sooner ceasse or bee appeased when it runs through many turnings or gyrations then it would doe if it were conueyed by a streight line.

But the vse of this third cauitie Coiter elegantly sheweth and confirmeth by an in∣stance in a circled instrument, put case it bee a Sackebut. For if a man lay his eares to the holes of such an instrument, hee shall here a wonderfull whistling and hissing noyse and murmure: where if a man blow into it with his mouth it will sound like a Trumpet. And thus much concerning the stony bone and the cauities thereof: now we proceed.

CHAP. XXIII. Of the Nerue which ariueth at the Eares.

AT length we are come to the Auditory Nerue which maketh that coniuga∣tion which is commonly called the fift, [Tab. 21. lib. 7. fig. 1. 2. a. Tab. 15. lib. 7 fig. 20. M.] It issueth out of the tranuerse processe of the Cerebellum, and is a thicke and large nerue; therefore neerest of all to the After-braine because it was to conuey a great quantity of Animall spirits. It insinuateth it selfe into the first hole of the stony bone, which a large perforation and made of purpose with∣in the scull for the transmission of this nerue, which it hideth all the way it runneth for∣ward, till in the middle almost of the stony processe it is diuided into two vnequall parts: the one large & ample, the other small but harder; harder I say then the other, not through out the length of it, but onely in that part which is longer then the former. For, that wee may say so much by the way, the softnes or hardnes of a nerue dependeth vpon 3. things. First, vpon the originall, so those nerues that arise out of the Braine it selfe are the softer, those that arise out of the After-braine or out of the spinal marrow are the harder. Se∣condly, vpon their distance, as they are farther from their originall, or neerer vnto it.

So the Opticke nerues are the softest of the whole body, because they are neerest to their originall; the nerues of the hands and feete the hardest, because they are farthest off. Or, thirdly, it hangeth vpon their contaction: for frō their contactions with hard bodies as bones & gristles, or with soft as fat and vessels, they become harder and softer as Platentinus hath obserued, but this by the way. This slender production of the nerue through the vp∣per hole of the fore mentioned passage entereth into that secret bony canale which we cal∣led the Watercourse, and so creepeth toward the forepart of the head. Afterward it is re∣flected and entereth into the first cauitie, and falling downeward and backeward, it issueth out of the bone at the roote of the lap of the eare, and is subdiuided into three especiall branches. The larger and vpper runnes out into the foreside and the backeside of the roote of the outward eare. The lower deriued through the iaw, is distributed into the Masseter muscle and the first muscle that mooueth the cheeks. The third which is the mid∣dlemost is very small and Capillary, and is dissiminated into the glandulous and membra∣nous parts about the roote of the eare. There are also other threedy surcles which are spent into the muscles of the larynx or throtle, and of the bone Hyois. And this is the cause of the consent betweene the eares, the tong and the larynx. Hence also it is that when the auditory nerue is originally and in the first conformation obstructed, those that are borne deafe are also dumbe; and thus much of the lesser part of the nerue.

The thicker part of the nerue which is soft, and is properly the Nerue of hearing, because it of it selfe is the cause of this sense; is led through the hole of the foresayd passage and runneth out into the dens or caues of the stony processe: yet the larger branches doe deter∣mine in the first cauitie as being the largest and of most vse, where they are dilated like a membrane and make the chiefe instrument of hearing. Wherefore the receiued opinion is, that in this cauity the sense of hearing is especially administred, because into it the Ani∣mall spirit entreth through the nerue, & is there mixed with the Inbred ayre. Out of this 1. cauity through small proforations of the foresaid cauitie run certaine small threds into the other two cauities, which are communicated to the membrane wherewith they are com∣passed.

The vse of this nerue is (according to Galen in the sixth chapter of his eight booke de v∣su partium & Auerrhoes 2. Collect.) to be the Organ of hearing, and to receiue the sensible obiect that commeth from without, and to leade the images of the sounds vnto the braine as vnto their competent Iudge and Censor saith Laurentius.

But from a branch of the fourth coniugation of the braine, there departeth a very small surcle, which with a winding passage entereth into the cauity of the Eare neere the bony canale which goeth to the palate, then it cleaueth obliquely to the Tympane, and after to the Hammer aboue the insertion of the muscle, and proceeding on perforateth the stony bone in the backeside of the hole of the hearing: then, a little reflected, it creepeth downeward till it meete and ioyne it selfe with a smaller and harder branch of the fift con∣iugation. This Eustachius calleth a Nerue, others call it the chord or thred which, say they, runneth through the middest of the membrane of the Tympane; but whence it ariseth and whither it would, or whether it be a nerue or an artery, they freely confesse that they are ignorant.

CHAP. XXIV. Of the Implanted or Inbred Ayre.

GAlen in his seuenth booke de Placitis, speaking of the instruments of the senses determineth; that the instrument of sight is lucid or bright, that of the hearing acreall, that of the Smell vaporous, that of the Tast moist, and that of the Touch earthy. Wherefore when wee say that the instrument of the hearing is ayry, or like vnto ayre, we vnderstand that it is a part of mans body (taking the word Part in a large signification) which imitateth the nature and condition of the ayre.

This ayre of which Plato among the Phylosophers made first mention, is seated in the eares from the first originall of our generation in the wombe of our mothers. I meane as soone as there were emptie cauities hollowed in the bones, all which are filled with this ayre. And therefore the ancient Phylosophers and Physitians, yea Aristotle himselfe in the eight chapter of his second booke de Anima, and the 83 text called it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or Inbred. Others call it Congenit, implanted, complanted and inaedificated. It is made of the ayry part of the seede and that very pure, to which the purest ayry part of the mo∣thers blood applyeth it selfe, as to a body most like vnto it selfe, saith Archangelus.

This aire is conteined in the cauities of the ears; which may be proued, because all the dens and cauities excepting the first in which are the small bones the Muscle & the Chord are empty, seeing therfore there is in Nature no vacuity, it is necessary that these empty caui∣ties must be full of aire.

This aire is thin, pure, without any sound at all, immoouable, plentifull & separated from the externall aire. Thin & pure that it might more readily and more perfectlie ad∣mit any externall sound, for through a crasse and cloudy aire the sound is not so freelie caried, but heard with more difficulty; whence it is that a mans voice in winter is baser then in Summer, because as saith the Philosopher in the 17. Probleme of the 11. Section both the inward and the outward aire is thicker in winter then in summer, now beeing thicker it is mooued more slowly.

This aire is without any sound, and therefore in the night we may hear better because there is no noise stirring, as Aristotle teacheth in the 33. probleme of the 11. section. Ad hereto that which he in the same place addeth, that in the day time the aire is dense, be∣cause it is filled with light and the beames of the Sunne, but in the night more rare, be∣cause the fire and the beames are departed thereout.

Wherefore the outward aire which is altred by sounds, and like a waue of the Sea boundeth to the eares is not admitted into the inward eare, neyther dooth it touch the implanted aire; for if it had, the sense of hearing would haue bene imperfect and the In∣strument would soone haue bene vitiated, which Aristotle proueth by an instāce in those that yawne, in the 29 probleme of the 11. section, and in his fift booke de generatione ani∣malium and the second chapter. For when we yawne we cannot heare so distinctlie, be∣cause much of the aire we breath forth getteth into the ears, insomuch that we may sen∣sibly perceyue the motion thereof; for when the internall aire resisteth the occursation of the outward there ariseth a noyse in the eares, which noise as also the circumaction or disturbance of the spirit hindreth our hearing whilst it be agayne appeased.

Againe, it was necessary that this implanted aire should be immoouable by it selfe or of it owne nature, that it might exactly receiue al the differences of sounds, of motions saith Aristotle in the eight chapter of his second booke De Aniwa. Others saie, it is immooue∣able because it is not mooued by any other but remaineth alwayes the same in the eares. Others because it hath no naturall sound but is fit to receiue all differences of sounds saith Laurentius. But that the inward aire ought to be quiet and immoouable may bee prooued by the indisposition we haue in our hearing when we are troubled with hissing or singing noyses in our heads. Yet is this aire mooueable not of it owne accord, but because it is mo∣ued with the least impulsion of the outward aire and is stirred with locall motion; for whē the outward aire mooueth the membrane of the Drum, the internall aire is also mooued, that it may receiue a forme like to the forme of the sound which is made.

It is Plentifull, for plenty is required for the full reception of the sound; some say that it may be able to receiue many sounds offered vnto it at the same time, but Placentinus saith it doth not receiue many sounds because of the multiplicity of the partes thereof, because each sound is receiued by euery little particle thereof.

It is separated from the externall aire by the interposition of the membrane of the Tym∣pane least the instrument of hearing should be offended. For if the externall ayre shoulde haue gotten into the inward aire; if it had bene either too cold or too hot it would haue vi∣olated the auditory Nerue, and by continuity the After-braine also and the Braine it selfe. Moreouer, if the externall aire should haue bene imediately ioyned and commixed with the internall, seeing the externall is in perpetuall motion, thicke, impure, oftentimes also smoakie and full of small creatures, it could not haue bene auoyded but that the Hearing would thereby haue bene impaired if not perished; for the inbred aire also woulde haue become thicke, smoaky, and also filled with those small Animals. It would also haue som∣times happened in violent motions of the outward aire, that the in-bred aire and with it the Animal spirit must haue bene shouldred out of their proper place and the hole of hea∣ring quite rammed vp. Furthermore, this benefite wee haue by the membrane that sepa∣rateth the externall from the implanted aire, that if a man be vnder water the water can∣not pierce into his head or take away his sense of hearing, as those Diuers find by experi∣ence, who for Fish or Pearle or any such like occasion do vse to Diue into the bottome of the water.

Neyther is this implanted aire of the same nature that the outward aire is of, but hath

onely a similitude therewith, which we may gather out of these words of Galen. Neyther is euery Instrument of sense changed, altered or affected by euery sensible obiect: but that which is bright and lightsome is altred by colours, that which is aiery by sounds, that which is vaporous by odours, and in a word that which is like is familiar to his like.

Wherefore we esteeme the nature of this aire to bee the same with the Animal spirite which also is aiery, and that there is the same maner of the conseruation and refection of the one and of the other. For this implanted aire is successiuely generated and againe dissi∣pated, as the Animall spirit is continually spent in the Animall actions, and againe euery day regenerated. In like manner this aire that is bred in the eare is (at least a parte of it) continually dissipated and generated againe; for if it should altogether bee exhausted or spent we should vtterly loose our hearing. Now it is strengthned and hath his refec∣tion from the aire which we draw in by our nosethrils and through our mouthes, espe∣cially by that which entreth at the mouth, for there is a patent and open passage tho∣rough the Canale which we haue before spoken of out of the mouth into the Eares, by which passage also we saide before that the eares were purged.

Simplicius the Philosopher hath deliuered, not that this aire is like the animal spi∣rit, but that it is a thing Animated or hauing a life of it owne, wherby it subsisteth. Coiter calleth it a part of the Soul, Archangelus conceiueth that it is norished by blood, whose opinion we will heere set downe, that those that list may iudge of it.

The aiery bodie (saith he) is nourished by blood brought by the Veines, and that per Diadosin that is by Transumption, as the Cristalline humour of the eye is nourished by the glassie humour, by this Diadosis or transumption. For there redoundeth out of the glassy humor as much as is sufficient for the nourishment of the Cristalline, like as the glassy humor transumeth from the Membrane called Aranea or the Cobweb an Aliment accommodated and proportionable to it selfe. And this commeth to passe after this manner. In the Coate called Aranea or the Cobweb there are Veines by whose bloud it is nourished. After the Cobweb is satisfied, that which redoundeth or is superfluous is transumed by the Glassy humor: when the Glassy humour is satisfied with norishment, that which remaineth is transumed by the Cristalline humor as a fit nourishment for it, so that the Cristalline is nourished by an Aliment, prepared by the vitrious humor, & the vitrious or glassy humor is nourished by an aliment prepared by the Cobweb, to wit, either of the others superfluities or leauings.

The same happeneth in the aiery instruments of Hearing. For the Membrane that inue∣steth it receiueth Veines and is nourished with their blood: that which aboundeth be∣side the nourishment of the Membrane, being now far altred from the nature of blood is attracted and transumed by that aierie body into his proper nourishment. But that this instrument of Hearing might haue not onelie venall nourishment but Arteriall life also, and with it al the parts that are subordinate and ministering to it; there are certain Arteries which are deriued into the structure of the organ of Hearing. Thus far Archan.

Concerning the vse of this implanted aire our Authors are full of diuersity. Aristotle in the 10. chapter of his second Booke De partibus Animalium and in the second chapter of his fift Booke De Generatione Animalium cals it audiendi sensorium, the verie Sense of Hearing it selfe. And truly the Ancients haue all deliuered that it is the chiefe and prin∣cipall Organ of Hearing, and from hence it was that Aristotle saide that the Nature of Hearing was aiery.

Mundinus saith, there is an audible spirit in the cauity of the Stony-bone which is the instrument of Hearing.

Carpus thus. The implanted aire receyueth the species or formes which are brought to the Sense of Hearing.

Varolius. The included aiery spirit is the proper instrument of Hearing.

Coiter. This aire is the first and principall organ of Hearing, yea a part of the Soule.

Archangelus. It is the most principall instrument of Hearing, which the Faculty vseth in the perception of sounds and voices, and in iudging of them.

Aquapendens. The office of this aire is to receiue outward and externall sounds, & so it is the principall author of Hearing.

Placentinus. It is the matter which receyueth the sound, the Medium where-through it is transported. For after it hath receyued a sound it doth not conceyue it or iudge of it as being a thing inanimated, now no action of the soul can be performd by that which is not animated.

Laurentius. This Aire is exceeding necessary to the Sense of Hearing, without which I can scarcely conceiue how we should heare at all; but that it is the principal organ of Hearing I could neuer bee perswaded, especially because it is not Animated, but rather I beleeue it to be an internall Medium.

Finally, our Authour Bauhine setteth downe the vse of it in these tearmes.

This Aire the faculty of Hearing vseth as an internal Mediū for the susception and trans∣vection or transportation of Soundes and Voyces to the Auditorie nerue, by it to bee dis∣cerned, like as in all the instruments of the other Senses there is required a double Medi∣um, the one outward the other inward. Inward, as in the Sight the watery humour, in the Taste the spittle, in the Smell the spongie bones, in the Touch the skinne is the internall Medium, (although I know Laurentius would haue it the Cuticle) in which the formes or I∣deas of things are separated from the things themselues, and so naked are transported vnto the first Sensator.

In like manner the implanted ayre is gathered in the inward eare, to receiue the ab∣stracted formes of the Sounds, and to transport them or conuey them vnto the Sense.

Againe, as in all the instruments of the Sences the internall Medium is distinct, and a differing thing from the principall Organ to which the action particularly belongeth; as in the Organ of Sight the waterie humor is thought to be the internall Medium, but the chry∣staline the principall part receiuing the representations, but not iudging of them: so in the Hearing the internall Medium is this implanted Aire; but the principall part is the Audi∣torie nerue, which yet doth not iudge of the Idea, but conducteth it to the braine, that is to the first Sensator.

CHAP. XXV. Of the manner of Hearing and of the Nature of Soundes.

COnsidering that to intreate of the manner of Hearing belongeth rather to a Phylosopher then to Anatomists, wee will be but briefe herein, yet somthing we thinke good to say because the structure of the eare was for the most part vnknowne to the Ancients.

The Eare is the instrument of Hearing, and the action of the Eare is the Sense of Hearing; vnto this Sense there are three thinges required: an Obiect, a Medium and an Instrument. The Obiect is that which is audible, that is, all Sounds. A Sound is a quality yssuing out of the Aire (Coiter addeth, or the Water) beaten by sudden and forcible collision or concurrence of hard and solid bodies, and those smooth, concauous and large. This definition we will labot to explaine in this following discourse. The Medium is ey∣ther Externall or Internall. The Externall Medium according to Aristotle is Ayre or Wa∣ter, but in water the Sound is but dull, as a man may perceiue when his head is vnder wa∣ter: yet they say that Fishes can heare in the water very well, as they can assure vs that vse in the night time to fish for Mullets. And although the water going into the water doe make a Sound; yet this Sound is made in the Aire and by the interposition therof, though it be made by the water.

The Internall Medium is the implanted Ayre concluded within the dennes or cauities of the Eares. The Instrument although we may say it is the whole inward eare furnished 3 with his cauities and other particles aboue expressed, and although that generally the Phi∣losophers and Physitians doe determine that the inbred Ayre is the especiall and proper Organ of Hearing; because as in the Eie the Chrystaline receiueth the Obiect, that is, the Light: so this in-bred ayre receiueth the Sound. Yet we are of opinion that not this ayre but the auditorie nerue is the principall instrument. For wee thinke with Galen, that not onely the alteration or Reception which is made by the in-bred ayre is the Sense of Hea∣ring, but also the dignotion or iudgement of that alteration. VVherefore Soundes and Voyces are transferred by this ayre to the Auditory nerue as vnto the substance that is ap∣prehensiue, and from thence to the common Sense where they are exquisitly iudged off. For if they must bee knowne and perceiued, then must they touch some substance indued with Sense, because all action is by contaction. Now the Sensatiue faculty is not trans∣ported out of the bodie, and therefore it was necessary that the Sound should apply it selfe to the Eare.

The Sound is generated of hard bodies mutually striking one another, as of the Effici∣ent cause, (for soft bodies doe easily yeeld, not resisting the force that is offered vnto them)

and is receiued in the ayre as in his matter this Aire accompanieth the Sound, and carry∣eth it as it were on his wings; for as the ayre is mooued so also is the Sound carried as wee may perceiue by a ring of Belles farre off from vs: for when the winde bloweth towards vs we shall heare them very lowd again when the ayre is whiffed another way, the sound also of the bels wil be taken from vs. So also when two hard bodyes are smitten the one against the other, we see the purcussion before we heare the sound, for we do not heare the sound before the ayre that was moued do bring the sound with it to our eares, neither is that mo∣tion made in a moment but in time, and is carryed swifter or slower as the percussion of of the resisting bodyes was more or lesse vehement and quicke; (for this the Phylosopher requireth in sounds) and consequently the repercussion or repulse of the ayre. So wee see in a Drumme if the skin or Vellam be moist and laxe, either they will not sound at all, or they make but a dull noyse.

The Aer being affected with the quality of the sound driueth & altereth that ayre that is next it, and so by succession till the alterations come to the Ayre that is next to the outward Eare: euen as when a stone is cast into the water it stirreth vp circles which driue one the other till the water moueagainst the brinke, or if the water bee broade doe of it owne accord determine. In like manner by the percussion of the Ayre there are generated certaine circles which mooue one another till by succession they come to the Organ of hearing: which continuation of the Ayre thus beaten Auicen and the antient Anatomists call vndam vocalem, the vocall waue.

But if the stone be great and violently throwne into the water, so that it driueth the circles vehemently to the brimme of the pond, then will those circles be repelled againe and so runne doubled and hudling to the first circles. In like manner if we hallow or speake alowde against any arched place, or against a wood or a mountaine, the voyce will bee doubled and an eccho will answer vs.

But all ayre doth not alike receiue a sound. For a pure thin and cleere ayre, which is vehemently and suddainly strucken by two hard bodyes whose superficies is broad, will sooner receiue the sound, and represent it more smartly then if the Ayre or the bodyes bee not so prepared. A Needle strucke against a Needle will not make a sound though they bee hard bodyes, because their superficies is narrow and not broad, and so in the rest. But aboue all that Ayre which is contained in a concauous or hollow place, doth best receiue the species of soundes; because in the reflexion there are many percussions besides the first; for the reuerberation of the Ayre maketh much for the increasing of the sound, which we may see in dens, caues, woods, hollow mountaines, wels, and such like; which will not on∣ly returne againe the sounds that they receiue, but sometimes also the very articulated words. And thus much concerning the nature and generation of sounds, which is a meere Phylosophicall disquisition, and therefore we passe it ouer more briefly. Now let vs come to shew how the outward Ayre that is beaten, is communicated with the implanted Ayre and the internall parts.

But before we descend to this it shall not be amisse to let you take a view of the diuers opinions as well of the Antients as of the Moderne writers, concerning the manner how 1 hearing is made, for vpon that very point we now are.

The first is that of Empedocles, who thought that this sense of hearing is made because the Ayre offereth a kind of violence to the inward part of the Eare, for because the inward Eare is intorted like a winkle-shell, and hangeth as a bell in thee steeple of the body, it easi∣ly perceiueth all appulsions of the Ayre.

The second is that of Alcmeon, who thought that wee therefore heare because our 2 Eares are within empty, for all emptie things doe resound if the sound get into them.

The third is that of Diogenes, who saith, that in the head there is an Ayre which is 3 smitten by the voyce and so mooued: against whom Hippocrates writeth in his booke de car∣nibus, where he saith, that there are some Authours of Naturall Phylosophy, who affirme that the Braine yeeldeth a sound, which cannot be. For the braine it selfe is moist, now no moist thing will resound, but that onely which is drie.

The fourth is the opinion of Hippocrates in his booke de locis in homine. First of all 4 saith he the care is perforated, and in that part we heare, yet the emptie places about the eares doe heare nothing but a confused noyse, but that which entereth through the mem∣branes into the braine, that is distinctly heard; where there is a perforation through the

membrane which inuesteth the Braine. And in his booke de carnibus, we heare because the holes of our Eares reach vnto the dry and stony bone to which is added a canale or fistu∣lous cauity, against which hard bone the sounds do beate, and the hollow bone because of his hardnesse yeelds a reasonance. Now in the hole of Hearing neere that hard bone, there is a thin Filme like a Cobweb the driest of all the Membranes of the body: but that which is the driest is fittest to conceiue or receiue a sound as may be prooued by manie arguments. When this Membrane therefore yeeldes the greatest resonance then wee heare best.

The fift is Platoes opinion. The aire that is implanted in the eare is beaten, that pulsa∣tion is transmitted into the principall seate of the soule and so we heare. 5

The sixt is Aristotles. We heare (saith he) when the aire is mooued by two solid bo∣dies, 6 that which is beaten hath a plaine superficies that from thence the aire might re∣sult; the concussion of these two bodyes must be vehement, that the aire between them may not diffuse it selfe, but bee apprehended and smitten before his dissipation, for so onely the sound resulteth and filleth the aire by continuation euen to the eare. Now in the organ of Hearing there is a certaine implanted Aire. Hence it commeth that when the externall aire is mooued the internall receyueth therefrom a motion and agitation (which otherwise of it selfe is immoouable) so as it exactly perceyueth al the differences of the motion of the externall aire. Thus is the Hearing begunne and perfected in the Ayre.

Seauenthly, Galen in the sixt chapter of his eight Booke De vsu partium. It was neces∣sarie 7 (saith he) that from the Braine a certaine surcle should be propagated downwarde to the eares, which might receiue the sensible obiect comming from without, whether it were a voice or a sound made by the percussion of the aire; for the motion that is cau∣sed by such a percussion diffuseth it selfe like a storme of winde or raine, or like a waue of the Sea till it ascend vnto the Braine.

Thus far the Ancients, who most of them, if not all, were ignorant or at least much to seeke in the exact Anatomy of the Eye. Among the later writers Vesalius and his ad∣herents haue it thus. 8

A Nerue of the fift coniugation proceedeth through a torted and writhen passage, and extendeth it selfe into a Membrane where-with, the hoale of the eare is stopped, which Membrane being thin, dry, and well stretched & beaten by the outward aire ma∣keth a sound, being assisted by the hardnes of the bone and his turning gyrations much like the shell of a Snaile or Periwinkle.

Columbus. So also we heare by the help of a Nerue of the fift coniugation, which at the middle of the Labyrinth becommeth thicker, but yet maketh not the Membrane.

Messa saith, that the sound is made by the motion of the small bones, and thence we heare. 9

Volcherus Coiter. The outwarde Aire affected with the quality of the sounde run∣neth 10 vpon the Membrane or Head of the Drumme, which when it is beaten mooueth the small bones that are tyed to it. The bones strike the Nerue that runnes ouerthwart the Membrane. The same Nerue makes a repercussion vpon the Membrane, whence it is that the ayre included receyueth the alteration and the sound. The Sounds without any disturbance are carried through the contorted Meanders of the Eares to the Audi∣tory Nerue, which receyueth the Image of the noise, and presenteth it to the principall Sensator.

Laurentius hath almost the very same in substance. The outward aer (sayth he) being stri∣ken 11 by hard and solid bodies and affected with the quality of the sound, altreth the aire that is next vnto it, till by a continuation it come to the eares, where it first encountreth with the Membrane: the Membrane being strucken mooueth the three little bones and transmitteth in a moment the liuely Charracter of the sound, which Character is recey∣ued by the implanted aire, and through the windows it sendeth it through these croo∣ked and winding Labyrinths into the Snaile shel, from whence it arriueth at the audito∣ry Nerue, and from thence is conueyghed to the common Sense as vnto an equal iudge or Censor.

Archangelus hath it on this manner as neere as I can vnderstande him. The thing that 11 maketh the sound sealeth or stampeth in the ayre the species or forme of the sound, and withall driueth it on vnto the Instrument of hearing which is also aiery that it might bet∣ter

receiue those species, and must likewise be mooued; wherefore the hole of the Eare standing alwayes open (and in his inside supporting the stretched membrane of the Tympane, behinde which the aiery instrument of Hearing is concluded or shut vp, and to which the Anuile cleaueth) when the outwarde aire attaineth to that membrane the Hammer beateth vppon the Anuile, and so it commeth to passe necessarily that the In∣strument of Hearing (by which he vnderstandeth the implanted Ayre) it mooued vvith the same motion that the outward Aire is moued, whence it is that altogether the same species or similitude of sound mooueth the Faculty of hearing, which is brought thither by the outward aire. Nowe the Nerues of Hearing do determine into the same place where this aerie instrument of Hearing is concluded, and a membrane made of the am∣plification of these Nerues encompasseth that aery bodie, as the Opticke Nerues doe a∣riue at the Cristalline humour. And as the Opticke Nerues do conuay vpon the wings as it were of the Animall spirit from the place of the Common sense the Visiue Facultie to the Cristalline humor: so these Nerues from the same Common sense doe transport the Faculty of Hearing to the principal organ of Hearing, that there might be a percep∣tion made of audible things. And so the Hearing when it hath apprehended the sounde of an audible thing carrieth it to the Soule, and then the Reason or the intellectuall or sensatiue Soule comprehendeth and taketh knowledge of that which maketh the sound to be a Bell or a Drum, or any other thing.

Finally, Bauhine my Authour (I call him so often my authour to stoppe their mouths 13 who would think that I should arragate too much to my selfe if I shoulde not acknow∣ledge him from whom I haue taken most of this History) expresseth it on this manner. The outward Aire is an external Medium which being driuen and moued by the mutual percussion of two hard bodies and affected with the qualitie of the sound, carryeth the sound which resulteth from that percussion vnto the Eare. The sound passeth through the hole of hearing which is alwayes open vnto the Membrane of the Tympane which it mooueth.

That Membrane being mooued, the implanted or in-bred aire is also moued and re∣ceiueth the sound, or at least his Caracter or impression, and transporteth it out of the first cauity of the stony-bone thorough the hole of the Stirrop and the Ouall window to the other two cauities which we called the Labyrinth and the Snayle-shel. From thence it is conueighed to the auditorie Nerue and to the originall thereof, that is the Afterbrain and so to the common sense as vnto a Iudge that is able to determine of the differences of sounds.

And because the Auditory Nerues are ioyned in the Bridge of the After-brain from whence they proceed, therefore all sounds are apprehended in one comprehension, not in two though there be two eares, that is, two organes of Hearing. But least the Mem∣brane before mentioned should be driuen too much inward by the violence of the out∣ward aire when it is violently beaten, Nature prouided three small bones and Muscles as we haue shewed before to preuent that inconuenience.

The vse of the Sense of Hearing according to Aristotle in his Booke De sensu & sensili is to acquire or get knowledge and wisedome. For speech being an audible thing is the verie Cause of Learning. Againe by the Hearing things are signifyed to our selues, as by our voice and tongues we are able to signify any thing to another, as Aristotle hath well obserued in the end of his third booke De Anima.

And so much shall haue beene sufficient to haue spoken concerning the Sense of Hearing, wherein I finde that I haue great cause to entreate my Reader fauourablie to reade ouer this Discourse, and to pardon me if in some things I haue not so fully satisfi∣ed him; for there are some passages in my Author, wherein I haue bene intangled, part∣ly by the difficultie of the matter, partly by the fault of the Printer, for in such a case as this the least error may prooue a sufficient remora or obstacle to interrupt the course of a Discourse, but as neere as I could I haue followed their words, at least their meaning, if they vnderstood themselues, as of some of them I make much doubt.

CHAP. XXVI. Of the Nose which is the instrmment of Smelling.

HAuing absolued the Historie of those many particles which belong vnto the sense of hearing we will now come to the third outward sense which is the Smelling. As therefore wee sayd in the Eare that there was an outward Eare and an inward Eare, so must we also diuide the Nose into an outward and inward. The outward Nose carryeth with it, sayth Laurentius, a kind of beauty, yea of maiestie; and the Egyptians in their Hyeroglyphicks signified a wise and prudent man by a nose: and Festus calleth such wise men Nasutos, as if they were able to sent or smell the politicke stratagems of other men. Besides man, onely those creatures haue this outward Nose that haue foure feete and bring forth liuing ones, as for birds and serpents (saith Aristotle in the 16. chapter of of his second booke de partibus Animalium) & and those foure footed beasts that lay egges, they haue onely 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, holes of the Nose, which are not so compassed or formed that you may call them Noses; vnlesse it bee because they breathe and smell by them. As for those Creatures which doe not breathe, they haue no Nose or holes at all, but other instruments of this sence, some smell by their gills, some by their fistula or pipe or trunke, some otherwayes, as some of those wee call Insecta.

This outward Nose is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by Aristotle in the 11. chapter of his first booke de hi∣storia Animalium, and in the 16. booke de partibus Animalium, as also by Galen in his booke de olfactus instrumento. The word seemeth to be deriued from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because through the Nose the excrement and superfluities of the head doe fall away. Others call it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because of the mucous matter or phlegmaticke excrement which distilleth through it. If we should describe the Nose, we must say that it is a protuberating or strutting part of the face, making a way for the Ayre, for by it we receiue it in and auoyde it out againe: some say it is a defence forthe instruments of smelling, when as indeed they are not contained in the Nose, but remaine within the skull. Yet we will not deny but that it is an assistant to them, for if the Nose were away we should not smell without all question.

It is scituated betwixt the Eyes, for the part whereby wee breathe ought to bee in the middest and before. Nature therefore placed it in the middest betweene three other senses, the Sight, the Hearing and the Tast, and in a straight line that the respiration might not be interrupted but passe freely to and fro.

Moreouer it is placed saith Cicero in his second book de natura Deorum, aboue; because O∣dours flie vpward and therefore from aboue are more commodiously receiued. Add here∣to it that standeth vs in good steed to smell our meats & drinks being so neere the mouth, which instinct Nature hath giuen also to bruite beasts, as we may see especially in Apes who first smell to a thing before they will eate it. In a man the chiefe vse of the position of the Nose is for beauty and elegancie.

The Basis of the Nose aboue is broade and groweth into a blunt end downeward, or rather, saith Laurentius, it beginneth with a sharpe point from the inward Angles or cor∣ners of the eyes, and endeth at the beginning of the lips.

It is diuided into an vpper part which is immoueable and bony, and a lower, which is moueable and gristly. The vpper part of the Nose called Dorsum or the barke is called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the spine or ridge of the Nose. The lower part where it inlargeth it selfe, into the Nosthrils is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by Ruffus and Pollux: the foote of the Nose, and the vtmost roundnesse 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the globe of the Nose or the tip as wee commonly speake,

Within it is diuided into two cauities by a hedge or partition which they call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. ••ares the Nosthrils, because in them the odors or odoriferous spirits or the Ayre doe in∣••are or swimme continually; others call them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 of the mucous matter that issueth from them, others 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the holes of the Nose as Galen hath it in his booke de instru∣mento Olfactus.

The vse of the diuision is, that the action of the smelling might be more perfect, for in al the parts of sense (excepting the Touch) the sense is bypartite, because of the two sides of the body, the right and the left.

In like manner saith the Phylosopher in the tenth chapter of his second booke de parti∣bus Anim. the power of the Nosthrils is double or bipartite, but if they had bin disseuered or set aside as the eares they could not haue performed their office; because we smell euen in our breathing

as also doe all other creatures which haue nostrils. Againe, by reason of this diuision one nosethrill remaines open when the other is obstructed, that thorough it wee might haue the benifit of Inspiration and Expiration, and when both of them are obstruc∣ted the mouth may be opened to supply their office, as we see often in our Patients whose noses are stopped with a cold, they sleepe with their mouths open, drawing and yeelding their breath thereby least the man should be strangled.

It is further to bee noted that the holes of both the nostrilles (which is but one in one nostrill) about the middle of the Nose are deuided into two parts, as Galen obserued in his Book de Odoratus organo. The one part runneth aboue the palate into the vtmost part of the mouth and throate; whence it is that oftentimes we see that if a man laugh when he is a drinking the drinke will come out at his nosethrils: and those Irrhines which we cast into the nose sometimes for medicine, will fall into the mouth if the nose be close shut. The other part of the hole of the Nose ascendeth to the spongy bone. Finally, the outward parts of the Nose which compasse the holes are called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 alaepinnae, The wings of the Nose.

The Nose consisteth of a Cuticle, a Skinne, Muscles, Bones, Gristles, and the inward Coate.

The Skinne wherewith it is couered is thin, without any fatte that the quantity of the Nose might not exceed, which would haue beene a great deformity; but vnder the parti∣tion in the middle of the Nosethrilles there is a rising or prominent fleshy particle neare the top of the lippe, called by Ruffus and Pollux 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Columna the Pillar, which in some men hangeth something outward; it is thicke and fungous so that it resembleth the Cartilage or Gristle, (from which notwithstanding we must learn to distinguish it) and in the compasse thereof stand many haires called properly Vibrissi, because when we twitch them out it ma∣keth vs shake our heads and sneeze, which is called capitis vibratio. The vse of these haires is, that those small Animals that flye about in the ayre should not be drawne into the nose in our Inspiration, but hang in those hairy springes.

But because in deeper and sudden Inspirations and Expirations the motion of the nostrilles serueth to no smal purpose, therefore Nature made thē mouable, & because they were to be moued according to our will and good pleasure, there are certaine muscles in∣serted into them, some seruing for dilatation, others for constriction; the first open the nosethrils, the other shut them. Those that dilate the nosethrilles are foure; two small ones arising from the cheeke-bones, two others arise from the seame of the fore-head. There are also other foure which constringe the Nose, two arising from the rootes of the wings, the other two are hidden in the cauity of the nose, vnder the coate which compasseth it a∣bout; but of these we shall heare more particularly in the booke of Muscles.

CHAP. XXVII. Of the Bones, Gristles, Vesselles, Coate and vse of the Nose.

THE Bones which make the cauity of the Nosethrils are of two sortes: some may bee sayed to be proper to the Nose although they be bones of the vpper Iaw, others are common. The proper are three: two external and one in∣ternall, and these reach from the top but to the middle of the Nose, the rest is gristly.

The common Bones are one fixed at the vpper roote of the nose within called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, by Hippocrates and Galen, and neare it wee finde two other fungous & spongy bones which fill the vpper cauity of the nostrils made for the voyce and the Reception of odours, which are vnited by the bone Cribri forme, so that some thinke them to bee partes thereof: but of these in the History of the Bones.

The Gristles of the Nose are fiue: three are before tyed to the circumferences of the bones, and two make the wings, of which we shall intreat amongst the Gristles.

The vesselles of the Nose are veines from the Iugular veines, arteries from the sleepy arteries, and nerues from the third coniugation of the braine on either side one.

The Coate (which Galen in his booke de instrumento olfactus calleth sometimes a coat sometimes a membrane, but a membrane most Anatomists call it) which compasseth the capacitie of the nostrils is, as Vesalius thinketh, an extension of a branch of the lesser roots of the third coniugation of sinewes. But Columbus and Bauhine take it to arise from the Durameninx, and it is the common coat of the mouth, the palate, the toung, the Larynx or

[illustration]

Table xii. Fig. 8. sheweth the foreside of the Scull, as also the bones, the holes or perforations & the Sutures both of the scull and of the vpper Iaw: Figure 9. sheweth the Basis of the Scull, and many holes and Sutures therein.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XII.

• AA. A hole in the forehead bone.
• BB. The hole of the fourth bone of the vpper iawe, which is in the cheeke.
• C. A hole of the second bone of the vpper Iawe in the inward angle of the eye.
• DD. The fourth hole of the Wedge-bone in the out∣ward side of the eye. EE. the first hole of the same bone
• G. The second hole.
• H. the 3. hole of the same bone in the seate of the eye.
• II. The forehead bone.
• K. The left bone of the Synciput.
• L. The left bone of the temples.
• M. the Mammillarie processe of the temples.
• NN, the Wedge bone.
• ΓΓΓ. the first bone of the vpper Iaw,
• Δ, the second bone of the vpper iaw.
• Θ. The third. ΛΛ, the fourth in the left eye.
• ΞΞ, the fift bone of the vpper iaw in the Nose.
• OO, the bridge or partition of the nosethrils.
• P, the Suture in the yoake bone.
• Q, A part of the 2. common suture from the first N to S.
• R, S, T, V, X, Y, Z. The third common Suture drawn ob∣liquely through the orbe of the eye.
• a D, the first externall suture of the vpper Iawe in the Cheeke, and from thence through the eye to Q.
• b, the third external suture of the vpper iaw from b to c.
• c, the second external suture of the vpper iaw in the eie
• e, the fourth externall suture reaching to Ξ.
• f, the sixt externall suture of the vpper iaw in the mid∣dle of the Nose.
• g, the second internall suture in the nose.
• h, the seauenth externall suture of the vpper iaw.
• i. A bastard suture of the vpper iaw at the eye.

[illustration]

FIG. IIX.

[illustration]

IX

[illustration]

The Ninth Figure.

• A. The end of the Coronall Suture.
• CC, the lower additaments of the Lambdall suture on either side. D, the fourth hole of the wedge bone in the outside of the orbe of the eye.
• F, A part of the fourth proper Suture.
• H, the great hole of the occipitium made for the spinall marrow.
• K, A part of the bone called Synciput.

LL. A part of the forhead bone. MM, the lower part of the nowle bone. N, A rift or cleft of the wedge bone which is common to the bones of the temple, drawn on the left side from n to o. OO, the wedge bone P. His foure processes marked 2, 3. 4, 5. A, R. the sixt hole of the wedgebone at the bottom of the throat. A. the seauenth hole of the same at R. Γ. the first bone of the vpper Iaw. S. Λ. the fourth. Π. The sixte, where the Cutter betwixt c and Π hath not well expressed the Suture. TT. the bones of the Temples on either side. V, the fourth hole of the bones of the temple made for the hearing. Ξ, the bridge or partiti∣on of the nose. X, the fyrst hole of the temple bone in his Basis. YY, the yoake bone. aa, the anterior part of the fourth proper Suture. b, the lower part of the Fift proper oblique Suture. c, the lower part of the bridge of the nose which is like a Coulter where 3 is placed. d, the vpper part of the second common Suture, f, the First externall Suture of the vpper iawe in the Cheeke. g, the first common Suture in the side of the brow, h, the cauity of the Temples whereto the lower Iaw is articulated. ii, the Appendix of the Temple bone called Styloides. k. the Mammillary processe of the same Temples. ll, the knub of the nowle bone. mm, the sixt proper oblique Suture of the scull. nn, the seauenth transuerse Suture. op, A Line beginning from the last named Suture which climbeth by the temples, and is more like a diuision then a line qq, the lower part of the second common Suture of the scul in the hollownesse of the nose. r, the line of the hole of hearing. s, a, the stony Bones. tv, the 5 externall transuerse suture of the vpper iaw. Xy, the se∣uenth externall right Suture. α,β, A Bastard Suture of the vpper iaw in the pallate. γ, the hole of the eare, ••, the Fift hole of the temples neere vnto his processe where Y should be blotted our. B, A hole of the nowle bone which is not alwayes found. E, the second hole of the nowle bone made for the sixt coniugatiō of the sinnewes, and for the iugular veine and artery, H, the First hole of the Occipitium or nowle bone for the passage of the marrow. 3, The third hole or the outgate of the seuenth coniugation. ••,λ, two holes of the nose. μν, two holes in the palat which is accounted the fourth of the wedge-bone. π, Fiue holes in the basis of the wedge-bone. ξ, the hole of the fourth Bone of the vpper iaw in the Pallate. Note that M, V, at the right side pointeth out the cauity which the yoke bone maketh for the passage of the tempo∣rall Muscles

throttle, the gullet and the stomacke. This Membrane although it compasse the whole circumference of the mouth and the parts conteyned in the chops, yet is it one and conti∣nual, and of one and the same substance, but not alwayes of a like thicknesse. For in the Nosethrilles it is thinner, but in that part which is vnder the spongy bones it is thicker and full of small holes, through which the thicker Excrementes of the Braine do passe: which excrements as they descend doe part of them passe into the mouth through those hoales which are made out of the nosethrils thereinto; partyssueth at the Nose, yea, and some∣times with violent hawking wee fetch part out of the wayes of the Nosethrilles into the mouth.

This Membrane is of exquisite Sense, so that if it bee irritated or prouoked, Sternuta∣tion or Sneezing will followe, because of the consent it hath with the Chest whereinto it insinuateth it selfe: but why were the nosethrils inuested with this Membrane? I answere, to hinder the growth of flesh in the nose which might make the nosethrilles narrow, as it happeneth in the disease called Polypus. Againe, to make the nosethrilles more slipperie that the mucous excrement might more easily descend. Finally, that they might be par∣takers of Sense.

The vse of the outward nose is first for Respiration, that through it as through a canale or pipe the aire might be conueyed in to be distributed, partly vpward to the Braine to re∣create and refresh the Animall spirit, partly downwards to the Lungs and the heart to re∣frigerate and coole the same. This is the first and especial vse of the outward nose: for al∣though we respire also by the mouth, yet was not the mouth created for Respiration, be∣cause if the holes of the spongye bones or the nosethrils be obstructed (so that when wee sleepe we draw in our breath by our mouthes) the tongue becomes rough and the mouth dry (sometimes also it growes bitter) that when we wake we can scarse swallow our spitle, Hence it is, that Nature prouided the nose like a couer to defend the holes that go out of the nosethrils into the mouth through which we breath when we are asleep & our mouths shut vppe.

The second vse of the outward nose is to serue the sense of Smelling. Hippocrates de Carn. saith. The moyst Braine smelleth the odours of dry things, drawing them together with the aire through gristly bodyes. For the nose leadeth the ayre, informed, as it were, with the formes of odours through the hole of the Spongie bone to the Mammillary pro∣cesses as vnto the principall organs of smelling, from whence it is conueyed to the braine: for if a mans nose be cut off at the roote, either hee cannot smell at all, or at least but im∣perfectly.

The third vse is, that through it the excrements of the Braine might distill, or by a ve∣hement efflation be blowne out. And these two last vses Galen expresseth excellentlie in the sixt chapter of his eight Booke de vsu partium on this manner. From within outwarde are the Excrements of the Braine deriued through the Nosethrilles. From without inwarde are the Obiects of the smelling Faculty transported this way. One Instrument serueth these two turnes of Nature; one of which is necessary for the preseruation of Life, the other for our bet∣ter Life.

Finally, the Nose serueth to forme the voyce, and addeth a great beauty to the Face.

CHAP. XXVIII. Of the Inward Nose and the manner of Smelling.

THat the Nose is the Instrument of Smelling all men will confesse, but be∣cause it is compounded of many and diuers parts, it is a great question to which particle among all the rest the Action of Smelling is to bee attribu∣ted. Of these we haue already examined those parts which make the out∣ward Nose, it remaineth therefore that we prosecute our Historie in the parts of the Inward Nose.

The Inward Nose therefore consisteth of two parts, the bone called Ethmoeides or ra∣ther the Spongy bone and the Mammillarie processes. The Spongy bone is situated part∣ly in the toppe of the Nosethrils, partly within the Scul. It is a couering of the Mammil∣larie processes thrilled full of holes or rare and Spongye, through which perforations the ayre is immediately conueyed to the Braine forrespiration, and vapors for the distinction of odours: that way also the whole sourse of the excrements is conducted.

The Mammillary processes which make the other part of the inward nose do proceede

out of the Braine and haue their habitation within the Scul aboue the cauity or bosome of the spongy bone. Of this spongy Bone we haue sayd somewhat already in the 6. Chapter of the 7. Booke, and shall speake afterward more at large, and concerning the Mammillary processes we haue inteated of them sufficiently in the 16. Chapter of the 7. Booke, whether we referre the Reader, and proceede to discouer vnto you the manner of Smelling. And because I would not haue you think that Hippocrates was ignorant from whence this Sense came and where it was accomplished, you shall giue mee leaue to relate vnto you a short passage or twaine out of his works. The first is in his Booke de Carnibus, where hee speaketh to this purpose.

The Braine hath in it a Faculty of Smelling though it be moyst, and draweth through grist∣ly bodies which are drie, together with the ayre the odours of drie things. For the Braine reacheth euen vnto the cauity of the Nose, hauing no bone in his way but onely a soft gristle like a sponge, which you can call neither a Bone nor Flesh. If therefore the cauity of the Nostrils bee dry, then doeth the braine better and more exquisitly perceiue the odours of dry bodies. For it cannot smell water because it is moyster then the braine, vnlesse it bee corrupted. In like manner when the Nostrils are moyst we cannot smell, because at such times the braine doth not draw the Ayre into itselfe.

Againe in his Booke de locis in Homine. There is no passage tending vnto the Nose (hee meaneth the Sense of Smelling) but a loose and spongy substance, and that is the reason why we heare further then wee smell, for if the Sent be far from the Sense it is dispersed before it attaine thereto.

Galen more distinctly (as being better acquainted with Anatomy) on this manner in a particular discourse of this subiect.. The Braine sendeth out two sprouts long and hollow, ta∣king their original from the forward ventricles and determining at that part of the Scull where the Nose beginneth, where are placed certaine Bones called Ossa Ethmoidea, that is, like a Syue or Scarce. But we returne to the manner of Smelling.

According to Aristotle the••e are three things required, to euery Sense; an Obiect, a Me∣dium and an Instrument or Organ.

The Obiect here are odours or vapours of a firie Nature.

But what an odour is, is not so welknowne as what a Sound or a Light, or a Colour is: wherefore in men this Sense is the dullest of all the rest, as Aristotle sayeth in his Booke de Sensu & sensili, and many creatures Smell a great deale more exquisitly then we; we touch more exquisitly then any other creature, at least that Sence in vs is most perfect. Whence it is that a man receiueth no Smell without pleasure or discontentment, because the Instru∣ment is not perfect.

The Sense of Smelling is the middle Sence, for there are Fiue Senses, two that woorke by contaction, as the Touch and the Taste; and two that apprehend their obiects by the in∣terposition of an other, as Sight and Hearing.

Now because Odours are not so manifest (saith Aristotle in the 9. Chapter of his second Booke de Anima) as Sapours (for our Language vseth the worde Sauour promiscuously in both these Sences) therefore it is that the names of Odours are taken by a similitude from sapors, so that some odours are called sweete, as that of Saffron and Honny; others sharpe as Tyme and such like; there is also a sower Odour, an acute and a fatte. VVherefore Galen in the 22. Chapter of his 4. Booke de simpli medica. teacheth vs that Odors do moue the Taste as sapors doe; for if our meates be corrupted the Taste is able to find the vnplea∣sing odour and we throw them away. Yea almost in euery thing the Smell and the Tast haue a mutuall consent; we say almost, because in those things that are most fragrant and sweete smelling as is a Rose, the Smelling and the Taste doe much differ. For the Smell is delighted with the Odour of the Rose, but the Sapor there of disturbeth the Taste. But as the Hearing is audible and inaudible, the Sight visible and inuisible, so also the Smel∣ling is odorable (for it is no treason to Coyne words) or inodorable. That is inodorable, ei∣ther that hath not nor can haue any odor, or that which hath but a little odor, or that which hath an euill or offensiue odor, and so much of the Obiect.

The Medium by which wee Smell is the Aire or VVater. For those creatures which liue in the waters whether they haue bloud or no bloud, are yet apprehensiue of odours, as also those that liue in the Aire. For Fishes and Snayles and those we call insecta, do smel their nourishment a farre off, and approach thereupon vnto it, because of the Alimentarie species of the odour, as Bees will flock to Honny, and so in the like.

But man neuer smelleth but when hee draweth in his breath, for if hee hould his breath, though you put odoriferous things into his Nose he cannot smell thē; the reason is, because the instrument of his Smell is not placed in the superficies of the coat of his nostrils, but farre within, to which there are certaine perforations that leade. Againe, in inspiration the instruments themselues are dilated, which if they were not dilated the ayre could not passe through the pores nor ascend vnto the processes and so vnto the ventri∣cles of the Braine. Other creatures, euen those that are without blood do smell, though they do not respire, and they smell because they are able to receiue and perceiue odours. And that they do perceiue odours, it is manifest, because they are stifled with those odors, whereby men are also stifled. For, saith Aristotle in his booke de sensu & sensili, as men get a stuffing in their heads, yea are sometimes suffocated with the steame of Charcoales, so many insectile creatures are driuen away with the smell or vapour of Brimstone or other Bituminous matter, because they are annoyed, yea killed by them.

Hence it followeth that the instrument of smelling in men differeth from the instru∣ment of smelling in such creatures, as a mans eye differs from the eyes of those creatures which haue hard eyes. For those creatures that haue soft eyes haue also eye-lids to couer them, which lids, if they doe not moue and open they cannot see; but those that haue hard eyes haue no lids at all, nor any thing proportionable thereto, but they see immedi∣ately that which is to be seene.

In like maner saith the Phylosopher, in those creatures which doe not respire the chiefe instrument or Organ of Smelling hath no couer at all no more then their eyes haue. But those creatures which draw in ayre haue their organs of sight and hearing couered; yet be∣cause in their breathing their veines and passages are distended, the instrument is vncoue∣red, or it may bee their breath remooueth the couering away, but when they doe not respire they cannot smell, which is all otherwise in those creatures that doe not respire. Hence it is that those creatures that doe respire cannot smell when they are vnder water, for they must respire when they smell but in the water they cannot respire.

This conceit of Aristotles concerning the couers of the holes of the Nose, Galen in his booke de instrumento olfactus refuteth. For, saith he, it is an vncertaine thing which can∣not be demonstrated nor made euident, that we should assurdly beleeue it to be true: be∣side, saith Galen, it is of no vse.

But let vs grant that in the bottome of the Nose there is a couer which is opened by inspiration, that the way may be made open for the ayre and vapours to passe in; and that when the inspiration is ended, it againe closeth: It must needs be that the motion of this co∣uer (saith Galen) must be Animall, or Naturall or Violent.

That it is Animall or voluntary no man will say, because there is no neede of a couer or value for Animall motion; beside Animall motion followeth our wills, but this couer is neuer opened sauing when we draw our breath. Againe, the instrument of Animall motion is a muscle, but in the top of the nose on the inside there are no moscles.

Neither is this motion Natural as is the motion of the values of the heart, because the motion of the Heart is perpetuall and not at our command.

Violent we cannot say it is, for then (saith Galen) when the Ayre rusheth forcibly in the couers should be opened euen without attraction or drawing of our breath; but this we are able to disproue. For put a man into a chamber fulfilled with some strong odour, and moue the Ayre neuer so vehemently, or lead the smell into his nosthrils with a reede (for so doubtlesse those couers if there were any would bee reserated) yet hee will not sent the smell at all, vnlesse he draw in his breath. Concerning this matter, he that desireth fur∣ther satisfaction, let him reade Galen diligently. We will proceede vnto the third thing required to sensation, which is the Iustrument.

Concerning the instrument of Smelling we haue before related the opinion of Hippo∣crates, of Aristotle answered by Galen, and also of Galen himselfe. But the truth is saith Archangelus that all the antients were ignorant of this Mystery.

Amongst the latter Anatomists Varolius hath wel described it, so hath our Authour Bau∣hine, you shall heare both their conceits.

Varolius hath it thus: Two neruous productions proceed out of the very middest of the Braine, wrought as it were out of the substance thereof; these productions shooting forward doe determine at the top of the nostrils and make the chiefe instrument of Smel∣ling, to which place when the odoriferous exhalations doe attaine, the instrument percei∣ueth the species of the odor without any matter and into this species is changed; the exha∣lation

is dispersed or extended through the substance of the Braine.

Bauhine hath it thus: As the Eye is the instrument of the Sight, and the Eare of hea∣ring, both of them compounded of many particles: so the instrument of the Smell is the Nose. But because in euery sense there is one principall part, it is a great question which is here the principall instrument by which the faculty taketh knowledge of the proper ob∣iects of this sense. Some thinke is is the Nose, because if we shut our Nose and draw in the breath through the Mouth we doe not smell at all, but if we drawe our breath through the Nose, the odour presently striketh the sense. But because there are some creatures that smell without Noses, it followeth that the nose is not the principall Organ but helpeth the perfection of the sense, and is an assistant onely to the principall organ. We must therefore finde out some other part, and that in the Nose or neere vnto it.

The Bone it cannot be, saith Galen in his booke de instrumento olfactus, because bones are insensible euery way, much lesse can they distinguish of smels. It is not the coate or membrane of the nose that discerneth odours, for though you fill the nose with odorif∣ferous things, yet we do not smell before we draw our breath. Againe this coate is verie like that membrane that inuesteth the vtmost part of the heade, which membrane parta∣keth not of this sense, and therefore not this coate of the nose. It is not the coate of the Palate, of the Chops, or the Rough Arterie; for if you stop your nosethrils & draw your breth through your mouth you shall not smell at all or feele any sense of an odor, neither about the Pallat, or the Chops, or the Rough Artery. Wherfore the nose as the way, or the pathe or walke of odoriferous things, although to say truth it was ordained rather for Respiration, saith Galen, then to smel with.

The bodie therefore that perceiueth or apprehendeth odours is placed higher, & that is either the Spongie bone or the Mammillarie processes. Not the Spongye bone because, as is said, bones are insensible altogether. It remaineth therefore that it must be those processes which because they are somewhat like the nipples of a Dugge are called Mammillares, which proceeding out of the basis of the Braine are by the Piamater (saith Archangelus) ioyned to the braine and reposed in the vpper part of the Spongye bone called also Etnmoides (for wee will confound them) and because they are two, they are distinguished or separated by a production of the same bone carrying the Figure of a Spur-rowell.

They are much of the nature of Nerues, as is before shewed in the 16. Chapter of the seuenth Book, and therefore are best able (saith Laurentius) to discerne of the qualities they receiue: yea (saith Archangelus) they seeme to haue their originall from Nerues of Smelling which do degenerate into them. For from the back part of the marrow of the Braine at the fourth Ventricle doth the Odoratorie Nerue arise vnder the Optickes, and pacing forwarde are thrust into the Mammillary processes betwixt the Braine end the Wedge-bone. And these Nerues of Smelling (saith he) were made as canales or pipes through which the Facultie of Smelling (residing in the Animal spirite drawne out of the fourth Ventricle) might be transported vnto the Mamillarie processe or the organs of Smelling; as the Faculty of Seeing through the Opticke nerues is transported vnto the eyes. The originall of these Nerues was vnknowne to Vesalius, Columbus & the rest, because haplie they vsed to Dissect onely putrid or stale heades. But wee returne vnto Bauhine.

These Mammilarie processes (hauing a peculiar Nature, Figure and Composition of their own) are esteemed to be the principall organs of smelling, especiallie because there is no part in the nose which can so easily be altred by odours as these: for being ful of spirits they do soone receiue the species of odours. For whereas odours do consist in a kinde of exhalation (which is manifest because odoriferous things doe onely so farre foorth smell as they exhale; whence it is that in Summer the sents of thinges are more fresh and fragrant then in Winter) and exhalations are naturally drie, it was fit that the organ of Smelling should proceede from a moyst principle, that by reason of the con∣trarietie betweene the Obiect and the Organ which is necessarie in al actions, the instru∣ment might suffer and be mooued by the exhalation. And because the exhalation when it was come vnto that place might better be dilated or extended, this instrument dooth not arise from the Spinall Marrow, nor from out of any part compassed or constrained within narrow limits, but of the verie middest of the Braine where they are wrought out of the substance therof, & thence produced forward determine in the top of the nose &

so become the Organs of Smelling.

We conclude therefore that the Smell is made after this manner. The Aire altred with Odors or by an aierie exhalation of odorifferous thinges is receiued by the Nose, which like a Chimney is broad below and narrow aboue; but because the proper moti∣on of the exhalation is but weake that it cannot make a sufficient impression; it is increa∣sed by traction. Wherefore when the mouth is shut and the Chest dilated (for vnlesse the Chest be dilated we can smell nothing) the exhalation that is dispersed through the aire is by inspiration drawne into the nosethrils: and because out of them there are two holes which go vnto the pallate the greatest part of that aire so drawne in entreth into the Lungs but without any sense of odours; the rest ascendeth vpward to the instrumēts of Smelling, but it is altred in the spongie bones euen as in the cauities of the eares the auditorie aire is prepared. This aire thus altred in the Labyrinths of the spongie bones together with the species or forme of the odour passeth thorough the holes of the Siu•• into the Mammillary processes, or by them it is receiued and so conueyed to the common Sense which is in the Braine that it may iudge thereof. For the Brain is the common in∣strument of Sensation or the organ of all the senses, or it is the instrument by which the Sensatiue Soule perceiueth all sensible qualities, yea distinguisheth and iudgeth of them. And thus much of the vpper part of the Face, wherin three Senses are situated, of which we haue intreated.

CHAP. XXIX. Of the Parts of the Face which are betwixt the Nose, the Eares and the Chinne.

THE parts of the Face which are onely in men and vnder the eies between the nose and the eares reach as farre as the Chin, the Ancients called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, in Latine Genae, because in them haires are generated. Wee call them the Cheeks. They are diuided into an vpper part & a lower. The vpper is next vnder the Eyes, a little rising between the nose and the Ears & for the most part is red, in which place Plinie supposeth that modesty or shamefastnes hath her seate, because that part blusheth in those that are modest. Hippocrates called it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the circle of the Face, and Pollux 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the Apple of the Face, beecause in forme and colour it is not vnlike an apple, besides their colour flourisheth most in the Summer of our age.

The lower part is looser, and is all that which is without the closing of the two Iawes, reaching almost all along betweene the chin and the eyes: when your teeth are shut you may raise it vp with your finger on the inside, or make it strut when you fill your mouth with Aire, not suffering it to go into your Lungs or out of your mouth. This is called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, in Latine Bueca the Puffe of the Cheeke: That part which is betwixte the nosethrils and the vpper lip is called Mystax. The cauity which parteth the vpper lip in two which is an impression therein like a valley, is called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as it were ami∣able or louely.

The Lips are cald Labra by Cicero, by others Labia a lambendo of licking, for saith Archan∣gelus, men lick with their lips though other creatures, as Dogs and Cats and Oxen licke with their tongues. They are two, one vpper another lower, and are nothing else but Musculous extremities of the mouth. Aristotle in the 11. chapter of his first Book de Hi∣storia Animalium calleth them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because they occupy the verie mouth. Homer also calleth them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and Lycophron in that prouerbe vsed I thinke in all Languages.

〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉,

Great Destinie twixt the Lippe and the sippe, Causeth strange chances often to slippe.

The vtmost and prominent parts of the lippes are called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, prolabra by Ruffus, and those parts that meete and looke redder then the rest because of the affluence of bloode are called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by Pollux and Ruffus. The hole which the two lips make when they are diuided is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Os the mouth. Finally, the lower part of the Face vnder the nea∣ther lip which groweth sharp is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by Xenophon, by Cicero mentum a memorando because it should seeme there is some vse of it when we desire to remember any thing. No creature (saith Pliny) hath a chin but man, which if it be round (according to Pytha∣goras)

is a signe of an effiminate minde. The doke or dimple in the middest of the chin and a great ornament too, is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the Nymph; the very sharp poynt of the chinne, bearing out in the lower Iaw is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉; the flesh vnder the Chinne is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in Latine Buccula we call it a double Chinne. To conclude, the hayres that breake out in the Cheekes, the Lippes and the Chinne make the Beard, of all which parts we might dis∣course at large out of our Authours, but that we hast to that which is more profitable.

CHAP. XXX. Of the Mouth, Palate and Vuula.

THat which is in Greeke called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, in Latin Os, we call the Mouth, comprehen∣ding vnder that appellation not onely the Cleft which is made by the opening of the Lippes, but also all that voyde cauity which is betwixt the Lips and the rootes of the Choppes, which are called Fauces. It is situated in the fore and middle part of the Face, that the handes might equally reach the meate on either side vn∣to it.

It is also immediatly vnder the Nostrils, that not onely the Sapors or Tastes of our meates might be offered to the Mouth; but the Sauours & Smels or Odours to the Nose∣thrils. For it is fit both the Sences should iudge of that we put into our bellies.

The parts of the mouth are of two sortes: some are those whereof the Mouth is made, others such as are contayned within the Mouth. The partes whereof the Mouth is made are of two sorts, some fleshy, others bony. The fleshy partes are the Lippes; the Mus∣cles of the Puffe of the Cheekes, of the Lippes and of the lower Iaw. For on the foreside the Mouth is compassed with the Lippes, as well to shut vp the Mouth when we would, as also the better to sup liquid things; on each side are the Puffes of the Cheek swelling out. These partes are couered with the Skinne hauing Fatte vnder it, which Skinne in the mid∣dest is slitte ouerthwart like the Eye-liddes to giue way for the reuiuing of Aliment.

The Bones are the vpper and the neather Iawes, with the Teeth fixed into them both. All these parts as also the whole inward capacity of the Mouth is compassed with a thick membrane which in the palate is somewhat rugous, spredeth ouer the Gummes, couereth the vpper part of the Lippes, and being reduplicated maketh the Vuula.

The chiefe vse of the mouth is double; first to giue way for the assumption of meates and drinkes, and that in the mouth they might bee Tasted. For the Taste is apprehensiue of that quality of the meat which is fit for our nourishment; wherefore in the very ingresse of the mouth is the Toung placed which is the proper instrument of the Tast, that nothing may be admitted into the mouth which doth not fir•••• ••••ke his quality manifest by the con¦taction of the Tongue: againe to breake the Aliment and to shred and mingle it before it be swallowed, that it may go prepared into the stomacke.

The second principall vse of the mouth is for Respiration, that when the Nose is stop∣ped the Ayre may yet be transported, some of it vpward to the top of the nostrilles, some of it downward to the Longues, for the nourishment and expurgation of the vitall spirits: es∣pecially for the framing of the voice, for we speake out of our mouths.

The secundary or lesse principall vse of the mouth is, that thorough it by hauking wee might auoide the excrements of the head, by Coughing the excrements of the Chest and the Longues, and sometimes also by Vomiting those of the Stomacke.

The Muscles common to the Puffe of the Cheekes and the Lippes are foure, twoe on each side. The one called Quadratus or the square muscle, the other Buccinator or the Trū∣peter; and these muscles beside the vses they haue in beastes do in men helpe the Speach, especially the Sounding of a Trumpet or winding of a Horne or Cornet.

The Lippes which couer the mouth are two; one aboue, another below, whose sub∣stance fayth Galen in his 4. Book De Anatom. Administrat. and the third chapter, are fleshy, fungous and moouable, and that after an vncouth manner: for the Skinne and the Muscles are throughout exactly mingled together, so that Galen in the 11. Book de vsu partium and the 15. chapter, calleth the conformation of their substance a Musculous Skinne, or a skinny Muscle.

And as without they are couered with the Skin, so on the inside they are inuested with a membrane common to the stomacke and the mouth: whence it is that in those that are a∣bout to vomit the lower lip is often seene to tremble. These Lippes all creatures haue to eat and drinke with; but men make farther vse of them to helpe their speach, to auoyde their spittle, and moreouer they defend the Teeth from the coldnesse of the ayre, and are a

[illustration]

Table 7. Fig. 1. Sheweth the muscles of the Fore∣head, the Eye-lids, and the Cheekes.

[illustration]

Figure 2. sheweth the muscles of the Nose, Lips, the lower Iaw and of the bone Hyois.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XIII.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

• A 1, 2, The muscle of the forehead and the right fibres thereof.
• B 1, 2, The temporall muscle.
• αβγ 2, His semicircular originall.
• CE 1, the first muscle of the Eye-lidde compassing the whole lid.
• FD 1, the third muscle of the wing of the nose which endeth into the vpper lip.
• GH 1, the muscle of the vpper lip.
• G 2, The place of the yoke bone without flesh.
• T 1, the broad Mouse-muscle stretched ouer the cheeks and all the lower parts.
• 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the circumscription or circumference of this mus∣cle.
• I 1, the yoke-bone.
• I 2, The grinding muscle or the second muscle of the Iaw.
• The forward K in the second figure sheweth the high∣er gristle of the nose.
• L 2, the wing of the nose.
• M 2, a muscle forming the cheeks.
• N 2, the muscle of the lower lip.
• O 2, A part of the fift muscle of the lower iaw called Digastricus, that is, double bellied.
• P 2, the bone hyois is set in this place,
• QR 2, The first muscle of the bone hyois growing to the Rough artery,
• S 2, the second muscle of the bone hyois vnder the chin
• The lower T in the second figure sheweth the third muscle of the bone hyois streatched to the iaw. The vpper T in the second figure sheweth the insertion of the seuenth muscle of the head.
• VV 2, two venters of the fourth muscle of the bone Hyois,
• The backward K (put in stead of χ) sheweth the sea∣uenth muscle of the head and his insertion at the vp∣per T,
• χ Λ 2, The originall of the grinding muscle from the yoke-bone,
• μ 2 the insertion of this muscle into the lower iaw,
• ν 2 A small nerue running to the forehead out of the orbe of the eyes, π 2, a nerue propagated to the face, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉2, two beginnings of the seauenth muscle of the head. T 2, His insertion into the Mammiltary processe. ν 2, The cl••uicle or the coller-bone. φ 2, A place where the vessels attayning to the head and the nerues of the arme do passe through.

great beauty to the Face.

For the performance of all these offices they stoode in need of Muscles, some of which are common with them and the Puffe of the Cheeke, of which we haue made mention be∣fore: others are proper to the Lips onely, and they are sixe; two on either side belonging to the vpper Lip and one on either side belonging to the nether.

The Iawes are two. The vpper which in men is immouable, and the lower which is mo∣ued voluntarily with a double kinde of motion; one simple another compound: the simple motions are sixe, vpward, downward, to the right hand and to the left, forward and backe∣ward.

The compound motion is made of that which is to the right hand and to the left, and that which is forward and backward: and by this motion the Iaw is circumduced or led about. It is mooued vpward by the muscle called Temporalis: downward by Digastricus, to the right hand and the left by Mansorius primus: backeward by Mansorius alter: forward by the fift paire: of all which as also of the common Muscles we shal intreate in the book of Muscles and of the Bones in the booke of Bones.

The parts contained in the mouth are diuers besides the teeth and the bone Hyois, of which we shall intreate among the bones. These are the Gums, the Palat, the Vuula, the Almonds, the Tongue, the Larynx or throtle, the Muscles of these parts, and the begin∣ning

of the Gullet.

The Gummes are made of flesh, which Auerrhoes saith is glandulous, the Grae∣cians call it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 which signifieth to inuolue: it is hard, saith Bauhine, and im∣moueable that so the teeth might be better fastened in their sockets, so hard the gums are that such as haue lost their teeth are able to breake their meate sometimes with them.

The Palate is the vpper part of the mouth, wherefore the antients, as Hippocrates, and Galen from him call it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉; Aristotle 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as it were Caelum oris. The Latines call it Ialatum, because it is fenced in with teeth, as it were with Pales, as if one should say Paled in [Tab. 13. fig. 4. *.] The extension of the Palate is from the backepart of the mouth to the teeth and is hollow like an Arch, but the roofe is not too high, hence we call it commonly the roofe of the mouth, but those whose heads are acuminated or like a Sugar loase haue high roofes or palates as Hyppocrates obserued in the first section of the sixth booke Epidemion. This is the soale or basis of the Braine established by the wedge bone, which therefore Galen calleth the bone of the palate, though saith he in his nineteenth chapter of his eleuenth booke de vsu partium, it scarce touch the palate.

It is made partly of bony substance and partly of fleshy; the bone is hard and fast, lest it shold rot by the confluence of excrement vnto it, as we see it doth in the French disease. This bone is double on both sides, for it is compounded of the fourth bone of the vpper iaw into which the teeth are fastened, and the sixth bone which maketh the backeward amplitude thereof. It is also diuided in the middest by a Suture, in the end whereof are two holes through which the braine is purged into the mouth, and so there becomes a great society betweene the nosthrils and the palate. Through th••se holes when wee hold our mouths close we may exspire and inspire, breath in and out, and when the wayes of the nostrils are obstructed, the excrements gathered together in the ventricles of the Braine are this way deriued into the mouth. But the backeward halfe of the palate whi•• endeth into the Fauces or chops, & is stretched out from one side to another, consisteth of a thick and glandulous flesh.

It is inuested with a thicke coate arising out of the dura mater, which hauing gotten out of the skull is enlarged, becommeth thicker and compasseth the whole mouth and pa∣late or the inside, yea it is common also with the gullet and the stomach, Hence cometh the great consent betweene the Palate and stomach, for it was fit that the coate of the pa∣late should haue the sēse of Tasting, that it might take the assay vnto the stomach. Where∣fore the sense of it is more exquisite, as receiuing it into his back part certaine small nerues of the fourth coniugation, which coniugation is also distributed vnto the palate.

This is also the cause why wee cannot euacuate the head with Masticatorie Medi∣dicines, but the stomach also will bee euacuated by the palate: now the head is euacuated by the palate, because from the head certaine hairy threds of veynes doe descend vnto the palate.

This coate of the palate in some places is rugous and rugged, which Plinie calleth Crenas, that the meate might be better mittigated. It is also hollow or concauous, that the voyce might be better formed when the ayre is reuerberated; in this concauity also as in a bosome the ayre we draw in is warmed, that it should not descend cold vnto the vitall parts to offend them.

The Vuula hath many names: It is cald Gargareon, or Gargulio by Hippoc. by Aristotle 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, but the proper name is Gargareon; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 & 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is vuula, are the names of it when it is ill affected. The name Gargareon is a made word of the sound we make when we gargle, or else from Gargles which we vse in the diseases of this part. It is called also Columella & ple∣ctrum, It is a particle of the mouth or a certaine pocesse saith Ruffus, hanging directly downeward (from the inward part of the palate [Tab. 13. fig. 4. E.] neare the holes of the nosthrils which looke into the backepart of the mouth) into the capacity of the mouth betweene the Almonds [F F] aboue the slit of the larynx or throtle [E] as will easily ap∣peare if a man open his mouth wide and presse his tongue downeward.

The substance of it is glandulous, red, and fungous hanging downe from the middest of the glandulous part of the palate. Some thinke it is made of the coate of the palate re∣duplicated at the end of the mouth and a little elongated, this was Columbus his conceyt,

If it be diseased by a fall of humours it is no more called Gargereon but 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 & 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

For if it grow equally thicke from the Basis to the ende, and fall lowe, become redde,

then it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, a Piller; but if the vpper part be slender, & the lower part grow round and liuid or blackish, then is it called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or the Vuula, because it is like a Grape both in colour and in magnitude, the stalke being the vpper part. It is called also 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and therefore Galen calleth them in whome it is ill affected 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

The vse of it is to temperate and moderate the coldnesse of the aire we breath in, that it fall not suddenly vppon the Longues, and so the bloud (sayth Aphrodisaeus) become con∣densed and thickned by the Inspiration of cold ayre, whereby the motion of the Longues might be made slower; whence it would follow that vpon so great a contention in the mo∣tion, the vessels might be broken and a consumption follow.

Another vse of it is to moderate and Tune the voyce, for onely Men and a few Birdes haue it: hereuppon it is called plectrum vocis the quill of the Voyce. For hanging in the cauity of the Palate betwixt the Larynx and the cauity of the nosethrilles it maketh a reper∣cussion of the ayre as it yssueth out of the Throttle. Hence also it is that it helpeth pro∣nounciation very much as Columbus sayth; who also auoucheth that if it be eaten away by the French disease, or cutt off when it is inflamed, the voyce will neuer be shrill or cleere after.

This Fallopius gainesayeth vpon his owne manifould experience, and Bauhine telleth a Storie of a Marchant whose Vuula (for I know no other name for it in English) had beene some yeares since consumed by a defluxion of sharpe humours, who yet found no decay or falt in his speach to follow vpon it, marry otherwise he grew Tabid, that is, into a consump∣tion. VVherefore, sayth he, we conceiue that those that haue their voyces impayred by the French disease, doe not onely loose their Vuulas, but the Vlcers eate away a great part of that glandulous body which is betwixt the Bone and the coate of the Palate, or else the bone of the Palate and the membrane is perforated. The like conceit also hath Fallopius.

Some adde a third vse of the Vuula to purge the Aire, for it licketh vp the dust which otherwise together with the ayre woulde descend into the Longues. But Vesalius doeth not approue of this vse, and hee rendereth this reason, because other creatures that drawe their breathes nearer the earth (and so more in danger of dust then men) haue not yet this Vuula.

Finally (for I will not insist vpon euery mans conceit) Varolius concerning the vse of the Vuula expresseth himselfe on such a manner.

The Vuula receiueth the excrement of the braine conuayed vnto the Phlegmatick glan∣dule through the Tunnell; this excrement it imparteth vnto of the Palat, the Tongue and other instruments of the Voice to moysten them, that which is ouerplus is cast out by spit∣ting and hauking. For as in a Flute the Sound will not bee shrill and cleare vnlesse it bee wet, so it is in the voyce of a man: and therefore Nature placed the Vuula which receiueth the moysture of the braine directly ouer the slit of the Throttle or Larynx, that it together with the rough Artery might better be moystned.

CHAP. XXXI. Of the end of the Mouth called Fauces or the Choppes, and their Glandules.

ALthough the word Fauces or the Choppes, doe among some Anaomistes, Vesalius and Laurentius especially, signifie al the capacity of the mouth; yet properly it signifieth the backeward and lower part of the mouth, or that space where the endes of the Gullet and the rough Artery doe meete, and may not be perceiued vnlesse the mouth be wide opened and the Tongue depressed. [Table 13. figu. 4. betwixt F and I] The Grecians call it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Yet this word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 hath diuers significations: sometimes it is taken for that we call Fau∣ces or the Chops, sometimes for the Larynx or Throttle, because they are neare together, sometimes also for the whole rough Artery. Aristotle in diuers places giueth this name to the Gullet. Philoxenus Erixius sayeth a notable Gourmandizer wished his 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 (that is his Gullet) bigger then a Cranes. Some by this word vnderstand all the glandulous bo∣dies about the Choppes. But in Hippocrates where wee haue this worde 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 put by it selfe, it signifieth some disease of the Chops, as their roughnesse, as in the fift Aphorisme of the third Section, or their Inflamations, as in the 7. Section of the sixt Booke Epidime. and the first Aphorisme. This place also is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by Galen, and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by Hippocrates by a Metaphor, because of the narrownesse of the place: for Isthmus signifieth properly a nar∣row tract of ground betwixt two Seas, and in the whole body there is no part so narrow

and straight which conteineth so many instruments. For in these Fauces are contained, first, the holes of the nosthrils descending through the palate into the mouth [Tab. 13. fig. 4. after E.] of which we haue spoken in the historie of the Nose; againe, the muscles of the Fauces or Chops, the bone Hyois vnder the roote of the tongue, the tong it selfe, the Larinx together with the Epiglottis and the beginning of the gullet; beside the muscles of these parts and some of the loweriaw. Add hereto certaine propagations of the nerues of the third, sixt and seuenth coniugations, the iugular veines, the sleepy Arteries, and certaine glandules of which wee will intreate in the next place because they are best exhibited in the thirteenth Table.

There are three sorts of Glandules in the region of the Chops.

The first is vnder the roots of the Eares (which Vesalius accounteth for the third kind) of which we will speake in the eleuenth booke. The 2. are those they call Tonsillae or the Almonds, of which we will intreate in this place. The third are those (Vesalius calleth them the first) which grow at the roote of the Larinx on the sides of the rough Artery, of which we shal make mention when we come to the Lavinx, but discourse of in the 11. book

The Almonds are commonly called Tonsillae [Tab. 13. fig. 4. F.] Celsus calleth them sim∣ply Glandules. They are scituated in both sides of the Mouth at the rootes of the tongue betwixt the holes of the nosthrils and the Larynx, or betweene the beginnings of the wea∣zon and the gullet, on either side one, large, long, and compared to Almonds and therfore they are commonly called the Almonds of the throte. The Gracians call them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because they are seated in the Istmus of which we spake euen now. For if you looke into the cauitie of the mouth when the lower iaw is remooued, you shall see the two holes of the nosthrils and the Vuula or Gargareon: the two holes like two seas, and the Gagareon like a narrow tract or necke of land running betweene them. By the same name of Paristhmia they vse also to call not onely a part of the Fauces or Chops, but also the inflammation thereof, yea the diseases of these glandules when they are inflamed, or when they swell or are resiccated when they hinder (saith Paulus) the free passage of the drinke or the breath. For their swellings seldome hinder the passage of the meate because being but lax or loose bodyes the weight of the meate beareth them downe before it, and by this we commonly distinguish betweene the inflamination of the Muscles of the Tongue, which we call an Angina or Squinsie, and the swelling of the Almonds; for in the Squinsie wee cannot swallow any thing without great difficultie, and the more solid thing the worse; in the swelling of the Almonds we can hardly draw our breath or take downe any liquour, but solid meate will goe downe much more easily.

Sometimes also by the word Paristhmia is vnderstood the inflammation onely of the coate which we sayde was common to the Chops, the whole mouth and the stomach; sometimes the inflammation of those muscles which lie next vnder the saide coate, some∣times the inflammation of the bodyes which are within the Fauces.

They be also called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by Hippocrates in his second booke de morbis, because they are placed in opposition one vnto another; but this name is not giuen onely to the Glan∣dules but also to their disease, so saith Hippocrates in the place before quoted; It will not bee amisse to thrust your finger into your mouth and to beare downe the Antiades, that is, the Almonds when they are swelled. Yet some put a difference betweene Antiades & Paristh∣mia, for they say, that the Almonds themselues inflamed are called Antiadas, and the inflā∣mation of the parts about the Almonds Paristhmia. So saith Celsus, the Graecians call the Almonds which are hard after their inflammation 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

They are couered with the common coate of the mouth and the other parts of which we spake lately which is neruous and in many places perforated with large and ample holes, insomuch that some haue sayde it is fungous. These holes saith Fallopius, if the glandules be a little swelled, are wont to deceiue Chyrurgions, for they take them to bee Vlcers, whereas indeed there are no Vlcers at all; for when the glandules fall they become againe according to their wonted nature. They also receiue veines from the iugulars. Their substance is like that of the glandules, but more rare, spongy and fungous, and there∣fore Hyppocrates in his fourth book Epidemiωn cals them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Sponges, because after the manner of Sponges they drinke vp humidirie, yet Hippocrates also calleth their tumors by the name of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

The vse of these Almonds is saith Hippocrates in his booke de Glandulis, to receiue the moysture of the brayne: this moysture it conuerteth into spittle, whereby all the parts with∣in

the mouth are moystned (the Tongue kept from drying, made more glib and nimble) euen the gullet and the weazon. It helpeth also the Sense of Tasting, for we cannot Tast without moysture; like as in the stomacke there is no concoction or mittigation without boyling, whereof they haue experience whose Tongues are rough and dry.

CHAP. XXXII. Of the Tongue and his Muscles.

THE Tongue is called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in Latin Lingua, of licking, or because it is as it were tyed within the pale of the Teeth sayeth Varro. It is a notable instrument both of the Taste and of the Voyce; because in the Mouth it is pla∣ced next vnder the Palate [Table 13. fig. 4. I] in the way, sayth Cicero 2. de Nat. Deorum, which Nature prepared for the passage of meats and drinks. The Ba∣sis of it resteth vppon the bone Hyois aboue which it is mooued, and neare the Epiglottis it maketh an angle or corner, and from thence hangeth and walketh freely in the mouth.

It was fit (sayeth Galen in the fift chapter of his 8. Booke de vsu partium) that it should be placed neare the braine as are the rest of the instruments of the Senses, because it is the principall instrument of the Taste. Wherefore Nature for the Tongues sake placed the Mouth in the Head that it might haue a den or caue or chamber to moue in, that it might bee a conuenient instrument both of the Taste and of the Voice, as also might helpe the chewing and swallowing of the meat.

The figure of the Tongue is not alike in all Creatures, in some it is Tri-fanged as in Ser∣pents, in others Bi-fanged as in Lizards; some haue two Tongues as the Sea-Calfe. In Fishes it is fastned all along, in Lions and Leopards it is rough and furrowed, but in man it is somewhat long, thicke at the roote for strength, and broade that it might bee fit both for Taste and Speach. In the end it becommeth by degrees sharpe for quicker motion sayeth Galen in the 10. chap. of the 11. book de vsu partium. Archangelus compareth it to a Pyramis.

The vpper and rough part called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 is hollowed on either side, those they call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

It is soft, broade and loose or at liberty that it may be conuayed, produced, dilated and diuersly disposed; for in those that are tongue-tyed wee see a manifest defect of vtterance. We may also obserue out of Aristotle in the 17. chapter of his second Booke de partibus A∣nimalium, that those Birds which can bee taught to prattle haue broade Tongues aboue o∣ther birds: and the reason why bruite beastes cannot deuide or articulate their voyce is be∣cause their Tongues are hard, thick and not at liberty.

The magnitude of the Tongue is not all one in all creatures, but proportionable for the kinde whereof they are. Neither is the quantity of it all one in all men; but it is lon∣ger then broade, and broader then thicke, and also proportionable for the amplitude of the Mouth, sayeth Galen in the tenth Chapter of his eleauenth booke de vsu partium, that it might reach into euery corner and nooke thereof, and not hinder the receiuing of meate. But it is faulty sometimes in magnitude, sometimes in the very substance toge∣ther with his muscles. For if it be bigge it filleth vp the spaces of the mouth and the Chops, and then it cannot mooue so deliuerly or nimbly as otherwise it would, and such men are called blaesi and balbutientes, that is Lispers and Stutters, especially if (as it happeneth most what) it bee also too soft or moyst. Hence it is that Infants and those children that are moyster then ordinary doe speake slower then others, because of the softnesse and loosenes of their Tongues and the muscles thereof, till when their heate by their age encreasing the ouer aboundant moysture be consumed. The Tongue also sometimes is too short when the Bridle thereof is not enough cut, so then it is hindered that it cannot apply it selfe on e∣uery side to the Mouth; or because the muscles being little it is mooued too swiftly and so implicateth or doubleth the speach and maketh the words come hudling together.

It is tyed to the Larynx, to the bone Hyois vpon which the rootes thereof resteth as vp∣pon a Basis and by which it is supported, to the Choppes also, and on both sides to the Al∣monds; below it is fastned with a ligament.

The Tongue is compounded of a proper flesh, a coate, nerues, veines, arteries, mus∣cles and a ligament.

The ligament is [Table 14. fig. 3. II] very strong, membranous and broade, and is vn∣der the middest of the body thereof.

The vse of this ligament is manifould: for the solidity and strength thereof lifteth vp the Tongue, and not onely so but auaileth much to lill it foorth. For were it not for this

[illustration]

Table 14. Figure 1. and 2. sheweth the tongue cut from the bodie, and the Muscles thereof. In the first the right side of it, & in the second his Muscles somewhat vncouered.

[illustration]

Figure 3. steweth the bodie of the Tongue diuided according to the length of it and his Ligament.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XIIII.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

Tab. 14. figure 1. sheweth the Larynx, hauing the Shielde Gristle cut into two parts, but one part of it together with the Epiglottis is inuerted as by the Letters may be perceiued.

[illustration]

Figure 2. exhibiteth the Larynx shewing the Glottis.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

• AAA. The Tongue inuested with a Coate common to the mouth.
• BB. A portion of the coat compas∣sing the mouth cut frō the mouth according to the sides of the low∣er iaw.
• C A part of the same coat cut from the inner part of the Palat toge∣ther with the tongue.
• D. The Muscles caled Basi-Glossi, a∣cording to Vesalius the first, but in our account the fourth, or the sixt of the bone Hyois according to Falopius.
• E. The Muscles cald Ceratoglossi, or the second Muscle according to Vesalius, and in our account the fifte.
• F. The Muscles called Styloglossi or the third Muscle.
• G. The Muscles called Myloglossi, or the fourth Muscle according to Vesalius.
• H. The flesh consisting of the Glā∣dules, or the ninth Muscle of the Tongue according to Vesalius.
• II. The Ligament of the Tongue.
• KK, LL. The Musculous substance of the tongue, & the fibres thereof.

[illustration]

The Second Figure.

• a 1. The Shield-gristle Dissected.
• b 1. The Epiglottis or After-tongue.
• c, c. The Arytaenoides or the Ewre∣gristle.
• 1, 2. The glottis or small clefte of the Throttle.
• ee, 1. The internall Muscle forming this cleft or the internall Shield∣gristle.
• f. 2. The opening Muscle or the lat∣ter Crycoarythaenoides.
• g. 2. The transuerse Muscle or the Arytaenoydes.

ligament the Tongue would be too much gathered backward, neither when it is shot out of the mouth could it bee easily retracted or drawne in againe. Moreouer, if it were on euerie side free and loose it had not beene so firmely established and fastened in his pro∣per seate. This Ligament also receyueth the insertion, saith Vesalius, of the proper Mus∣cles of the Tongue which otherwise would easily haue bene relaxed or loosened or else parted asunder. At the end of this Ligament toward the tip of the tongue there grow∣eth a little Chord which Arantius and Lawrentius call the Bridle of the Tongue. For a mans Tongue in new borne infants is fastened euen vnto the end with a Tye which the Midwiues do vse to teare with their Nailes, sometimes it is faine to be cut, because it is a hinderance to their speech, yea to their sucking, because it cannot lappe it selfe so well a∣bout the nipple. The tongue therefore beeing naturally nimble and voluble least that it should bee alwayes importunately pratling, is restrayned by this Tye, as it were by a Bridle. Wherefore, by the helpe of the Ligament and the Bridle and of manie Muscles working together and contracted towards their originall, the Tongue becommeth nar∣row

and pointed, lifted vp and diuerslie mooued, and withall restrained from moouing too farre on any hand.

It is inuested with a coate common to it with the Mouth, the Pallate, the Gullet and the Larynx [Tab. 14. fig. 1. ^AA. ^BB. ^C] least the laxe and rare substance thereof shoulde part asunder. This Coate is all verie fine and thin, that the sapors might more easily pierce through it into the pulpe and substance of the tongue, into which coate as also into the flesh certaine Nerues of exquisite sense are disseminated.

The substance of it is soft, loose, rare and like a Sponge that it might bee the sooner moistened with the humour which carrieth the Sapor in it, and so fitter to discerne of the diuersity of Tastes, for of them it is the competent iudge. Hence it is, that in diseases it is diuersly affected, for as the humour is that it imbibeth so is the sense of Tasting de∣praued, as we may see in those that are sick of the yellow Iaundise or of Agues. The flesh therefore of the Tongue is proper and peculiar to the Tongue, there being none such in the whole bodie: toward the Basis it commeth neerer to a Glandulous substance then to a Musculous, because it is much softer and looser; yet hath it all manner of fibres, but those so intertexed and wouen together that they cannot be separated one from ano∣ther which may be done in Muscles.

Againe, the Fibres runne through the length of the Muscles, which is not so in the Tongue; for it hath no Ligamentall Fibres to strengthen it as Muscles haue, vnlesse it be a middle one which runneth vnder the tongue. Finally, no Nerues from the Braine that should giue it the power of motion do runne through the substance thereof, wherefore it cannot be called Musculous, although I know some men are of opinion that it is made of two Muscles arising out of the bone Hyois, and determining in the tip of the Tongue seuered by a white line: some say also there are two other Muscles of which the pulp of the Tongue is compounded: but if it were made of Muscles it should onely mooue not taste, for what Muscle doth taste? Wee resolue therefore that the flesh of it is not Mus∣culous.

At the rootes of the Tongue, besides the Muscles inserted thereinto, there adhereth a great quantity of hard fat.

The tongue receiueth two kinds of Nerues, one soft which carieth sense vnto it from the third and fourth coniugations, yet so that one branch is disseminated into the coate that inuesteth the tongue to be an instrument of Touching, for the Tongue is apprehen∣siue of all the Tactile qualities, as cold, heate and such like. The other Nerue is sprinck∣led into the flesh of the Tongue which is the instrument or organe of Taste, and by that meanes the Tongue is made apprehensiue of Sapors.

The other kinde of Nerues is hard, that is, Nerues of motion, to witte, the seauenth coniugation, which with many surcles is disseminated into his muscles that the tongue might be mooued with voluntary motion; and because this Nerue is placed in the low∣er part of the Tongue, the Chyrurgion or Midwife must be verie carefull lest when they cut the Ligament they do not also cut the Nerue.

It hath also two notable Veynes called Raninae, not because they are like Frogges, but because they are of the colour of a Frogge. They issue out of the inward braunch of the externall Iugular Veynes and runne vnder the Tongue, as it will appeare vnto anie man that lifteth it vp. These Veynes in the diseases of the mouth, the heate of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Squinsie and such like, are opened for deriuation; after the blood is euacuated and re∣uelled by the opening of the Humerarie Veine of the Arme.

It hath also two large Arteries on either side one from the sleepie Arteries which ac∣company the Veynes. These are allowed to the tongue to maintaine the life of it, as the Veines were to supply it with nourishment.

The body of the Tongue although it bee continuall not diuided by any partition, whereby it becommeth fitter to Taste with, to breake the meate, and to articulate the voyce: yet it is diuided or rather scored thorough the middest with a white line, which Hippocrates in Coacis first called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, the Median, which Line runneth thorough the verie middest of the surface of the tongue diuiding it into a right side and a left, yet not as it is in Lizardes whose Tongues are forked; so that the Tongue as all other the Instruments of the Senses is double, and therefore Galen calleth it a Double Member.

The Vses of the Tongue, although it be but a little Member yet it is of great vse be∣cause it expresseth all the conceites of the minde, wherefore our wise Creator hath de∣fended

it with many Teeth, with Lippes, and restrained it with a Bridle, that beeing so carefully attended it might not runne before the minde, which first ought to consulte and deliberate before the Tongue pronounce any thing.

The vse therefore of the Tongue is either primary or secondary. The primarie vse is, that it might be a conuenient and fit organ or instrument both of the Sense of Tasting & of the Speech. Of the Taste (which vse of the Tongue is common to Man and beast) to distinguish betweene all the varieties of Sapors; wherefore Aristotle in the 11. chapter of his first booke de Historia Animalium saith, there is in the mouth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, A Tongue which is the Sensator of Tastes. The taste which the Tongue hath it receyueth especiallie from the Coate which inuesteth the mouth, and particularly from that part of it which couereth the tongue. For whilst wee chew our meate the Tongue rowleth it selfe on euerie side of the mouth and applyeth it selfe to the Viands to take a say or Taste of them.

Moreouer, because we can thrust or lill out our Tongues, we are able to discerne of the Sapors of those things also which are without the mouth if the Tongue do but touch them, especially with the very tip, for there saith Aristotle the taste is most quicke in the 27 chapter of his second booke De partibus Animalium, and therefore saith he, in Fishes one∣ly the very tippe of the tongue is loose, the rest is fastened downe vnto the Soale of the mouth.

Concerning the vse of the Tongue in the voice, Hippocrates hath made mention in his Booke De Carnibus. As also Aristotle in the eight chapter of his second booke De A∣nima, for it is the very organ of Articulation, so we saide before that those Birdes which haue broad tongues may easiest be taught to prattle, as we see in Parrats. Euripides there∣fore calleth the Tongue 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, The Messenger of the Speech. And therefore a mans Tongue which is the best proportioned and most at libertie, attaineth to the greatest per∣fection in the deliuery and variety of the voice. For although a Parrat, a Stare, and such like Birds can moderate their Tongues to a kinde of faigned distinction of Sounds, yet in man the sound is more expresse and better articulated. Beside, sayeth Hippocrates in his Booke of the Epilepsie, the Tongue of a man is the messenger of the Braine, that is, as Bauhine well enterpreteth it of the Vnderstanding and the Wil; but in other Creatures it de∣liuereth onely the affections of the Sensatiue soule which Galen calles Rationem delite scen∣tem, A silent shadow of reason, which he attributeth to all creatures deuoyde of reason. So we see euen in the tongue of a man, sometimes it expresseth onelie those things that fall vnder the Sense, as when wee crie for paine, or for Foode and succour; sometimes those things that fall vnder our vnderstanding as in Discourse.

The Secondarie Vse of the Tongue is for mastication or chewing, or breaking of the meate, and for diglutition or Swallowing.

By this motion of the Tongue those Creatures that want Teeth doe swallow their meate whole, as Birdes; and those that haue Teeth doe with theyr Tongues mooue their Viandes vnto their Teeth whereby they are mittigated and broken, and so receyue in the mouth a good preparation for the Stomacke, which otherwise woulde not nor coulde not so easilie concoct them, for shredde meate is more easiler boyled then a vvhole Ioynt.

Againe, the Tongue helpeth the Diglutition by turning the meate ouer it towards the Gullet. By the Tongue also wee can licke and whistle, or varrie the sounde of anie Fife or Pipe, or such like. All these good offices the Tongue dooth in a man, in other Creatures but one or at least not all. For in the perfection of Creatures (sayeth Galen in the Fifte Chapter of his seconde Booke De Semine, Nature proceedeth by degrees from a Plant. The first Degree, is of those Creatures which haue onelie the Sense of Touching; more perfect are those that Taste, yet more that Smell, then those that Heare: and finally, she addeth the Sense of Seeing which is the vtmost perfection of the sensatiue Soule.

The Muscles of the Tongue are assistant vnto it in the performance of all his Fun∣ctions of Speaking, Tasting and Rowling of the Meate: and therefore there are three kinde of Muscles belonging vnto it which wee may call Locutorij, Gustatorij and Cibi re∣uolutores, the Speaking, the Tasting and the Rowling Muscles.

[illustration]

Table 14. Figure 1. and 2. sheweth the tongue cut from the bodie, and the Muscles thereof. In the first the right side of it, & in the second his Muscles somewhat vncouered.

[illustration]

Figure 3. steweth the bodie of the Tongue diuided according to the length of it and his Ligament.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XIIII.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

Tab. 14. figure 1. sheweth the Larynx, hauing the Shielde Gristle cut into two parts, but one part of it together with the Epiglottis is inuerted as by the Letters may be perceiued.

[illustration]

Figure 2. exhibiteth the Larynx shewing the Glottis.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

• AAA. The Tongue inuested with a Coate common to the mouth.
• BB. A portion of the coat compas∣sing the mouth cut frō the mouth according to the sides of the low∣er iaw.
• C A part of the same coat cut from the inner parte of the Palate to∣ther with the tongue.
• D. The Muscles cald Basi-Glossi, ac∣cording to Vesalius the first, but in our account the fourth, or the sixt of the bone Hyois according to Falopius.
• E. The Muscles cald Ceratoglossi, or the second Muscle according to Vesalius, and in our account the fifte.
• F. The Muscles called Styloglossi or the third Muscle.
• G. The Muscles called Myloglossi, or the fourth Muscle according to Vesalius.
• H. The flesh consisting of the Glā∣dules, or the ninth Muscle of the Tongue according to Vesalius.
• II. The Ligament of the Tongue.
• KK, LL. The Musculous substance of the tongue, & the fibres thereof.

[illustration]

The Second Figure.

• a 1. The Shield-gristle Dissected.
• b 1. The Epiglottis or After-tongue.
• c,c. The Arytaenoides or the Ewre∣gristle.
• d, 1, 2. The glottis or small clefte of the Throttle.
• ee, 1. The internall Muscle forming this cleft or the internall Shield∣gristle.
• f. 2. The opening Muscle or the lat∣ter Crycoarythaenoides.
• g. 2. The transuerse Muscle or the Arytanoydes.

The chiefe vse of it in man is speech, the chiefe vse in Beasts is tasting, because they want hands to gather and apply their meate vnto their mouthes as men haue: but both men and beasts when their meate is in their mouths doe rowle it with their tongue, or turne it ouer into their Gullets. The tongue must therefore be mooueable & haue Mus∣cles, which Muscles are of two sorts, some Common, others Proper. Those are accoun∣ted common Muscles which belong vnto the bone Hyois, and those proper which haue their originall from other where, and do determine into the substance of the Tongue, & they are accounted siue paire called Styloglossi, [Tab. 14. fig. 1, 2.^F] Myloglossi, [Tab. 14. fig. 1, 2.^G] Geneoglossi, [Tab. 14. fig. 1, 2.^H] Basiglossi or Ypsiglossi, [Ta. 14. fig. 1, 2.^Do] & Cera∣toglossi. [Tab. 14. fig. 1. 2.^L] But of these we shall entreat particularly in the Book of Mus∣cles, heere it is enough to haue pointed them out.

These Muscles being remooued, at the roote of the tongue there appeareth a kinde of flesh made of many glandules and fat mixed together, which saith Archangelus doth not deserue the name of a Muscle, so saith also Columbus, yet hee reckons it for the 11. Mus∣cle,

because the Anatomists before him accoūted it for a muscle. But a muscle is not made of glandules but of fleshy fibres.

This heape of Glandules [Table 14. figur. 1. 2. H] groweth to the roote of the Tongue that it might continually be moistned, for without moisture there can be no Gustation. So in the stomacke there can be no concoction without Elixation or boyling, wherefore Na∣ture ioyned to the Stomacke the Pancreas or Sweete-bread a glandulous body, that from thence might continually steame moyst vapours, that so the concoction of the stomacke might be made by Elixation or boyling. Beside, the moysture which the Tongue receiueth from these glandules makes it more glib and easily to be moued; for if it be dryed it wil not mooue so readily, as wee may see in those that are very drie, & in hot burning Agues when the humour or moysture of the Tongue is exhausted. Beside the Glandules, the Almonds also of the throat (as we remembred before) do continually moysten the Tongue and help his motion. And thus much of the Tongue.

CHAP. XXXIII. Of the Sense of Tasting.

WEE sayd before that there were three things required in euery Sense; the In∣strument, the Medium and the Obiect. Which three wee will shew in this fourth Sense of Tasting as far as we can gather out of Anatomy.

The Physitians following Galen in his book de instrumento odoratus, and in the fift chapter of his 7. booke de Placitis, doe determine that the instrument of the Taste is the Tongue, and that it is affected to Sapors as the Eie is to colours. But as in the Eie there is one particle which is said to be the most principal instrument of Seeing, the other but assistant: so in the Tongue there is one similar part which is the most prin∣cipall instrument of Tasting, and that is the rare and laxe substance thereof, which is there∣fore rare & spongy, that it might be better steeped with the moysture wherein the Sapors are conuayed. The other parts of the Tongue are but helpers and handmaids all contri∣buting vnto the principall part. This substance, call it flesh, or pulpe, or what you will, because it was made to receiue all Sapors was to be deuoyde of all Sapor, that is insiped or hauing no Taste at all as we vsually speake, and that it is so any man may perceiue if hee eat of the Tongue of any beast boyled fresh and without any sauce.

The matter wherein the formes of Sapors do consist which wee call Natura subiecta, is moyst: for without moysture (sayth the Philosopher in the 10. chapter of his 2. booke de Anima) nothing can make an impression of a Sapot, and euery thing that maketh this kind of Sensation or moueth this Sense hath humidity in it, either Actu or potentia, that is, ey∣ther Actually and Really or in Possibilitie; and by how much a thing is the moyster, by so much is it the more sauoury, because all things when they are moyst doe make a better im∣pression of their Sauour then when they are hard.

Hence it is that those things that are hard as Pepper and such like, do not make shew of the gustile qualities vnlesse their vpper & superficial parts do giue, or melt, or be moistned. The sweetnesse of Sugar we Taste better when it is melted, and a corne of Salt will strike the Sense much more after it is dissolued then before. An infusion of Rheubarbe is much bitterer then a peece Rheubarbe held in a mans mouth. Seeing then that Sapors are not perceiued but as they communicate their qualities to moyste substances, it followeth that the instrument of this Sense must neither be actually moyst, neither yet of such a substance as cannot be moystned: but it must be Potentially Moyste and Actually moystned; yet so that when it is moystned the Nature of it must be preserued.

Hence it is that when the Tongue is either too dry or too moyst it doth not Taste well. For example, if a man Taste of any sharpe or vehement thing as Pepper, and then present∣ly Tast of an other thing, he is not able to iudge well of the latter; the reason is because the Tongue is already possessed and forestaled or taken vp with the former sharpe humour. So likewise we see that those that are sicke think all things bitter, the reason is because their Tongues are moystned with a bitter iuice.

The Tongue therefore was made of an earthy and dry substance; for albeit because of the softnesse it may seeme to bee moyste, yet this moysture is not Innate but an acquired moysture distilling perpetually out of the braine which insinuateth it selfe into the Toung as water doeth into a sponge. That this is so it is euident, for if the distilation out of the head be stayed, the Tongue is presently exiccated, yea so parched by hot vapours eleuated from the Liuer, the Stomacke and the Lungs, that it becommeth rough, yea in Agues it

cleaueth or choppeth and the marks or scarres of those fissures remaine many yeares to be seene; which thing (sayeth Bauhine) I haue experience of in my selfe, for 17. yeares since I had an Ague, and my Tongue claue or chopped in the middest, and yet the marke of it is manifestly to be seene.

Galen therefore in his Booke de Odoratus Organo, and in the sixt chapter of his seuenth Booke de Placitis, hath truely taught vs that the instrument of Tasting was made of a moyst substance, where hee intendeth to diliuer the qualities of the instruments which are most appropriate to the perticular Senses. For if the Tongue be too much exiccated, the Per∣ceiuance or knowledge of Sapours must needes perish: and therefore Nature set the Al∣monds neare the Tongue least the ayre that is continually drawne and let out by Inspirati∣on and Expiration should drie it too much. And so much of the Instrument.

The Medium of this Sense wee take to bee the coate of the Tongue, as the Cuticle or Scarfe-skinne is the medium of the Touch. For (sayth the Philosopher in the 114. Text of the second Booke de Anima) all things that apprehend by any Sensation we apprehend by a Medium, there being no Sensation made by the immediat contaction of the Instrument and the Obiect, although afterward in the 10. chapter of the same booke (not so well ad∣uised) he denyeth that either the Taste or the Touch haue any Medium, to which place we refer him that is desirous to know his reasons.

The Obiect of the Taste are all thinges that haue any Sapour or Gustable qualities in them. But the qualities of Gustable things are of two sortes, some properly belonging to the Sense of Tasting as Sapours. For as the obiect of the Sight is Colour, so the obiect of the Tast is Sapor; yet nothing that is without moysture exhibiteth any Sapor to the Sense: others are Common to all the Senses as the Magnitude of that which is Gustable, the Nū∣ber, the Situation &c. VVherefore we say that the Tong doth Taste the Sapor of wine, not the wine; yet from this Sapour the Soule gathereth that it is wine which wee Taste. For wine as it is wine, and sugar as it is sugar are not the Obiects of the Faculty of Gustation, but as they are indowed with Sapors or Gustable qualities. The Soule indeed by discourse of Reason distinguisheth betweene a sharp Taste and a bitter, but it is by the mediation of the Sense of Tasting; when the Sensible qualities of those sharpe or bitter things do moue and affect the Faculties of Sensation. But that a Sapor may be exactly iudged of or appre∣hended, the body wherin that Sapor is, must be broken between the Palate and the Tong, and therefore the Palate and the Tongue are compassed about or inuested with one and the same coate.

Hence it is that euen the Palate helpeth the Taste, because also it receiueth the like di∣stribution of the nerues of the same coniugation that the tongue hath.

The kindes of Sapours as the Philosopher sayth, are accounted after the same manner with the kinds of Colours. For as white and blacke are contraries, and the other Colours leane to this or that Contrary; so Sweete and Bitter are the two simple contraries; to sweet adheareth that wee call Fattie: to Bitter that which is Salt: and betwixt these are Byting, as Pepper, Harsh as vnripe Sloes, Sowre and Sharpe as Vineger. For these are the diffe∣rences of Sapors according to the Philosopher; concerning which he that will know more let him refort to Galen his first Book de simplie. Facultat. where also he shall finde what was Platoes Philosophy concerning the difference of Sapors.

VVe conclude that the Tongue as the Instrument of the Taste being neither drye nor too moyst, nor steeped or dewed with any ill iuyce, doeth through his coate as through the true Medium Receiue and Perceiue the Sapours that consist in a moyst body, and that by a Faculty or Power issuing from the braine by the nerues of the third and fourth coniuga∣tion, and penetrating into the Instrument of Tasting, that is the Flesh or Pulpe of the Tongue.

For the Faculty (sayeth Plato in Theaeteto, and Galen in the 6. chapter of his 7. booke de Placitis) which issueth from the first Sensator, that is, the Braine, and through the Nerues penetrateth into the particular Organs of the Senses, and there Perceiueth and iudgeth of all their alterations; is a common Faculty: and therefore we call the brayne the Common Sensator, and the apprehension thereof the Common Sense. And thus much of the foure Senses (The first hauing beene discoursed of in the second booke. Now wee come vnto the Voyce.

CHAP. XXXIV. Of the Larinx or Throtle, which is the Organ of the voyce.

THe Rough Arterie is diuided into the pipe which consisteth of Semicircu∣ler gristles with a membrane, and the head of it which wee call the Larinx it is called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which signifieth to cry with open throate: or of the particle 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 which of it selfe signifieth nothing but in com∣position ad-signifieth a kinde of greatnesse, and the word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, be∣cause in the forming of the voyce we draw our breath deepe. Some call it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 but that is properly vsed for the Fauces or Chops; for the Pharinx is before the Larinx: others de∣riue it of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 which signifieth to be lifted vp, because when wee swallow or rayse our voyce very high or vtter it very base, the Larinx is eleuated as any man may see with his eyes. Some call it the knot of the Throate.

The Larinx therefore is the head or vpper end of the Rough Arterie ioyned in con∣tinuitie with the Fauces, compounded of great gristles (vnlike those that bee in the rest of the weazon both in the figure and magnitude) Muscles, Membranes, and common Or∣gans: to be the first and most principall Organ of the tuning of the voyce; for in it the voice is first formed.

It is situated in the Necke, because it is the way of the Ayre, and in the very top of Rough Arterie that vnto it the breath which is the matter of the voyce might easily runne vp from the lungs. Neere the Chops also, the mouth and the tongue that the voyce might instantly bee changed into speech. Moreouer, because it was necessary that it should be perpetually dilated and constringed together with the Organs of Respiration, therefore it was placed on the outside afore the Gullet, that it might not be pressed with the weight of any thing lying vpon it: yea and this position is a great furtherance to swallowing also. For when we swallow our meate the Gullet is drawne downeward, but the Larynx resulteth vpward and helpeth the swallow as well by giuing way therto and leauing scope and roome as also by depressing the meate when it starteth vp as that is falling. It is placed in the very middest of the necke because there is but one Throtle, as also other single Organes are pla∣ced in the middest, that the body might be equally ballanced. Now there was but one that the voyce might bee but one. For if we should haue vttered two voyces at one time, wee could not but haue confounded two acts or affects of the minde.

The figure is round and circular but imperfect, bunching out before that it might bee more secure from outward iniuries, behind depressed that it might giue way to the Gullet and leaue space to swallow. Againe it was round, that it might bee concauous or hollow, that so the voyce might be more perfect by a plentiful affluence of the breath ther∣vnto out of the lungs. The lower orifice also of the throtle is larger then the vpper (saith Galen in the second chapter of his seuenth booke de vsu partium) that in expiration the ayre might ascend more plentifully thereunto to make a base voyce. Finally, it is most like a Quaile call of any thing in the world which indeede is made in imitation of this worke of Nature.

The magnitude thereof is diuers according to the diuersitie of the age, which variety the voyce also followeth. For in children when the Larinx is narrow the voyce is sharper, small, or treble because a little ayre is swiftly moued through a narrow passage; on the con∣trary in old or elder age the Larynx is wider, and receiueth from the Lungs a greater quan∣tity of ayre, whence it is that the motion is not so swift and so the voyce becommeth base; moreouer the length or shortnesse of the Larynx beare a great sway in the basenes or shrilnes of the voyce.

It is tyed to the rough Artery by the helpe of muscles of Membranes, as & also to the Gullet, the Chest, and the bone Hyois, moreouer to the principall parts by the meditation of common Organs.

The parts whereof the Larinx is compounded are Gristles, Muscles, Membranes, Veines, Arterics and Nerues, together with the Glandules which grew thereto. And it was neces∣sary it should be compounded of such a substance. Gristly, that it might be hard, dense and thicke, able to resist outward iniuries. Againe, because it is the way of the breath it was fit that the cauity should be made of a hard body that might alwayes stand open for egresse and ingresse of the Ayre. For (saith Galen) if it had beene made of flesh or a membrane, the hole of it would haue falne and the passage should not haue bene so free for the breath

and so the body haue beene depriued, not of voyce onely, but of life also, because the re∣spiration would haue bene intercepted.

If it had bene bony the hardnesse thereof would haue pressed vpon the gullet and so haue hindred diglutition or swallowing, beside the very weight would haue drawne downe the tongue and the bone Hyois, and hindered their actions; it would haue needed great mu∣scles to haue moued so heauy a body which must haue taken vp a greater place then in so narrow a roome could be allotted to them. And if the bones had beene so fine and thinne that all these inconueniences had beene preuented, then it would haue easily bene broken being placed outward, for bones will not yeeld as gristles doe.

I know well that Columbus is of opinion that it is bony in growne men, which hee a∣uoucheth vpon his owne dissection of innumerable bodyes (those are his words) although he confesseth that in young children it is grystly as not hauing attained his hardnesse and soliditie. One argument also he addeth, which is, that the substance is medullous or mar∣rowy as he hath often found, in which one thing bones differ from grystles. He also re∣prehendeth Galen for cutting vp Apes and not obseruing that their throtles were bony, and Vesalius for shewing the Throtles of beastes in his publike dissections. But Fallopius whom we esteem the more oculate Anatomist saith, that sometimes he hath found the first and second grystles bony in very old men, yea sometimes before extreme old age; but the third and the fourth grystles, saith he, I neuer saw bony, neither can I approue of their o∣pinions that thinke the Larynx is bony and not grystly, vnlesse it be imperfect, because Nature intended it to be bony. For (saith Fallopius) if this were so, then we must confes that no man hath the instrument of his voyce perfect till he come to bee old or striken in yeares, which must not be granted. Of the same mind also is Laurentius.

Bauhine proceedeth further to prooue it grystly on this manner. It is the instrument of the voyce, and therefore there must be a proportion betweene the ayre that is beaten, & the body which beateth it, that so it may resound for the forming of the voyce; for the voyce is nothing else but a percussion of the Ayre. And although sounds doe arise from hard bodyes not from soft, as a sponge, a locke of wooll, or such like; for that the Ayre is not broken vnlesse it light against a solid, hard and smooth body; yet it must not bee perfectly hard, for such a one doth not readily cut the ayre, but ouerturns it. Nor too soft, for then it yeeldeth and maketh no resistance, and therefore cannot make any sound. Such a body therefore which yeeldeth moderately, and beateth the ayre gently, is the cause of the voyce, now such a body is a gristle. Finally, it was made gristly (saith Galen in the fourth chapter of his booke of the dissection of the instrument of the voyce) that it might be a fit foundation for the other parts whereof the Larynx is compounded: and that the Muscles might better arise therefrom and be implanted thereinto.

But it was not fit it should be made of one entire gristle without any articulation, & so immoueable, for then it could not haue bene either shut or opened, dilated or contra∣cted. It was therefore made of many annexed one to another and hauing motion, not Naturall, such as is in the Arteries, but voluntary depending vpon the will. For the chiefe vse of it being in inspirations and exspirations; it was meete we should be able to moderate it at ourpleasures, add hereto, that being the instrument of the voyce to admit or expel our breath, it was more then necessary we should haue a voluntary command ouer it. To this purpose Nature also furnished it with muscles, and them with nerues for motion, veines for nourishment, arteries for life, and membranes for their strength. She added also glan∣dules to keep them all moyst.

It is made of 3. gristles (saith Galen:) we say 4, so doth Fallopius & diuers others. For the motions of the Larynx they are double, that is wherby it is dilated and constringed, shut & opened; and therefore there was neede but of two articulations, each of which serue each motion. So that the dilatation and constriction is made by that articulation which is be∣twixt the first gristle and the second. The opening and shutting by that which is betwene the second and the third.

The Muscles of the Larinx are either common or proper, the common Muscles are sixe, that is three paire. The first paire are called Bronchij [Tab. 15. fig. 7. ^xx.] because they cleaue to the rough Arterie. The second paire are called Hyoetdet, or rather Hyothyrocidei, [Tab. 15. fig. 3. ^h.] The third paire are called Oesophagei [Tab. 15. fig. 7. ^ll.] The proper Muscles are ten or fiue paire, of which sixe do dilate and foure do constringe. Some of these are placed forward, some backeward, some without, some within.

[illustration]

Table 15. figure. 3. sheweth some Muscles of the Larynx with a part of the Nerue.

[illustration]

Figure 4. sheweth all the proper Muscles, the Clefte, the Fpiglottis or After-Tengue and the Gristles.

[illustration]

Figure 5. sheweth the backe part of the Larynxe with the Muscles separated, the Gristles and the Epiglottis

[illustration]

Figure 6. The foreside of the Larynx with some muscles.

[illustration]

Figure 7. The transuerse Muscle of the Gullet, also two Common Muscles, together with the Recurrent Nerues

[illustration]

TABVLA. XV.

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

FIG. IV.

[illustration]

FIG. V.

[illustration]

FIG. VI.

[illustration]

FIG. VII.

• b. 4, 5, 6, 7. Epiglottis or the After tongue.
• * 4. The beginning thereof.
• † 5. The roote and foundation thereof.
• cc. 5. The Gristle called Arytaenoides or the Ewre-gristle. d 4. the glottis cleft or whistle.
• e. 4. The internal muscles belonging to the shield-gristle or the 4. pair of proper muscles
• f, 4. the backward Rings-Ewre muscles, or the second paire of proper muscles.
• g, 4, 5. the Ewr-muscles or the fift paire of the proper muscles.
• h. 3. The muscles called Hyo-thyrojdes or the second paire of common muscles belon∣ging to the bone Hyois & the Shield-gri∣stle of the Larynx. i, 3, 7. the Gullet.
• k, 3, 6. The forepart of the rough Artery.
• l, 3, 7. The muscles of the Gullet called aeso∣phogiaei or the third pair of common mus∣cles.
• m. 3. A portion of the nerue descending in∣to the second paire of common muscles.
• nn, 3, 4, 5. The Shielde-gristle, parted in the fourth Figure that the Glottis & the mus∣cles might better be seene. In the fifte Fi∣gure is shewed the Hollowe side of the Shield-gristle, in the sixt the outward and the foreside.
• o. 4. The Cauitie or Ventricle.
• r. 4. The laterall Ring-Ewre muscles or the third paire of proper muscles.
• ss, 4, 6. the forward Ring-shield muscles or the first paire of proper muscles. In the sixt fi∣gure one of them is separated, the other remaineth in his owne place.
• t, 5. The spine or ridge of the Ring gristle.
• u, 6. A cauity in the middest of the Shielde-gristle, made for the Epiglottis or After-tongue.
• xx. 7. The muscles of the weazon or the first paire of common muscles.
• yy, 7. The recurrent Nerues.

The first paire we cal the forward Crycothyroidei [Tab. 15. fig. 4, ^s. but in the sixt fi∣gure the one is separated, the other remaineth in his proper seate.] The second paire we cal the backward Crycoarthenoidei. [Tab. 15. fig. 5, I] The third paire are called the laterall Crycoarthenoidei [Tab. 15. figure. 4, ^r] The fourth paire are called the Internal Thyroidei or Thyroarythenoidei [Table 15. fig. 4. ^c] The fift paire are called Arytenoidei [Tab. 15. fig. 4 and 5. ^g] The larger description and vse of these muscles looke for in the booke of muscles. We wil come to the gristles of the Larynx which we wil handle particularly in this place because they make this notable instrument of the voice, and touch them but by the way in the discourse of gristles.

The Larynx therefore consisteth of three gristles say the Ancients, of four say ma∣nie of the latter Anatomists, and we may so esteem them: one called Thyroides, the other called Crycoeides and the third Arytenoides which is double. These gristles when the mus∣cles are remooued from their outside are some-what rough or rugged, to yeelde to the muscles more commodious originall & implantation. But on the inside they are smooth

as being inuested with a Membrane, and beside smeared ouer with a slimy moysture. Of these Gristles three are mooued in the modulation or tuning of the voice, that called Crycoides is immooueable. The first and the second when men grow old become so hard that some good Anatomists haue thought them bony. But we haue proued before that they must needs be Gristly not bonie.

The first is called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the Shield-Gristle, or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, for 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 signify∣eth a Buckler or Shield. It hath his name from the forme, [Tab. 16. fig. 2. and 3 whole] for it is like the Target that the Ancients were wont to vse that was not round but long the forme is yet kept by Herraldes and in Triumphes where painted Shieldes are vsed of this fashion, the belly a little hollowe and the backe gibbous. This Gristle lying vnder the bone Hyois couereth the forepart so as we can touch it, especially in men in whom it buncheth out more then in women, which bunch or knub they call Pomū Adami, Adams Apple, as if it stucke still in the throate of all his posterity, whereas the woman swallow∣ed it well enough. But the true reason why it appeares in men and seldome in women, is because the Glandules which are placed at the Larynx do make their neckes equall & euen.

It hath foure sides because of the foure processes it hath behinde, for on the back it is not ioynd by the sides. In an oxe (saith Placentinus) there are two most manifest per∣forations aboue, through which the proper muscles of the Larynx receiue propagati∣ons of the Recurrent sinnewes.

It is but one Gristle, although oftentimes there runne a line through the middest. [Tab. 16. fig. 2 and 3 betweene^G and^H] Vesalius esteemeth it two, in men particularly, Lau∣rentius especially in women; howsoeuer, it is the largest and broadest of all the rest, as taking vp the one halfe of the whole Larynx: it is therefore threefold as bigge as any of the other compassing the Larynx and the whistle or pipe thereof which we call Glottis. Moreouer in a man it is larger aboue then below.

It is tyed to the bone Hyois by his vpper processes, and by the lower to the second Gristle.

The substance of it is Gristly, thinne yet hard, the better to defend the Glottis or whistle, and to helpe the breaking of the aire in the forming of the voice. In olde men this Gristle is sometimes so hard that being exceedingly dried it becommeth Bony, yea sometimes a very bone. It beginneth to grow harde at the sides, the middle Line re∣maining gristly for the most part, yet euen that also now and then groweth to be a bone. The exterior superficies of this gristle is conuex or gibbous, and toward the ends of the sides it is rough, into which place the first paire of the Common Muscles of the Larynx are inserted, as also those take their originall which we account for the thirde payre of Common muscles of the Gullet. On the inside it is hollow to forme the long cauity of the Larynx, by which meanes the voice becommeth ful and elegant, for we see that hol∣low things do sound better then plaine, as it is in bels.

It hath foure processes, [Ta. 16. fig. 2 and 3. ^IKLM] two aboue and two below, on each hand of the sides one. With the two vppermost [Tab. 16. fig. 1. ^IK] it is tyed by a Ligament somewhat long to the lower sides of the bone Hyois; [Tab. 16. fig. 1.^BB] which by certaine distances is strengthned with little, long, round and gristly bodies, [Tab. 16. fig. 1. aboue K, I] especially it hath vse of them when the Tongue is put out or drawne in again.

The two lower processes in men are shorter then the vpper, (but in Sheepe quite con∣trarie) [Tab. 16. fig. 2 and 3. ^LM] and are articulated by Arthrodia [Tab. 16. fig. 1. from^L to ^I] with a flat head to a shallow cauity in the second gristle, that the Shield-gristle might be mooued vpward and downward.

On either side neere the processes it hath certaine recurued or bowed cauities. The vpper of which being in the middest [Tab. 16. fig. 2 and 3.^G] is the lesser, made for the E∣piglottis to raise it vp easily and suddenly. The lower are on each side one [on both sides at H] whereinto the anterior Muscles are implanted. [Tab. 15. fig. 6.^s] Finally, this shield∣gristle is mooueable, partly by articulation, partly by Flexion. The Articulation may be called Arthrodia, by which it is drawne length-waies vpward and downeward, and these ioynts are at the lower processes which are ioyned to the second gristle, the draught is made by the first and second paire of the common Muscles. It is also drawne in length without a Muscle being compressed by the 3 paire and loosened by the flexible substance of the gristle. It is also mouable by flexion, for because it is thin it is also flexible, whence

it stretcheth in breadth, it yeeldeth downeward and againe returneth vpward, and so the cauity of the Larynx is lifted vp and depressed, straightned and relaxed.

The vse of this gristle is foure-fould, the first to make the cauity of the Larynx, the se∣cond to establish the glottis or whistle, the third to affoord an implantation or seate of rest for the muscles. And finally, to fashion out the articulations necessarily required in the mo∣tion of the Throttle.

The second and lower gristle is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Ring-gristle, [Table 16 fig. 4. and 5. and 6.] for so Galen and Orthasius his Epitomizer call it because it is like a Ring: and in∣ceed it is very like that bony ring which the Turkes weare vpon their right thumbes when they shoot, that they may drawe the bow string with greater strength. It is commonly called Innominata, the Gristle without a name, because the Antients before Galen gaue it no name the reason hee giues de dissectione musculorum, because they coulde liken it to no∣thing in the whole world; haply saith Bauhine because the actions of the Larynx are perfor∣med by motion, now the other three doe moue, but this being as it were the Basis and foū∣dation of the rest is altogether immouable.

It lyeth vnder the Shield-gristle and is the Basis of the other gristles which it sustaineth. It lyeth vpon the first gristle of the Rough arterie to which it is ioyned by a Ligament, and the greatest part of it is in the backpart of the Larynx, yet it compasseth it round about like a ••ing establishing it by his hardnes. And it was very necessary it should be like a Ring or per∣fect Circle, partly that the pipe might be alwaies open, and so way made for the ingresse & egresse of the Ayre, otherwise in the motion of the Larynx the semicircular gristles of the weazon would haue beene compressed: partly least when the Gullet is dilated or stretched by the swallowing of an hard and thicke substance, the pipe or weazon which is the way of the breath should be compressed, whence suffocation or strangling must needs follow. On the outside and foreside it is gibbous, narrowe, slender and round like the other gristles of the weazon. [Table 16. figu. 4. and 5. R] Gibbous the better to defend it selfe, to helpe the shield-gristle to make the cauity, to help the sound and to dulcifie it. Thinner that it might not hinder the ayre that was to bee driuen into the shield-gristle; for if it had in this place beene broader, then had the shield-gristle wanted place to moue it selfe in. But behinde where it doth not compasse the shield-gristle it was fitte it should bee broader, and so well might be; [Table. 16. figu. 4. 5. and 6. S] broad I say like the head of a ring whereon the seale is grauen, and flat: otherwise the roundnesse of it together with the hardnesse would haue hindred the swallow.

Moreouer it is also thicker, especially towards the vpper part, and that because of the ar∣ticulation; and that the slit and the whistle might bee on euery side defended and establi∣shed: adde hereto another reason why it was thicke, to wit, that from thence some muscles might take their originall. For in the very middest which is the broadest part there stan∣deth vp a rough lyne [Table 16. fig. 6. T] which Galen in the 7. chapter of his booke ae dis∣sectione vocal. Instrum. calleth the Spine or the ridge of the Gristle without a name. By this lyne is made a shallow cauity on each side [Table 16. fig. 6. VX] wherein the second payre of proper Muscles are commodiously situated. But in the vpper and backward part it hath on each side a long knub [Tab 16. fig. 6. Y Z] or if you had rather call them bunching pro∣cesses (Galen calleth them Shoulders) with which the Ewre-gristle [Ta. 16. fig. 9. εε] is articula∣ted; in which place it is alwaies harder and thicker; so that that which seemed in childhood gristly in the middle or growne age becommeth or at least seemeth to bee bony. In the middest it also swelleth a little on both hands and becommeth thicker [Table 16. figu. 6. N O] and excauated, in which cauity the lower processes of the Shield-gristle whose heades are slatted, are strongly ioyned to this Ring gristle by a plaine articulation. Finally, in the lower part [tab 16. fig. 4. 5. 6. S] there runneth downward a kinde of processe, from whence the third paire of proper muscles do arise.

This Ring gristle by how much it is lesser then the Shield-gristle, by so much it is grea∣ter then the Ewre-gristle: it is also somewhat narrower then the lower Basis of the wezon, wherfore the lower part of the Larynx is larger then the vpper orifice which is in the chops. It is the hardest and the thickest of all the rest (although it be not all of an equall thicknes) because the others rest vpon this as vpon a Basis; wherefore also it is immouable that vp∣pon this the other gristles might be both mooued and articulated, and the muscles which belong vnto the others herein also firmed and established.

It is tyed to the Shield-gristle by the help of membranes or tyes produced from the first

to the second; these ties are double, as also are those which couple the second with the third as Galen teacheth in his booke de voce & anhelitu, and th••se membranes doe inuest not on∣ly the middle part of this Ring-gristle but also the whole basis of this shield-gristle.

The third Gristle of the Larinx is in the sides [Tab. 16 fig. 7. 8. 9.] and is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 that is, the Ewre, because it is like an Ewre out of which water is poured if you marke the two vpper processes couered yet with their Membrane; or because it is like the spout of a wine pot. This is commonly esteemed and receyued for one gristle, because they are not wholly separated, and perform their action together not a sunder. VVhilst it is yet co∣uered with his coate it is like an imperfect Triangle: but if you take of the membranes wherewith it is couered, you shall perceiue that it is made of two gristles [Tab. 16. fig. 7. 8. 9. β γ.] which aboue and belowe, are loosely ioyned by the mediation of ligaments and of

[illustration]

Table 16. Figure 1. Sheweth the whole Larynx composed of his grystles with the bone Hyois, and a part of the weazon or pipe.

[illustration]

Fig. 2. and 3. Sheweth the Sheild-gristle. But 4. 5. and 6. Figures shew the Ring-gristle or that which is without name.

[illustration]

Fig. 7. 8. and 9. Sheweth the Ewre-gristle. The 10. the E∣piglottis, the 16. sheweth the gristles of the weazon.

[illustration]

TABLE XVI.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

.II.

[illustration]

.III.

[illustration]

.IIII.

[illustration]

.V.

[illustration]

.VI.

[illustration]

.VII.

[illustration]

.VIII.

[illustration]

.IX.

[illustration]

.X.

[illustration]

.XI.

• A. 1. The bone hyois.
• B B, 1. His processes.
• C. 1. Gristly swellings and membra∣nous ligaments let by course to which the shield-gristle is ioyned by processes.
• D. 1, The laterall shield-gristle.
• F, 2. and 3. Sheweth either face of this gristle.
• From G, to H, 2. 3. A line in the midst of the first gristle.
• I, K. 1, 2, 3, 4. The vpper processes of the shield-gristle articulated to the bone Hyois.
• L, M. 2, and 3. The inferior processes of the same shield gristle, which in the first figure are articulated to the crycoides or Ring-gristle.
• N, O. 6 The seat of the crycoides, or ring gristle where these processes grow into one.
• P, 1, 5, The backe part of the Ring-gristle.
• Q, 4, 5. The inside of the Ring-gristle
• R, 4, 5. The lower circular region of the Ring-gristle.
• S, 4, 5, 6. The hinder part of this circle
• T, 5, 6. A hinder line of this gristle.
• V, X 6. A bosome on both sides this gristle called also ventricles.
• Y, Z. 4, 5, 6. Two swellings of the ring-gristle which goe into the bosome of the Ewre-gristle.
• α. 1, The Arytenoides or Ewre-gristle.
• β γ 7, 8, 9. Two parts of the ewregristle
• ♌♌, 8, 9. The empty space of this gri∣stle which is couered with mem∣branes,
• ε ε, 8. 9, The sides of this gristle by which it is ioyned to the ring gristle
• 33, 8, 9. A processe of this gristle ••a∣ing a little tongue.
• η 9, The vpper part of the third gri∣stle like a spoutpot or an Ewre.
• θ 10, The basis of the Epiglottis re∣garding the Larinx continued with the Shield-gristle.
• •• 10, The tip of the After-tongue re∣garding the palate.
• κ λ 10, The basis and top of the Epi∣glottis regarding the palate. μγ, Both sides of the gristles which make the Pipe of the Rough-Arterie much like the Latine C. Ε 1, The Rough-Arterie. Π 1, The Membrane which on the backeside, tieth together the gristles of the Weazon.

the membrane that compasseth the Larinx, but in the middest they cleaue asunder or stand separated. In the middest where it is thicker it hath a ioynt wherby it is ioyned to the top of the ring-gristle where it regardeth the Gullet: and because the gristle is double the articu∣lation also is double, which doe on each side receiue into their cauities [Tab. 16. fig. 8. 9. ••••.] the swelling of the Ring-gristle [Tab. 16. fig. 6. Y. Z.] that so it might the fitter bee straight∣ned and dilated.

The substance of this 3. Gristle differs, from the other two, or being softer, that it might not need the greater Muscles to moue it; it is also slenderer, fatter & moyster that it might not be dryed vp by the ayre, much lesse also then the rest that the passage should not bee angustated or streightned.

It hath processes aboue & below. The vpper [Tab. 16. fig. 7. 8. 9. Z.] which being ioyned do cary the fashion of an Ewre or spout pot, are recurued outward, that they shold not incline inward and so fill vp the cauitie, whereby the free passage of the breath would haue beene interrupted. They are lax, soft, fat and flexible, that they might follow the motion of the whole glottis or whistle. These vpper processes are not altogether separated asunder, least one should haue beene drawne from the other, and therefore in a man they are aboue ioy∣ned with a Membrane; but in Hogs it seemeth to be indeede but one processe. This part is so soft and flexible that when a man vomits it is reclined forward into the Larynx, and soe shutteth the Arterie exquisitely, that no thing might happen to fal downe into the Lungs in our vomiting.

The lower processes made the glottis, or slit, or whistle by which the voyce is tuned. In that part they are wholly diuided [Tab. 16. fig. 7. and 9. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.] because it was fit that the slit or glottis should be moueable and free. For vnlesse the egresse of the breath bee narrow the voyce cannot be formed. These processes also in the middle of the cauitie of the Larynx are couered ouer with a fat membrane, wherby the slit is made the more firme. This Ewre-gristle is made moueable, because without motion the Larinx cannot bee streightned, and againe dilated; and therefore on either side in the lower end there is a muscle inserted.

The motion proceeding of the Articulation of the Ewre-gristle with the Ring-gristle is fourefold. Flexion, Extension, and Motion to both sides; and so it is mooued vpward, downeward to the right hand and to the left. By Flexion the Ewre-gristle is driuen into the cauitie by the fourth paire of proper muscles to shut the slit. By extension it is reuelled outward by the second paire of proper muscles to open the slit. Againe, by the motion to the sides they are conioyned by the fifth paire of muscles to constringe it, as by the third paire they are separated to dilate it.

Now betwixt the Flexion and extension of the Ewre-gristle and of the rest, there is this difference, that in the others one motion is made for the behoofe of an other, but in the Ewre-gristle both motions are of themselues profitable: the Flexion, to constringe the slit that so the breath might be kept in; and the voyce made at our pleasure, the extension to dilate it againe that the ayre might be plentifully receiued in.

The membranes which tie the gristles together do make certaine bosomes or ca∣uities betwixt the Ewre and the Sheild gristles, into which, if in eating or drinking any thing fall, be it but a little beare, which often hapeneth when the Epiglottis or ouer-tongue by laughter or speech when wee are eating is opened, because whatsoeuer it is that passeth a∣gainst the wind causeth a coughing. Of these bosomes or sinus, Galen seemes to make mention in the eleuenth chapter of his seuenth booke de vsu partium, but since Galen (saith Seuerinus Pinaeus) neuer any man made mention of them but Gasper Bauhine our Authour: but whether Laurentius had them from him I know not. Placentinus hauing got the hint of them, as should seeme from Bauhine, hath examined them very diligently in brute beastes, and findes them seldome saue in Swine, Horses and Dogs. Aquapendens professeth that he finds them in all creatures vsed to the earth, but in some lesser, in some bigger; yea, so bigge as a man may put his finger downe them: Swine and Horses haue the largest, those of men are not so deepe.

The vse of these Sinus is to alter the attracted ayre that it fall not with violence as the deafe eares of the heart doe. They helpe (saith Aquapendens) to retaine the breath when the whole glottis is shut vp. In Dogs these sinus are like ventricles.

CHAP. XXXV. Of the Glottis and Cleft of the Larynx.

THat which is called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 is that body which maketh the Cleft or Fissure in the Larynx, which is the chiefe instrument whereby the voyce is formed and vttered. [Table 15. figu. 4. d] It hath the name from the like∣nesse that is betweene it and the tongue of a flute or other pipe. The La∣tines all so call it the Little Tongue. For as the Sound is made by the Tong of a pipe, so the voyce is made by the Linguet of the Larynx, and as a man speaketh by his Tongue, so the pipe is sayde to speake as it were by this Glottis; therefore wee call it the Whistle.

It is situated within for the better generation of the voyce, and because the instrument might be freer from outward iniuries.

The figure of it is Ouall, sharpned at either side, yet more toward the Shield-gristle, then toward the Ewer-gristle. It is as long as the Larynx, as well that the gristles thereof might establish it, as also that a man might vary with his voyce high, low, or in a middle key, or as we say Treble, Base or Tenor: adde hereto that being so long it is able to admit a sufficient quantity of ayre. Moreouer as there is but one Larynx so there is but one Whistle, or cleft which beginneth from the Ewer-gristle and endeth into the Shield-gristle that so it might be moued with voluntary motion, for wee sayde before that onely these two gristles were mouable, the middle which is the Ring-gristle is immouable.

Notwithstanding it may be deuided into that which in the vpper part is made especi∣ally of the parts of the Ewer-gristle, and that which in the lower part is formed of the mem¦brane duplicated. This Glottis and cleft runneth in the middle of the Larynx directly from the foreside backward, that the ayre yssuing out of the cleft and formed into a voyce might instantly touch vpon the top of the Palate and the tip of the Tongue by them to be articu∣lated. And as the slit or cleft of a pipe is sometimes broade and long, sometimes narrow and long or short, so is it in this. For if it be long and broade the voyce is base, if it be nar∣rowe it is treble or shrill: yet the magnitude is proportionable to the body; large bodies haue large slits, and little bodies narrow, from whence comes the differences of Voices.

The composition of it is very artificiall that the Ayre which is the matter of the Voyce might easile ascend and descend, and might beside receiue a fit repercussion. For it is made of both the processes of the Ewer-gristle [Table 16. fig. 7. 33.] or of the double Ewer-gristle and a portion of that muscle of the Shield-gristle inserted into the processe of the Ewregri∣stle, which two are inuested with a membrane (making the Inner Cleft, of which we shall speake by & by) which is not only thight to defend it but also moyst which moysture is not only slimy but also fatty: and yet this Glottis is moystned with a proper moysture of it own, least our voyce should soone faile in discourse or other vse of it, if the glottis and the parts belonging to the Larynx should be exiccated. For being of a membranous substance, the frequent motion thereof in our speech or vocifiration, the perpetuall ingresse of ayre and egresse of the breath which is hot, might haue dryed it if Nature had not prepared a proper moysture to keepe it in Temper: for as we see whistles and pipes doe need euer and anon to be moystned or else they will not sound so well; so if this Whistle of the Larynx had not had a naturall moysture, the voyce must needs haue fayled, as wee see it doeth in those that are sicke of burning Agues, or trauell in hot weather, who cannot speake before they haue moystned their throttles, or if they speake their voyce is stridulous or whining, which kind Hippocrates calleth voces clangosas in Prorrhet.

This moysture makes the surface of the Glottis or whistle to be slippery, yet is it beside smooth & glib least the ayre lighting vpon vnequall parts and so yssuing vnequally should make the voyce harsh and vnpleasant. Notwithstanding it was fit this moysture should be moderate, because those bodies that are too wette doe sound woorse then those that are dry. VVhence it is that in Rheumes and Murrhes the Voyce is hoarse, because the Larynx is dewed with too much moysture, but when the moysture thereof is Naturall it maintay∣neth the Voyce a long time without helpe, the rather because as wee sayde the moysture is not thinne that it should soone be spent, but viscid and fatty. And haply this made Galen say that the glottis was not onely membranous but also fatty and glandulous. The Glottis also by this meanes being soft and supple is more easily dilated and contracted, for it was necessary it should open and shutte as might serue best for the different Expiration of the breath.

For the glottis is either at rest or is mooued, when it is at rest it serueth for the inspi∣ration of ayre; when it is mooued it is the instrument of the voyce, for the forming where∣of it hath a double motion, one of dilatation another of constriction. The dilation is the cause of deepe and bases voyces; the constriction is double, either to make the slit narrow and then the voyce is treble and soft; or altogether to shut it vp, whereby the breath is vio∣lently reteined with in, as when wee striue to lift great weights, when women are in the pinch of trauell, and in such like violent actions. Wherefore as it is musculous it maketh the motions of dilation and compression; as it is gristly it affordeth the ioynts whereon the motion is made, and strength to support the motion that it should not bee ouerturned by the breath; as it is membranous it is more fit to be dilated and constringed, the slit is formed the better and the muscle is defended.

But beside the slit made by the Ewre-gristle, in the inner cauity (and that in man one∣ly) there is formed another slit of the concourse of two membranes. For from the fore and middle part of the shield-gristle, the membrane wherewith it is inuested on the inside in the middle iust against the glottis becometh double and more solid, and attaining ouer to the backeside of the Larinx is tyed to the inside of the Ring-gristle not farre from the Ewre gristle that so it might be kept stret hed. Betweene these duplicated membranes there remaineth a long cleft running from the backeside forward [Tab. 16. fig. 7. 8. 9.] which is made broader when the shield-gristle is dilated by the muscles, and so the voyce becom∣eth base: as on the other side it is treble if it be angustated or streightned. And this is holpen by the diuision of the glottis, for both slits are at the same time dilated and at the same time constringed. Arantius maketh mention of this internall slit, and is of opinion that it is the chiefe place wherein the voyce is tuned, and that the diuision of the glottis is but assi∣stant thereunto.

The vse of the Glottis is, to be the chiefe instrument of the voyce, or principall part in the Larynx which performeth the action, that is, the voyce; for that is the proper action of this instrument. For the ayre passing is restrayned & broken, & so produceth the voice neither can any voyce be made vnlesse the passage be straightned (and therefore Galen said well, that the Larinx without the Glottis cannot frame or forme a voyce, no more then the eye can see without the Cristalline) now it is straightned when it is mooued, that is, when it is dilated or contracted, for it is in our power, saith Galen in the ninth chapter of his eight booke de placitis, to shut or open the mouth of the Larinx when wee will, and as wee list to close or loosen it, so we make our voyce base or treble; for if wee let our breath passe out lightly and gently, no sound accompanieth our exspiration, but if the breath be powred forth suddenly and vehemently, then with the expiration there issueth a voyce also.

CHAP. XXXVI. Of the Epiglottis or Aftertongue, and his Muscles.

THat which the Grecians call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. because it is set aboue the glottis or whistle of the Larinx, the Latines cal minor Lingua or Lingula fistulae, but be∣cause he glottis is also called Lingula, we haue rather called it the Aftertong. It is a gristle and a couer of the cleft of the Larinx made to fall vpon it when we swallow, that no thing should slip aside into the weazon [Tab. 17. it is placed betweene the first and second figure, but inuerted and was cut away from figure 1. at^aa. but Tab. 15. fig. 4. 5. 6. ^b.]

Aristotle in the twelfth chapter of his second booke de Historia animalium, thinketh that all creatures which lay Egges doe want this Epiglottis, but doe close exquisitely or di∣late againe the top of the Larinx as they please to keepe any thing out of their longues without any vse of such a couer as is necessary in other creatures. Placentinus addeth that Frogs haue none of it.

It is seated betweene the Larinx and the tongue, and if you looke vpon the superfi∣cies of the membrane that compasseth the tongue which is continuall with this Epiglottis, it may be esteemed to be as it were a part of the tongue: whereupon some haue thought that it hath his originall from the roote of the tongue, whereas it is more likely that it arises from the shield-gristle. For it ariseth vpward with a large basis recurued forward from the in∣ward and higher part of the shield gristle, [Tab. 15. fig. 4. *. fig. 5. †] afterward it grows bro∣der a little and a little, and becommeth like a round Arch, but in brute beasts it is by degrees angustated and determineth into a broade and sharpe edge. In the basis thereof it is tyed to the shield-gristle, all the rest of it is loose and hangs at libertie.

The forme as sayth Hippocrates in his 4. booke de morbis, is like the Iuy leaue, for the Basis is broad and arched forward into a roundnesse; or it is like a little tongue as Pliny and Celsus write. Vesalius compares it to a triangle. Columbus to a litle shield curued & straight∣ned toward the edge. Aquapendens to a triangle which hath crooked sides.

The vpper part called the backe which is next vnto the Palate, is a little conuex and buncheth outward, the lower side which is next to the cleft or whistle is hollow or a little concauous. The bredth of it is not only enough to couer the cleft but to spare.

It is also of it owne Nature rigid and stiffe standing, that the pipe of the rough arterie might remaine open, least the heart should bee suffocated; yet is it flexible that it might perfectly shut vp the cleft ouer which it is disposed: beside, if it had not beene flexible the waight of the meat and drinke would not haue depressed it in the swallowing: againe, if it had not beene stiffe and rigid, when it is once borne downe vpon the cleft in the swallow∣ing of meate, it woulde not haue started vp againe to giue way for the yssue of the breath. Wherefore the substance of it is gristly and thinne, somwhat softer then the other gristles, yet so, that it is softer, thinner and more flexible on that side that respecteth the Palate, es∣pecially in the very end neare the gullet it is very soft, and couered with a fatte membrane. For when the creature breatheth it is lift vp of it own accord to make way for the ayre, but when hee swalloweth it coucheth vppon the Larynx least the meate should fall into the Lungs.

For that which is swallowed (as Galen well hath written in the 16. chapter of his seuenth booke de vsu partium) falleth first vppon the rootes of this After-tongue, after it is carried vpon the backe of it which maketh it to couch or incline. These motions this Epiglottis could not haue had if it had bin either mēbranous or fleshy, because it would haue alwayes lien depressed, or being once depressed it would hardly haue been raysed vp againe, neuer erected vp right. Neither could it haue beene bony, for then it would alwayes haue bin rigid, neither could it haue bin depressed with the swallowing of meats and drinks. Wher∣fore with Galen we think that the motion of the Epiglottis or After-tongue in a man is Na∣turall, and that the cleft is couered and againe vncouered, not by the helpe of muscles but by the waight of those things which we eat and drinke.

But in beastes that chew the Cud there are some muscles found, as wee shall say in the History of the Muscles & shew them somewhat particularly, because it is an ordinary thing for young practitioners in Anatomy, to exercise themselues in dissecting of the Throttles of Oxen and such like: But in the meane time we must remember that the Epiglottis is co∣uered ouer with a fat membrane much like to the nature of a ligament, which at the shield gristle is full of fat.

The vse of the Epiglottis is to couer the Glottis or whistle when we swallow our meate; for if at vnawares any of the meate do slip into the wezon, we presently keake and are near strangling till by coughing it be gotten vp again, the reason is, because that which descen∣deth taketh away Respiration. So Anacreon the Poet was strāgled with the stone of a Rey∣son. And Fabius the Senator drinking a cup of Milke was choaked with a haire that was therein.

Alexander Benedictus tels of a woman who would haue giuen her Sonne a Pill and was constrayned to thrust it downe his throate with her finger, she thrust it into his wezon and hee died instantly. Because therefore a man cannot liue without Respiration, when that Respiration is interrupted Nature rowseth vp her selfe to make resistance, and so we straine at the least crumme that fals the wrong way. Yet we must not imagine that the cleft is so exquisitly closed but that some part of the drinke slippeth into the rough artery, gliding downe by the side of the Glottis though it be not felt. And this way we thinke distilations doe yssue out of the head into the Lungs, which though they bee very aboundant yet hee that is sicke cannot feele them, especially in sleepe they gather very fast together. Howe Hippocrates proued that a part of the drinke is conuayed vnto the Lungs, wee haue before shewed by the cutting of a Hogs throate instantly after he hath drunk water coloured with Vermilion or any such like, for you shall finde the very colour in his weazon. Againe, if some of the drinke did not slip downe by the sides of the rough Artery, it were in vaine to prescribe Ecclegmes, Syrups or Lozenges in affects of the Chest. But we finde by experi∣ence that all these doe helpe expectoration and make the spittle come vp more roundly, if they be taken by little and little the head reclined backeward, licked off a knife, a Liquerize stick or such like, or if the Lozenges be conteyned in the mouth til they melt of themselues

[illustration]

Table 17. Figure 1. and 2. sheweth the tongue cut from the bodie, and the Muscles thereof. In the first the right side of it, & in the second his Muscles somewhat vncouered.

[illustration]

Figure 3. steweth the bodie of the Tongue diuided according to the length of it and his Ligament.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XVII.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG II.

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

Tab. 17. figure 1. sheweth the Larynx, hauing the Shielde Gristle cut into two parts, but one part of it together with the Epiglottis is inuerted as by the Letters may be perceiued.

[illustration]

Figure 2. exhibiteth the Larynx shewing the Glottis.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

• AAA. The Tongue inuested with a Coate common to the mouth.
• BB. A portion of the coat compas∣sing the mouth cut frō the mouth according to the sides of the low∣er iaw.
• C A part of the same coat cut from the inner part of the Palat toge∣ther with the tongue.
• D. The Muscles caled Basi-Glossi, a∣cording to Vesalius the first, but in our account the fourth, or the sixt of the bone Hyois according to Falopius.
• E. The Muscles cald Ceratoglossi, or the second Muscle according to Vesalius, and in our account the fifte.
• F. The Muscles called Styloglossi or the third Muscle.
• G. The Muscles called Myloglossi, or the fourth Muscle according to Vesalius.
• H. The flesh consisting of the Glā∣dules, or the ninth Muscle of the Tongue according to Vesalius.
• II. The Ligament of the Tongue.
• KK, LL. The Musculous substance of the tongue, & the fibres thereof.

[illustration]

The Second Figure.

• a 1. The Shield-gristle Dissected.
• b 1. The Epig ottis or After-tongue.
• c, c. The Arytaenoides or the Ewre∣gristle.
• 1, 2. The glottis or small clefte of the Throttle.
• ee, 1. The internall Muscle forming this cleft or the internall Shield∣gristle.
• f. 2. The opening Muscle or the lat∣ter Crycoaryth enoides.
• g. 2. The transuerse Muscle or the Arytaenoydes.

and passe insensiblie into the Larynx. And heerein we imitate Galen in the seuenth chap∣ter of the fourth Booke of his method, where being to cure one that had an Vlcer on the inside of the Rough Arterie, caused the Patient to lye vpon his backe, and a moyst Me∣dicine that was fit for the Vlcer to bee giuen and to be held in the mouth as long as hee could, and to relax and remit the Muscles of the place, for so saith Galen by little and lit∣tle some of the Medicine wil distil into the Arterie.

But the reason why water or drinke when it falleth into the Weazon causeth a cough is, because as Hippocrates saith it maketh a disturbance for that it opposeth the Respirati∣on. For the Liquor that falleth downe by the sides of the Arterie, doth not withstand the egresse of the aer, rather it furthereth it by making the way moyst & slippery. Hence we may see how ignorant the Ancients were in Anatomy, as Plato, Philistones, Dioxippus, and such like, who conceiued that the drinke went into the Arterie or Weazon, and so into the Lungs, and the meate through the gullet into the stomacke. Against this opi∣nion Hippocrates disputeth in his fourth Booke De Morbis, that is, against those that think

the drinke falleth into the Lunges, yet hee doth not denie but some drinke sipeth that way as we haue saide before. Wherefore (saith Galen in the ninth Chapter of his eight booke De Placitis) if Plato thought that all the drinke was conueyed into the Lunges he cannot be excused because his ignorance is euen palpable: but if he thinke that a part of the drinke is deriued into them he is not altogether deceiued.

The like we may say of Aristotle, who thought it an error to say that the drinke pas∣sed into the Arterie because there is no thorough passage for it, as there is out of the Stomacke into the draught. For verily if that be auouched of all the drinke it is a verie absurd conceite: but if it be meant of a little it seemeth to be true.

Another vse of the Epiglottis or After-tongue is to strike the aer which ariseth from the Lungs into a tuneablenesse, especially if it arise with a force or impetuous violence thereunto. And this vse we haue out of Laurentius.

CHAP. XXXVII. Of the Membrane of the Larynx or Throttle which is the Ligament thereof.

THE Larynx is bound about with a Membrane which is common with the Membrane of the mouth, to be a defence to it both outwardlie and inwardly, and whereby the aire being gently and easily strucken, might make the voice pleasant and moderate. First inwardly, the whole cauitie is compassed & so it is led ouerthwartly to the vpper part of the Larynx, being diuided in the middest of his length it maketh a little cleft. But outwardly it doth partly encompasse the external superficies, and partly it inuesteth inwardly the Gristles and Muscles.

They are steeped in a certaine slimie humidity, partly least the Respiration being warme, smoky and drie, should make the parts drie also, partly that the Epiglottis might be closely ioyned to the glottis and so his exccation might bee hindred, which humidi∣ty is more aboundant within, yet so that in those which are sound it is neither more co∣pious nor more scarse then the instrument of the voice doth require; by it also it is poli∣shed and so the voice is made pleasant and equal, for being moistened with a kinde of humidity it doth familiarly beate the aire, whence the sweetenesse of the voice procee∣deth. This may be prooued by the example of Musitians, who going about to sounde longer Pipes or Trumpets whether they be of Brasse or wood, will somewhat moysten them (haply with their Spittle) whereby the voice may bee made more delectable, else because of too much siccitie the sounde is not onely vnpleasant and harsh, but is made with more difficultie and labour; like as if it be 100 moyst the sound is obtuse, wherefore we saide before the voice is made hoarse by the humours which come out of the Braine into the Choppes.

These Membranes of the Larynx are for the most part thicker and stronger then all the rest. The outward is verie crasse and laxe and as it were rough and rugous; for a∣boue the Epiglottis it is lax and crasse, where it is bound to the sides of the third gristle, and betwixt it and the gristle, especially at the basis, there is a little Fat growing. It is lax, that it may more easily be incurued and turned vpon the Larynx and be mooued in de∣glutition or swallowing, in an acute and graue voice vpward and downward. And it is crasse, somewhat hard also and dense, because by that way meate sometimes halfe chew∣ed, hard and in great gobbits must passe of necessity.

Some there be which thinke that this Membrane is increased with fleshy fibres, and that it becommeth a musculous membrane both in men and beasts to help the lifting vp of the Epiglottis, which Fibres are compassed with a little skin both outward and aboue, least it should be hurt in the passage of the meate.

The internal Coate or Membrane which is more crasse in the cauitie of the Larynx or Throttle then it is in the pipe of the Artery, is soft, stretched and slipperie, beecause the cauitie was to be made polished and smooth; but where the cleft of the Larynx doth close, this Membrane on both sides is by often compressing of it when wee holde our breath, made more hard and callous, and with the substance doth change the colour & waxeth more white. But of this Membrane we haue spoken somwhat before in our Hi∣story of the Rough Artery. Concerning the vessels also and the Glandules of the La∣rynx we shall speake in their proper places.

CHAP. XXXVIII. Of the sound and the voyce.

IT is sufficiently manifest by that which we haue said, that the voyce is an action of the Larinx, and that it is the instrument of the voyce, and that the glottis or whistle is the first and immediate cause of the voyce and this is Galens opinion, wherefore we will discourse a little of the voyce.

The voyce therefore according to Aristotle is a certaine significatiue sound of a liuing creature, or as Galen defines it, the voyce is the Ayre strucken, and a sound is the percussion of one body against another in some other. There be therefore three things required to the effecting of a sound, to wit, two seuerall bodyes which doe mutually strike one another, & the ayre in which the purcussion is made, which ayre is beaten and broken betwixt the two bodies.

But that these bodyes thus mutually knocking one another, may effect a sound, first, it is required that they be stretched, by which tension or stretching they are somewhat har∣dened, therefore Aristotle supposed that they ought to be hard, for a sponge & wooll may mutually strike one another and yet no sound be made. But if you say that sounds are ofte∣ner made by hard bodyes, yet it is true also that sometimes they are made by soft bodyes, for if you ioyne your lips together a kind of whistling may be heard, but this proceedeth from their tension whereby they thrust out the Ayre by compressing each other.

Moreouer, they ought to haue a broade and plaine superficies, for two needles stri∣king one another doe make no sound. Againe, the percussion ought to be vehement and quicke, for if you gently put your hand to any thing no sound is heard. But if besides, these bodyes be polished and concauous or hollow, and of a solid and ayry matter, such as brasse and glasse is, then the sound will be greater, more plaine and delightsome, which may bee shewed in bels and musical instruments for such bodyes containe a great deale of ayre in them, which airy when it is moued and seeketh a vent, doth euery way strike about the sides and euery way causeth a resonance or resounding.

Now seeing a voyce is the sound of a liuing creature, or a certaine species or kind of sound; there must be euen so many things required to it as a sound. Namely, the aire for the matter, the bodyes which by compressing the ayre doe as it were breake it for the efficient cause; & we may adde the place which is the head of the rough Arterie.

The ayre which is required for the forming of a voyce is that which we returne by expiration, and this is the matter for the generating of a voyce; for that which is inspired is prepared for the refreshing and nourishment of the heart and Inbred heate. Wherefore a mans voce is so long continued as the expiration endureth, and when it fayleth the voyce vtterly ceaseth. Now this expired aire is broken by by the ayry instrument and so the voyce is formed at this breaking, and where it is broken there percussion doth forthwith follow. But it may be demanded which of the ayry instruments can strike and presse this ayre.

The Chest and the lungs do not make this voyce, because their motions be Diastole and Systole or dilatation and constriction which make no voyce. Neither is it the pipe of the Rough Arterie or the greatest part of the weazon because it wanteth muscles: where∣fore it cannot perfect the voyce which is a voluntary worke.

Moreouer, if you cut the weazon below the Larinx or head, the creature will yet expire freely, but he will not vtter any voyce: and if againe you bind this incision the voyce will re∣turne. Neither is it the nosthrils which is the cause of the voyce, because they are onely passage, nor the mouth because it is onely a receptacle, nor the tong because they which be dumbe haue their tongs and respiration sound; so they which haue their tongue cut out doe yet vtter some kind of voyce. It remaineth therfore that amongst the ayry instruments onely the Larinx or throtle is it which is as it were, the shop or worke-house wherein the percussion is made, which the fabricke and structure of it do sufficiently shew.

For it hath Muscles which are necessarily required to the effecting of a voyce which is a voluntary action: It hath also nerues which affoord the motion, Gristles also which are hard bodyes, broade, smooth, polished and concauous or hollow, vpon which the ayre may easily be broken, constringed and compressed and therwithall resound. It hath also a cleft which is requisite vnto the breaking of the ayre that so a sound may be made. For this breaking of the ayre cannot be done vnles it passe through by some straight & narrow way

This Elision or breaking is made through the cleft when it is constringed and angustated or straightned by the articulation of the Arytaenoides or Ewre-gristle and the Muscles.

Wherefore Galen writeth that a voice cannot be made vnlesse the passage be straite, ney∣ther can that passage be well called straight, vnlesse it tendeth by little and little from a large passage vnto a straighter and is againe amplified or enlarged from that straightnes. After this breaking doth a percussion presently follow, either against the aire or against a solid bodie, and therefore Galen supposeth that the Vuula is like the quill of a Citterne in the forming of the voyce, because the aer being blown out is forced against the Vuula.

But not onely the straitnesse of the cleft is necessary vnto the voice that the passage of the aire be narrow, but also the vehement impulsion of the breath, so that it suddainlie and at once breake forth: for when either of these faile the voice cannot be made; which sudden and vehement expiration Galen calleth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or efflation. The other cause therefore of the Voice is efflation without which it cannot be made though there maie be efflation without any voice.

This exsufflation or strong breathing out is made by the Muscles, binding the Chest & the Abdomen or panch, by which constriction the Lungs are depressed and constringed, the Midriffe is incurued towards the cauity of the Chest, whereby his cauity is made straiter and the breath carried vpward out of the Lunges thorough the rough Artery, (wherefore Galen saide, that the voice was prepared in the Rough Arterie when the aire being shut vp and compressed there, doth after a sort attaine the state and condition of a solid bodie before it yssue through the cleft) and beeing extruded or thrust out with violence and force through the straite cleft, yeeldeth that sound which we call a Voice.

Galen expresseth the vse of the Voice in these wordes, that it is the Messenger of the Thought of the mind, and therefore worthily is accounted the principall of all the acti∣ons of the Soule.

And thus are we arriued at the end of this Booke of the Senses wherein we haue o∣mitted the Sense of Touching because it is already handled in the second Booke. Now we come vnto the Controuersies.

Notes

• The eyes.
• The Eares.
• The Nose.
• The Tongue.
• The sense of Touching.
• The names of the face.
• The parts of the face.
• The skinne.
• The hayres.
• The perfora∣tions of the face. Their vse.
• The fat. The fleshy membrane.
• The vessels and the glan∣dules.
• The proper contayning parts.
• The parts contained.
• How the mind shineth in the Face.
• Prediction by the Face.
• The vesselles of the same. The Veines.
• The arteries of the face
• The muscles of the fore∣head.
• A good note for Chyrurgi∣ons.
• Why the top of the fore∣head is not moued.
• Why 5. sences
• How the sen∣ces answere the elements.
• Galen.
• Hesychius.
• The names of the Eyes.
• Their excel∣lency.
• Their scitua∣tion.
• The reason thereof.
• Their num∣ber.
• Their figure.
• The reason thereof.
• Their magni∣tude.
• How they are defended.
• Their parts.
• The bones of it.
• The Sutures of it.
• The holes 3.
• The angles or corners,
• Their names.
• The holes of the eies.
• Puncta lachry∣malia.
• The disease called Fistula Lachrymalis.
• The wisedom of Nature.
• A Caution for Oculists.
• Diuers opini∣ons cōcerning teares.
• Aquapendens. opinion.
• Bauhines opi∣nion.
• The matter of the teares.
• The great ca∣pacity of the orb of the eie
• The inconue∣nience of the moisture de∣tained.
• The mouing of teares, how many wayes, by expression
• 2 by dilatati∣on. Hippocrates.
• Aristotle.
• Obiection.
• Solution.
• The glādules of the eye.
• Fallopius.
• Their vse,
• the same in an Oxe.
• A membrane in the eye of an Oxe,
• the eie brows
• Whereof they are com∣pounded. A fit compari¦son out of Galen.
• Why they grow long in old men.
• How they are moued,
• Of the eie-lids,
• What crea∣tures want eie-lids.
• The names of the eie-lids,
• Whither the lower lid bee mooueable.
• The lower lid is onlie moue able in Birds.
• The lower eie lid why lesse.
• Whereof the eie-liddes are compounded.
• The reason of their compo∣sition
• The thinnes of their skin & membranes
• Aristotle.
• T•••• ••eason of the thinnes is of the lids.
• The motions of the eie-lids
• The necessity thereof.
• Galen.
• The motion double or of 2 kinds. Voluntarie.
• Constrained.
• Aristotle excu∣sed.
• How cold of∣fends the eye.
• The muscles of the eie-lids
• Diuers opini∣ons concer∣ning them.
• Bauhines de∣scription of them.
• The vse of the orbicular mus∣cle.
• How it is said to be double.
• How the low∣er Lid is mo∣ued vpward.
• The conclusi∣on cōcerning the Muscles of the eielids
• Of the gristle of the eielids called Tarsus.
• Their Vses.
• The haires of the Eie lids. Their names.
• proportion.
• The wisedom of God.
• The maner of their position.
• and reason thereof.
• Their distāce.
• Their vses.
• Their vessels.
• The bladders aboue and vn∣der the eyes.
• The vses of the eye-lids. Aristotle.
• Varolius. The first vse.
• The second.
• The third vse
• The partes whereof the eie is com∣pounded.
• In what pla∣ces of the eye the fat is foūd
• The vses of the fat.
• Why the mus∣cles of the eye are described in this place.
• We see by a right line.
• As also the motion of the thighes.
• Why their muscles are many.
• Why sixe,
• How many mo••••ons the eie hath.
• The figure of the eie.
• Why the mus¦cle▪ 〈…〉〈…〉
• Why round,
• The right mus¦cles.
• Diuers opini∣ons about their original
• Their inserri∣on,
• Whence the whitenes of the eie pro∣ce••deth.
• A more parti∣cular descrip∣tion of the se∣ueral muscles.
• Their Vse.
• His original.
• His end or Tendon.
• His progresse. Falopius his Trochlea or pully. His insertion.
• The 7. belon∣ging to a beast.
• Why a man hath not the 7. Muscle.
• How to make diffection best to find out these Muscles
• The vessels are hete fully handled. Veines.
• Arteries.
• Nerues.
• Opticke.
• Why the grea¦test and thickest.
• Why softer.
• Galen out of Herophilus.
• Where they are distinct. Where vni∣ted.
• The vses of their coniun∣ction.
• The vse of the optick nerues
• Gutta serena.
• The Nerues of motion.
• Where they are continual
• Demonstrati∣ons heereof.
• The spirits of the Eies.
• Diuers argu∣mentes to proue there are spirites in them.
• The eie com∣pared to an Egge.
• The Mem∣branes of the eie.
• Their number verie diuerse according to authors,
• First Adnata.
• Whence com¦meth the white of the eie.
• Coniunctiua.
• The vse of the Adnata.
• The vessels of this coate.
• The 2. Coate Innominata.
• The vse of it,
• The 3, coate Cornea.
• How it is spred ouer the eie.
• Why it is com¦pared to a horne of a Lanthorne. Fallopius his opinion.
• The forme & disposition thereof. Why round & circular,
• Why hard.
• Why fast.
• Why thin.
• Why stret∣ched.
• Why transpa∣rant.
• Why polished and smooth.
• That much light is an eni¦my to the sight.
• Dyonisius his cruelty.
• The greater light extin¦guisheth the lesse.
• The wisedom of our Crea∣tor acknow∣ledged by Galen.
• The backe∣part of the horny coate.
• Why it is so thicke.
• Why it is thicke and darke.
• Fuschius. Aquapendens.
• Ruffus. The vse of this third membrane.
• The 4. coate of the eye.
• The reason of the name. His scituatiō.
• His figure.
• His originall.
• Why it is cal∣led Choroides.
• His vessels. Why it is soft
• Why blacke.
• Why perfo∣rated.
• What is con∣tained be∣twixt the gra∣py membrane and the chris∣taline humor.
• The spirits of the eie.
• The Pupilla or Apple of the eie.
• The figure of it.
• How the Pu∣pilla is con∣tracted & di∣lated. Galen. Aquapendens.
• Obiections against Aqua∣pendens
• The vse of the Pupilla.
• A narrow ap∣ple is the best sight. And why
• Diuers colors of the Grapie Membrane.
• What profite the eie hath by his blacke colour.
• How the co∣lour of the in∣fide differeth from the co∣lour of the out side.
• A mans eye is of diuers co∣lours.
• The Rainbow of the eye.
• A nicite in diffection.
• Diuers opini∣ons of the cause of the Rainbow.
• Empedocles. Aristotle.
• Galen.
• Auicen.
• Auerhoes.
• Varolius.
• Archangelus.
• Laurentius which is also the truth. 〈…〉〈…〉
• The causes of the skie-co∣loured eie.
• The causes of the black eie.
• The vse of the colours of the Raine-bow.
• Fallopius.
• The Cobweb or coat of the cristalline hu∣mor.
• Diuers opini∣ons of his O∣riginall.
• The substance of it.
• Why ••••••cker before.
• The vse of it.
• The coate of the glassy hu∣mor.
• The Net.
• The substance thereof.
• The vessels thereof.
• The proui∣dence of na∣ture.
• The vses of it
• The three hu∣mors of the eye.
• The watery humor.
• What place it hath in the eye.
• Where cata∣racts are.
• Whether it be a spermati∣call part of an excremen•• ••
• The cristal∣line humour.
• Whereof made.
• The position Why it hath no colour.
• The magniti∣tude & figure.
• The 3. humor called vitreus.
• His scituatiō.
• Consistence.
• And figure.
• A philosophi∣call discourse of the vse of the eie.
• The proper obiects of the sight, Common.
• Particular v∣ses of the parts.
• All sense is by contaction.
• How many wales contac∣tion is made,
• How sight is made.
• Whether in mans eie ther be an ingenit light.
• Tiberius Caesar Cardanus. Ioh. ••ap. Porta.
• Plato thought the eie was firie.
• A threefold fire.
• How the formes are re¦tained.
• That there are 4. refrac∣tions of the light in the eie.
• 6. in a paire of spectacles,
• Another vse of the watery humour,
• A third,
• A fourth.
• A fift.
• A sixt.
• The vse of the christa∣line humour.
• An axiome in philosophy.
• Nor watery.
• But cristalline
• The cristal∣line humour is a spectacle to the nerue.
• How sight is perfected,
• Why the cri∣stalline is thicke.
• Why soft:
• The reason of the confor∣mation of the cristalline.
• The reason of his conne∣xion.
• The vse of the the glassy hu∣mour.
• Galens credit redeemed by a distinction.
• How the cri∣stalline is nourished.
• Diuers opini∣ons concer∣ning the nou∣rishment of the Cristalline humour. Galens opi∣nion.
• Varolius.
• Archangelus.
• Laurentius.
• Aquapendens.
• Other vses of the glassy hu∣mour,
• The history of the eares very difficult to expresse.
• The names of the eares.
• The reasons of the name.
• What crea∣tures want outward eares,
• The reason of the situation of the Eares.
• Apes Eares.
• Their Figure
• The reason thereof.
• How the Scy∣thians make amends for the rotting of their eares.
• Adrian the Emperour.
• The magni∣tude of the Eares.
• Why they are two.
• The division of the out∣ward Eare.
• The wing or fin of the ears
• The Lappe of the eare.
• The severall partes of the outward Eare and their de∣nominations.
• The vse of the outward eare.
• A fit simili∣tude expres∣sing how the sounds come through the aire vnto the eare.
• The skin of the outward eare.
• Aristotle.
• Why a new house sounds more then an old.
• The veins of the eare.
• The arteries•• of the eare.
• Why not bo∣ny,
• Why mode∣rately soft.
• Cicero.
• Why mode∣ratelie hard
• The originall of the carti∣lage.
• The ligament
• The parts of the inward care.
• The rockie or stony bone.
• The names of it.
• How it is found in chil∣dren.
• The parts of it.
• The outside.
• The perforati¦ons of the roc¦ky bone.
• Within the scul two.
• The first.
• The second,
• Without thē¦sull. The hole of hearing.
• The forme of the hole of hearing.
• The substance of it.
• The first vse of it.
• The second.
• Another per∣foration.
• Where it per∣forateth the bone.
• The substance of it.
• The figure of it.
• Why gristly.
• Where it de∣termines in the mouth.
• The chiefe vse of it.
• A Storie
• The vse of Masticatories in deafenesse.
• The 2. vse of the Canale.
• The third vse
• How a dease man may bee made to hear.
• The seurth vse.
• How this pas∣sagei•• found in a seull.
• Of the super∣ficies of this bone without the seull.
• The mammil∣lary processes of the stony bone.
• Of the appē∣dix Styloides.
• The inside of the stony bone Three caui∣ties.
• The names of the mēbrane of the Tym∣pane.
• Situation.
• The reason thereof. The second reason.
• The figure of it.
• Diuers opini∣ons concer∣ning his ori¦ginall.
• The bony ring.
• A passage out of Galen proo∣uing that hee knew this membrane.
• The substāce of the mem∣brane.
• Why not bo∣nie.
• Why not fle∣shie.
• How children become deafe and dumbe.
• Why the mē∣brane is dry.
• The diuers vses of the membrane.
• The finders out of these bones.
• The scituatiō
• Their nerues.
• The Mallet.
• His head.
• Necke.
• And Taile.
• The Cōnexi∣on of the Hā∣mer.
• The forme of it.
• The Anuile.
• The reason of the name.
• Why called Dens.
• The forme of it.
• The articula∣tion.
• The proces∣ses.
• The stirrop.
• The Inuēters
• The figure.
• The top.
• The sides.
• The Basis.
• The perfora∣tion.
• Why lesse then the rest.
• Why perfora∣ted in the middest.
• Varolius.
• The reason of their con∣nexion.
• Why more bones then one.
• The double motion of the hammer.
• Inward.
• Outward.
• The substāce of these bones
• How they dif∣fer from o∣ther bones.
• Why children do not heare so well as grown men.
• Why they are hollow.
• Their vses.
• Anatomistes are here at a losse.
• The Chord.
• Diuers appel∣lations.
• The vse of it.
• The internall muscle.
• His originall and progresse
• The vse of it according to Arantius.
• Aquapendens his demonstra¦tion of the motion of the muscle.
• Bauhines de∣monstration thereof out of the experiēce in himselfe.
• It is lesse in great Beastes then in men.
• How to finde this Muscle.
• The other Muscle with∣out the mem∣brane.
• Bauhins hono∣rable remem∣brance of A∣quapendens & Placentinus.
• Aquapendens his descriptiō of this muscle.
• Placentinus de¦scription.
• Aquapendens his opinion of the vse of the Muscles.
• Placentinus opinion of the vse of the muscles.
• Varolius his vse of a mus∣cle in the ear.
• Why we in∣treat of this bone he e.
• 3. Cauities,
• Their names,
• The first caui∣ty.
• The reason of the name.
• Coiters obiect.
• Answered.
• Note.
• The organs in this cauity.
• Why this is single. A witty con∣ceit of Aqua∣pendens.
• The fashion of the cauity
• Why porous or spongy.
• How lined.
• The necessity of the parts of this cauity.
• The first.
• Fenestra oualis
• Their vse.
• The water∣course.
• The passage of it.
• The 2. cauity.
• The forme.
• Cuniculi.
• The intersec∣tions.
• The first.
• The second.
• The third.
• The ••eason of the meanders
• Their perso∣rations.
• The vse ef conuolutions.
• The third ca∣uitie.
• The appella∣tions.
• Where situa∣ted.
• The figure.
• Eustachius.
• Empedocles,
• Aristetle.
• The mēbrane inuesting this cauitie. Vesalius
• Bauhine. The vse of these cauities.
• Why perfora∣tions are of diuers kinds.
• The vse of the 3. cauitie after Coiter.
• Where it ari∣seth.
• How many waies a nerue becomes hard and soft.
• 3 branches.
• Small threds of the audi∣tory nerue.
• Why those that are born deafe are also dumbe.
• The very nerue of hearing.
• The vse of it.
• The Chord.
• Eustachius.
• The obiects of all the sen∣ses. Plato. How this aire is generated.
• The nam••s of it.
• Where con∣teined.
• The nature of this aire.
• Pure. Arist. Problem.
• without sound Arist. Problem.
• Aristotles in∣stance.
• Why we can∣not hear well when wee yawne.
• Immooueable
• How it is mo¦uable.
• Plentifull.
• Separated from the out∣ward aire.
• The Nature of the implan¦ted Aire.
• Like the Ani∣mall Spirite.
• How nouri∣shed and re∣stored.
• Simplicius. Coyter.
• A passage out of Archangelus.
• What Diadosis or transump∣tion is.
• How the Aire is nourished.
• The vse of this Aire.
• Diuers opini∣ons. Aristotle
• Mundinus.
• Carpus.
• Varolius. Coiter. Archangelus.
• Aquapendens.
• Placentinus.
• Laurentius.
• Bauhine.
• An inward & an outward Medium.
• That it is not the chiefe or∣gan of hea∣ring.
• Three things required to Sensation. Obiect, Definition of a Sound. Medium.
• 3

  3. Instrument.
• How sound is made.
• How the scūd attainerh to the Eare. A fit compa∣tision.
• Vnda vocalis.
• What Ayre is fittest to re∣ceine a sound
• 1

  Diuets opini∣ons of the manner of hearing. 1. Empedocles.
• 2

  2. Alcmeon.
• 3

  3. Diogenes.
• 4

  4. Hippocrates.
• 5

  5. Plato.
• 6

  6. Aristotle.
• 7

  7. Galen.
• 8

  8. Vesalius.
• 9

  9. Messa.
• 10

  10. Coiter
• 11

  11. Laurentius.
• 11

  11. Archangelus
• 13

  13. Bauhine.
• The vseof the Hearing Aristotle.
• A deprecatiō.
• The outward vse.
• Nasuti.
• Aristotle.
• The names.
• The reason of the figure.
• And scituatiō.
• The diuision of the nose.
• And the names of the parts.
• The vse of the diuision.
• The diuision of each hole.
• The skin.
• The haires.
• The muscles
• The bones.
• The gristles.
• Vessels••
• The coat or membrane.
• Why wee sneeze when our nose is tickled.
• The vses of the outwarde Nose.
• That the mouth was not made to breath by.
• Galen.
• The inwarde nose made of two parts.
• The Spongye bone.
• 2. passages out of Hippocrates.
• Galen.
• 3. things re∣quired to sense The Obiect.
• Smelling the middle sense.
• Whence o∣dours haue their names,
• The consent betweene the smell & the taste.
• The medium, of the smell,
• How a man smelleth.
• That vnbloo∣dy creaturs do smell.
• A difference of this instru∣ment.
• Aristotles con∣ceit of the co∣uers refuted by Galen.
• An instance out of Galen.
• The instru∣ment.
• Varolius.
• Bauhine.
• The principal instrument.
• Not the Nose
• Galen. Not the bone
• Not the mem¦brane of the nose.
• Nor the palat
• Not the spon∣gie bone
• But the Mam millarie pro∣cesses.
• Their nature.
• Archangelus conceite of Nerues of Smelling.
• Bauhine
• Odors consist in exhalation
• A briefe Col∣lection of the manner of smelling
• The particu∣lar parts, with their names.
• Archangelus.
• A prouerbe out of Lyco∣phron.
• The mouth.
• The reason of the scituation.
• The parts of the mouth. The fleshy.
• The bones.
• The Pallate.
• The chiefe v∣ses of the mouth.
• The seconda∣ly vses of the mouth.
• The common muscles.
• The lips.
• The proper muscles of the Lips.
• The Iawes.
• The palate.
• Whereof fra∣med.
• The bones of it
• The holes of it.
• The coate of the Palate.
• Plinie. Why it is hollow.
• The names of the Vuula.
• The substāce.
• The names as they are pro∣perly giuen.
• The vse of the Vuula.
• Another.
• Columbus.
• Gainsaide by Fallopius.
• A third vse.
• Varolius his vse of the V∣uula.
• The extent of the word.
• Why it is cal∣led Isthmus.
• What parts are contained therein.
• Three sorts of glandules neere this place.
• The almonds
• The differēce betweene the swelling of the Almonds and the sqninsie.
• Paristhmia.
• Antiades.
• How couered
• A good note for Chyrur∣gions.
• The vse of the Almonds.
• The names.
• The place.
• The figure.
• The magni∣tude.
• Blaesi Balbi.
• What childrē speak slowly.
• The connexi∣ons of the tongue.
• Whereof cō∣pounded. The ligament
• The coate of the Tongue.
• The substāce of the tongue
• That it is not Musculous.
• The Fatte at the rootes.
• The Nerues of two kinds.
• A Caution.
• The Veines.
• The Arteries.
• The bodie of it.
• The vses of the tongue.
• The primarie vse. For Tasting.
• The tip of the Tongue.
• For Speech.
• A mans toung the Messen∣ger of the Braine.
• The Secon∣darie vse Chewing.
• Swallowing.
• Degrees of perfection in Creatures.
• The Muscles of the tongue
• Fiue paire.
• The roote of the Tongue.
• The vse of the kernels.
• The instru∣ment of tast∣ing.
• The principal particle.
• The matter in which tasts doe consist.
• Why sick foll•• thinke al things bitter.
• Bauhine of himselfe Galen.
• The Medium of the taste.
• The obiect.
• The kinds of sapors.
• The conclusi∣on.
• The names and reasons thereof.
• What it is.
• The situation.
• And reasons. thereof.
• The figure.
• The magni∣tude.
• The conne∣xion.
• The parts. Why Gristle.
• Why not bo∣ny.
• Columbus opi∣nion that it is bony.
• Disproued by Fallopius.
• Otherreasons why it must be gristly.
• Not of one gristle.
• The number of the gristles
• The muscles.
• The Names of the gristles.
• The first Gri∣stle.
• Pomum Adami
• Why womens throttles doe not appeare as mens.
• But one Gri∣stle.
• Connexion.
• Substance.
• 4. Processes.
• The Cauities
• The vse of the Shield-gristle.
• The seco•••• gristle.
• Why cald in∣nominata
• The situation
• And reason thereof.
• The figure.
• The 〈◊〉〈◊〉
• The quantity.
• The connexi∣on.
• The third gristle. It is indeed double.
• The substance
• The processes vpper.
• Lower.
• The motion of the gristles to what vse they serue.
• The sinus or cauities be∣twixt the first and third gristles.
• Bauhine first made mentiō of them.
• Their vse.
• The Glottis.
• Situation.
• Figure.
• How it is diui∣ded.
• The composi∣tion of it.
• How moyst∣ned.
• Vox clangesa.
• How the voice becommeth hoarse.
• Galen.
• The rest of the Glottis. The motion thereof.
• The inner slit
• Arantius
• The vse of the Glottis. The chiefe instrument of the voyce. Galen.
• Wee may breath with∣out a voyce.
• Hippocrates calleth it cla strum the lock or baspe. What it is.
• The situation Connexion.
• The forme.
• Rigid or stiffe.
• Yet soft too.
• The reason thereof.
• The motion of it in men Natural.
• Insome beasts voluntary.
• The vse of the Epiglottis.
• Part of the drink g••ts in∣to the wezon. An instance.
• The vse of pectoral medicines.
• Why wee cough when anie thing fals into the wea∣zon.
• Aristotle.
• Another vse.
• The mēbrane of the Larynx
• Why the mem¦branes of the Larynx are moyst.
• Whence a pleasant voice proceedeth.
• Why they are 〈◊〉〈◊〉 & thick.
• Why they are laxe.
• The Inner coate.
• How a voice is made.
• The definitiō of a voyce.
• What things āre required to a sound. The bodyes must be hard.
• Broade and plaine.
• And polished for the better sound.
• What is re¦quired to a voyce.
• The ayre ex∣pired.
• By which of the spirituall instruments the ayre is broken.
• It is broken by the throtle and why.
• How this aire is broken.
• Vehement impusilō of the aire is requi∣red vnto the sound.
• How ex∣sufflation is made.
• The vse of the voice.